1 introduction please register pdf splitter and merger

Mill Expansion Plan (MEP) EIA Report

Dhaula Village Barnala District, Punjab

Chapter 1 – Introduction

Prepared by & C1-1

1 INTRODUCTION

1.1 Trident Group

Trident group is a dynamic and continuously growing group, having a textile

division, Terry Towel Division (TTD), which is one among the top five (5)

global terry towel giants, agro/wood paper manufacturing unit, Trident Ltd.,

Paper Division (TLPD) and Colour Textile Limited (CTL) one of the largest

producers of yarn in India. In addition, Trident Group has a Sulphuric Acid

Plant (SAP). Trident group today is a USD 1 billion enterprise with an

employee head account of more than 10,000 and providing indirect

employment to 20,000 people.

1.2 TLPD – Paper Mill

TLPD was established in Barnala, Punjab, in the year 1993. The mill was

initially established with 75 tpd capacity paper machine (PM #1) producing

printing and writing grade paper, based on wheat straw as basic raw

material and later PM #1 has been upgraded to produce upto 110 tpd. In

the Mill Development Plan (MDP) in 2005, TLPD has installed a new paper

machine (PM #2) of capacity 265 tpd, a new Elemental Chlorine Free

(ECF) based 225 tpd wheat straw fibre line and 65 tpd hard wood fibre line.

TLPD was accorded Environmental Clearance (EC) for the above Mill

Development Plan (MDP) in 2005 vide File no.J-11011/52/2005 IA-II(I)

dated, 07.11.2005 for increase in paper production from 265 tpd to 375 tpd

( Copy of the EC enclosed as Annexure 1)

1.2.1 Awards and Public Accolades

Trident group has received the following awards:

ICSI National award for excellence in corporate governance in 2006

International supplier award of the year in 2001, 2003, 2005 and

2006 from Wal-Mart USA

Home quality award – Best supplier of the year in 2006 and 2009

from JC Penney

Innovation award for the year 2010 from JC Pennay

Best supplier of the year in 2010 from IKEA

Sustainability award for the year 2009 and 2010 from IKEA

Please register PDF Splitter and Merger

DEMO




Prepared by & C1-2

1.2.2 Facilities and Technology

Trident Limited-Paper Division (TLPD) – (formerly Abhisekh Industries

limited-AIL) manufactures a wide range of printing and writing papers

including copier paper; the principal raw materials are wheat straw; an

agricultural residue and wood. Trident produces high quality eco friendly

paper.

TLPD is an ISO 9001:2008, OHSAS 18001:2007, ISO 14001:2004 and

FSC certified mill with an integrated pulp and paper mill.

The following facilities and technologies are adopted in TLPD.

One of the Biggest Mill in the world based on Wheat Straw with

METSO Continuous Digester

METSO Fibre line with ECF Bleaching sequence of O-D-E (OP)-D to

get pulp brightness of 86% ISO

Ultra modern Paper Machine by Allimand, France (A sizer, coated

paper).

First mill in India to have brand new Bielomatik machine from

Germany specially designed for US Letter size copier

Upgraded Packaging and Converting Section with latest equipment

First Mill in the world to use ECF bleaching and Oxygen

Delignification on Wheat Straw

First Mill in India to Adopt Fuzzy logic for Burner Management in

Limekiln

Recovery Boiler and Power Boiler designed for Low emission level

less than 75 mg/Nm3.

Evaporators designed for high solids with higher steam economy

Flexibility of operations and Raw material mix

Latest DCS and Energy efficient equipments

Production of Eco friendly and Value added papers for better Eco

System


DEMO




Prepared by & C1-3

Auto reel cutting, auto reel wrapping and auto sheeting to get perfect

finish product.

ECH Will's cutter for perfect finish branded copier paper

1.2.3 Environmental Contribution

Eco friendly technology & State of the Art Equipments. ECF

Technology is utilized for pulp bleaching to reduce environmental load

One of the best water conservation Mill in India

Help reduce Carbon footprint by providing assured market to farmers

for their agricultural residue at their doorsteps

Meet the AOX limit of 1.0 kg/MT paper

Recovery and Power Boiler designed for Low emissions level less

than 75 mg/Nm3

Setting benchmarks in water & air consumption and discharge norms

Evaporation designed for high solids with higher steam economy

1.3 The Proposed Expansion Project

The Mill Expansion Plan is conceptuated to increase the paper production

capacity from 1,37,000 tpa to 2,01,000 tpa by upgrading existing paper

machines, fibre lines and increasing captive co-generation power capacity

from 49.4 to 90.9 MW (Hereinafter called MEP).

1.3.1 Nature of the Project

Trident Limited Paper Division (TLPD) proposes to expand by implementing

Mill Expansion Plan (MEP) with a view to improve technology, energy

efficiency, marketability and long term environmental compliance.

MEP will comprise the following:

Up-gradation of paper machines #1 & #2 to increase production of

paper from 1,37,000 tpa to 2,01,000 tpa

Up-gradation of the exiting ECF straw pulp mill to increase the

capacity from 82,500 tpa to 1,02,500 tpa


DEMO




Prepared by & C1-4

Up-gradation of the existing ECF wood pulp mill to increase the

capacity from 24000 tpa to 55000 tpa

Increase Captive Co-generation Plant (CCP) from 49.4 MW to 90.9

MW by adding another 41.5 MW power plant.

Upgrade / augment supporting sections consisting of chemical

recovery, water intake, water treatment and wastewater treatment to

match the above capacities

The driving force for the MEP is a combination of a quest for improved

environmental performance and an increasing market demand for paper

and to sustain in the market.

1.3.2 Project Location

The proposed project facilities will be installed within the existing mill

premises as adequate land is available within the existing plant. TLPD is

located at Dhaula village, Barnala District in Punjab state. The site is

located at the intersection of longitude 30°17'' 57'N and latitude 75°29” 32'

E. The site is about 175 km from Chandigarh the state capital and at about

7 km from the National Highway.

1.4 Need for the Project

With the steady increase in input costs and continuous competition from the

new units with better quality products, apart from dumping by overseas

manufacturers, the mill has to find ways and means to meet these

challenges and for its continued economically viable operation for

sustenance. The proposed MEP is to debottleneck the imbalances in

various sections in the production facilities and optimise the overall

production capacities of the plant and thus reduce the cost of production.

A review of the existing facilities of the captive generation plant reveals that

the captive co-generation capacity is less compared to the existing power

requirement by about 5.0 MW (max) and is met from the state grid. Further,

the group companies are also expanding their activities and the power

requirement is likely to go up from the existing 26 MW to 50 MW in addition

to the MEP requirement of 31.2 MW from the existing 19 MW. The MEP

proposes 100% captive generation of power and steam for its post MEP

operations.

The objectives of the proposed MEP are:


DEMO




Prepared by & C1-5

To meet the growing demand for paper in the country

To facilitate manufacture of paper by environmentally friendly

processes

To reduce overall cost of production by debottlenecking the

production imbalances

To achieve 100% captive power generation by going in for high

pressure and high efficiency boilers and turbines and reduce

dependence on the state grid

To adopt energy efficient processes, plant and machinery

1.4.1 Employment Generation

The direct manpower requirement for the performance of the project’s

regular function will be around 100 people. The project will provide scope

for indirect employment of about 500 people during construction stage and

about 500 people during operation in the areas of material handling,

transport and ancillary units.

1.5 Need for the EIA study

According to the Environmental Impact Assessment Notification issued by

Ministry of Environment and Forests MoEF under Environment Protection

Act, 1986, Paper and Pulp Industries (excluding manufacture of paper from

waste paper) are required to obtain Environmental Clearance. In addition to

this, any Captive Co-Generation Power Plant with capacity greater than 5

MW should also obtain environmental clearance.

Since the proposed facility is involved in the manufacture of additional pulp,

the current subject project falls under category “A” under sector 5(i). In

addition to this, it is proposed to Increase Captive Co-generation Power

Plant (CCP) from 49.4 MW to 90.9 MW by adding another 41.5 MW

Captive Co-Generation Power Plant within the Mill site, which falls under

category “B” under sector 1(d) of the EIA Notification 2006. Since the mill is

located in industrial area, public consultation has been exempted.

1.5.1 Project Screening (Cat A) and TOR

The proposed expansion project was appraised by the Reconstituted

Expert Appraisal Committee (Industry), Ministry of Ministry of Environment


DEMO




Prepared by & C1-6

and Forest (MoEF) during the 6th Expert Appraisal Committee meeting held

on 7th March 2013 and the project was accorded Terms of Reference (ToR)

vide File no.J-11011/1/2013-IA-II (I), dated, 25th April 2013 and the copy of

the ToR is enclosed as Annexure 2. As per the ToR Public Hearing is

exempted for this project since the mill is located in in the notified Industrial

area. The copy of the Gazette Notification issued by Department of

Industries and Commerce, Government of Punjab is enclosed as

Annexure 3

1.6 Project Promoters & Environmental Consultant

In conformity with the guidelines of Ministry of Environment and Forests

(MoEF), TLPD has embarked on Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA)

for the proposed Mill Expansion Plan (MEP). The EIA study was

undertaken covering all the aspects of the specific conditions mentioned in

the terms of reference issued by MoEF. This EIA study was undertaken by

M/s Cholamandalam MS Risk Services (CMSRSL), Chennai, a NABET

accredited EIA consulting organisation, with specific project related inputs

required for undertaking the EIA studies from M/s. SPB Projects and

Consultancy Ltd (SPB-PC), Chennai.

M/s Cholamandalam MS Risk Services is accreditated to undertake EIA

studies for Pulp and Paper sector and Thermal Power Plants as per the

National Accreditation Board for Education and Training (NABET) scheme,

constituent Board of Quality Council of India. A copy of the accreditation of

CMSRSL and the external agency involved in the EIA study is presented in

Annexure 4.

1.7 Regulatory Context

The following environmental laws are applicable to the proposed project:

Environment Protection Act 1986, Water (Prevention and Control of

Pollution) Act 1974, Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act 1981,

Storage and handling of hazardous material, Hazardous waste

(Management and Handling) Rules 1989.

The following guidelines and regulations are applicable for the proposed

expansion project: EIA Notification and its amendments, Emission and

wastewater discharge standards stipulated by Ministry of Environment and

Forests (MoEF) and Punjab Pollution Control Board (PPCB), Noise level

standards, National Ambient Air Quality Standards, minimum stack height


DEMO




Prepared by & C1-7

requirements specified by Central Pollution Control Board, fly ash utilisation

notifications etc.

1.7.1 Ambient Air Quality Standards

The Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981, with its latest

amendment, to prevent and control air pollution, in line with the general

standards prescribed in the Act. The general standards for National

Ambient Air Quality follow Schedule VII prescribed in Environment

(Protection) Rules 1986 and Schedule I of Environment (Protection) Rules

1986.The National ambient air quality standard is given in Table 1.1

Table 1.1

National Ambient Air Quality Standards

Concentration in Ambient Air (µg/m3) Pollutant Time

Weighted Average

Industrial Residential,

Rural & Other Areas

Ecologically Sensitive Areas

(notified by Central Government)

Annual Average*

50 20Sulphur dioxide (SO2) (µg/m3)

24 hrs** 80 80

Annual Average*

40 30Nitrogen dioxide (NO2) (µg/m3)

24 hrs ** 80 80

Annual Average*

60 60Particulate Matter (Size less than 10 µg) (PM10) (µg/m

3)

24 hrs ** 100 100

Annual Average*

40 40Particulate Matter (Size less than 2.5 µg) (PM2.5) (µg/m

3)

24 hrs ** 60 60

8 hrs ** 100 100Ozone (O3) (µg/m3)

1 hrs ** 180 180

Annual Average*

0.5 0.5Lead (Pb) (µg/m3)

24 hrs ** 1.5 1.0

8 hrs ** 2000 2000Carbon monoxide (CO) (µg/m3)

1 hrs ** 4000 4000

Annual Average*

100 100Ammonia (NH3) (µg/m3)

24 hrs ** 400 400

Benzene (C6H6) Annual* 5 5

Benzo(a) Pyrene (BaP)- Particulate phase only (µg/m

3)

Annual* 0.001 0.001

Arsenic (As) (µg/m3) Annual* 0.006 0.006

Nickel (Ni) (µg/m3) Annual* 0.020 0.020

* Annual arithmetic mean of minimum 104 measurements in a year taken

twice a week 24 hourly at uniform interval.


DEMO




Prepared by & C1-8

** 24 hourly/8 hourly values should be met 98% of the time in a year.

However, 2% of the time, it may exceed but not on two consecutive days.

1.7.2 Air Emission Discharge Standards

According to the Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB) emission

discharge standards for paper and pulp industry, particulate matter

emissions from point source emissions from captive co-generation power

plant should not exceed 150 mg/Nm3.

1.7.3 Minimum Stack Height Standards

According to the environmental protection rules, a minimum stack height of

the thermal power plant will be defined based on the total sulphur dioxide

(SO2) emission released from the stack using empirical formula (14 x

(Q)0.3, where Q is expressed in SO2 emission rate in kg/h).

1.7.4 Diesel Generator Noise Standards

The sound pressure level at one (1) m from the new diesel generator sets

shall be less than 86 dBA and adequate noise control measures (acoustics

etc) shall be provided as per the MoEF regulations.

1.7.5 Work-zone Noise Standards

Noise levels in the work-zone area should exceed 85 dBA for a cumulative

exposure time of eight (8) hrs. The CPCB has since finalised the Ambient

Air Quality standards in respect of Noise under Section 16 (2) (h) of the Air

(Prevention & Control of Pollution) Act, 1981 as amended in 1987. General

noise standards are given in Table-1.2.

Table 1.2

General Noise Standards

Limits in dB (A) Leq Area Code

Category Area

Day Time Night Time

A Industrial area 75 70

B Commercial area 65 55

C Residential area 55 45

D Silence zone 50 40

Definition

Day time: Between 6 AM and 10 PM Night time: Between 10 PM and 6 AM

Silence Zone: Areas upto 100 metres around such premises as hospitals,

educational institutions and courts. The silence zones are to be declared by


DEMO




Prepared by & C1-9

the Competent Authority. Use of vehicular horns, loudspeakers and

bursting of crackers shall be banned in these zones.

1.7.6 Treated Wastewater Discharge Standards – Large Pulp and Paper Mill

Sector

The relevant standards for a Large Pulp and Paper Mill for the wastewater

discharge as per Environment Protection Agency (EPA) Notifications are

presented in the following Table 1.3

Table 1.3 Wastewater Discharge Standards

S.No Parameter Not to exceed

1 Flow Large pulp and paper mill Large rayon grade/newsprint

200 m

3/tonne of paper produced

150 m3/tonne of paper produced

2 pH 7.0-8.5

3 Suspended Solids 500 mg/l

4 BOD at 27°C for 3 days 30 mg/l

5 COD 350 mg/l

6 TOCL 2 .0 kg/tonne of product

7 Absorbable Organic Halogens (AOX) 1 kg/ tonne of product

1.7.7 Standards for Motor Vehicle Emissions

Standards for emission of smoke, vapour etc. from motor vehicles

Every motor vehicle shall be manufactured and maintained in such

condition and shall be so driven that smoke, visible vapour, grit,

sparks, ashes, cinders or oily substance do not emit there from.

On and from the 1 st day of March 1990, every motor vehicle in use

shall comply with the following standards:

a) Idling CO (carbon monoxide) emission limit for all four wheeled

petrol driven vehicles shall not exceed 3 per cent by volume.

b) Idling CO emission limit for all two and three wheeled petrol

driven vehicles shall not exceed 4.5 percent by volume.

c) Smoke density for all diesel driven vehicles shall be as

follows in Table 1.4


DEMO




Prepared by & C1-10

Table 1.4 Smoke Density for all Diesel Generator

Maximum smoke density Method of Test Limit absorption

co-efficient Bosch units

Hatridge units

a) Full load at a speed of 60% to 70% of maximum engine rated speed declared by the manufacturer

3.1 5.2 75

b) Free acceleration 2.3 - 65

1.7.8 Hazardous Wastes (Management and Handling) Rules, 1989 with

subsequent Amendments 2000, 2002, 2003 and 2008

The Ministry of Environment and Forests, Government of India, has

enacted the above rules so as to ensure effective collection, storage,

treatment, transport, reception, import and disposal of hazardous wastes.

Any occupier or unit, generating hazardous wastes and involved in the

collection, storage, treatment, transport, reception import and disposal of

hazardous wastes should obtain authorisation of the Pollution Control

Board.

All units generating or handling hazardous wastes more than the regulatory

quantities will have to apply for the authorisation of the Board in a

prescribed form. In the amendments introduced in the year 2000, 44

categories were listed. In 2002, lists of processes generating hazardous

were regrouped into a total of 47 hazardous processes, generating

hazardous wastes. In the amendments brought in 2008, the list of

hazardous processes and waste from them were reduced to 36 after

regrouping. The Table 1.5 gives standards applicable for to pulp and paper

industry.

Table 1.5

List of Hazardous Wastes as Applicable to Pulp & Paper Industry

S,No Processes Hazardous wastes

1 5. Industrial operations using mineral/synthetic oil as lubricant in hydraulic systems or other applications

5.1 Used/spent oil 5.2 Wastes/residues containing oil

2 32. Pulp & Paper industry 32.1 Spent chemicals 32.2 Corrosive wastes arising from use of strong acid and bases 32.3 Sludge containing adsorbable organic halides


DEMO




Prepared by & C1-11

1.7.9 Charter on Corporate Responsibility for Environmental Protection

(CREP)

The Charter on CREP, which was launched in 2002, in a National Seminar

at New Delhi, enlists time-bound action plans in respect of highly polluting

categories of various industries, including pulp and paper, for progressive

up-gradation of technologies and in-plant practices for reduction of

pollutants as well as improvement in waste management systems. An

industry specific interaction meet with respect to pulp and paper industry

was organised in December 2002 and the CREP norms came into force in

2003. The charter on CREP requires the following norms for the pulp and

paper industry to be implemented within the schedule specified.

Type of Industry/Requirement Implementation Schedule

Large Pulp and Paper Mill

AOX 1.5 kg/tonne of paper within 2 years

Discharge of AOX kg/tonne of paper

AOX 1 kg/tonne of paper within 5 years

Installation of lime kiln Within 4 years

Less than 140 m3/tonne of paper

within 2 years

Less than 120 m3/tonne of paper

within 4 years for units installed before 1992

Wastewater discharge m3/tonne of paper

Less than 100 m3/tonne of paper per

units installed after 1992

Odour control by burning the reduced sulphur emissions in the boiler/lime kiln

Installation of odour control system within 4 years

Utilisation of treated wastewater for irrigation

Utilisation of treated wastewater for irrigation wherever possible

Colour removal from the wastewater Indian Paper Manufacturers Association to take up project with Central Pulp & Paper Research Institute

1.8 Mill site Location (Existing Mill)

TLPD is located at Dhaula village, Barnala District in Punjab state. Index

map of the Mill site (Existing Mill) Shown in Figure-1,1. Google map

showing mill site is shown in Figure 1.2


DEMO




Prepared by & C1-12

Figure- 1.1: Index Map of Mill site

Existing Mill

Site


DEMO




Prepared by & C1-13

Figure- 1.2: Google Map showing Existing Mill Site

1.8.1 Environmental Setting of the Study Area

The details of environmental setting around the proposed expansion site

are given in the following Table 1.6

Table 1.6

Environmental Setting of the Study Area

S.No. Particulars Details

Location:

Village Dhaula

District Barnala

1

State Punjab

2 Latitude 30°17''57’N

3 Longitude 75° 29''32’E

4 Elevation above mean sea level (MSL)

224 M

5 Climatic conditions as per IMD Annual Max. Temp :43.5°C Annual Min. Temp : 7.8°C Annual total rainfall : 686.3mm

6 Present land use at the mill site Open spaces within the existing plant/Mill

7 Nearest Highway/Road State Highway -13 - 600 m

8 Defence installations Nil within 10 km radius

9 Nearest railway station Barnala (12 .0 km)

10 Nearest airport/air strip Chandigarh (175 km)

11 Nearest village Dhaula (5 km)

12 Nearest town Barnala(10 km)

13 Nearest river Nil in 10 km radius

14 Hills/valleys Nil in 10 km radius


DEMO




Prepared by & C1-14


15 Archaeologically important places Nil in 10 km radius

16 Nearest place of Tourist/ Religious importance

Nil in 10 km radius

17 Ecologically sensitive areas (National Parks/Wildlife sanctuaries/ bio-sphere reserves)

Nil in 10 km radius

18 Reserved/ Protected forests within 10 km radius

Nil in 10 km radius

19 List of Major Polluting Industries There are no major industries in the study area.

20 Topography of the plant site Fully developed existing industrial area as per the Punjab State Government GO. Dated 22

nd March 2011.

21 Nature of soil Sandy and sandy loam

1.9 Overview of the Methodology of the EIA Study

This Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) report has been prepared

based on the methods and guidelines suggested by MoEF to address all

the specific conditions stipulated in the Terms of Reference issued by

MoEF F.No.J-11011/1/2013-IA II (I) dated, 25th April 2013. A summary

compliance statement to the specific conditions of the terms of reference is

presented in Annexure 2.

The EIA study team, headed by an accredited EIA Coordinator, along with

the approved Functional Area Experts, undertook detailed baseline studies

and the additional special studies as per TOR between 14th October 2013

to 18th January 2014.

In order to demonstrate compliance to conditions of Consents stipulated by

PPCB and Environmental Clearance issued by MoEF, monitoring of

parameters in the treated effluent discharge, emissions from stack,

periodical Ambient Air Quality and Noise level monitoring are also being

carried out by the TLPD and analysis results are also submitted to

concerned authorities regularly.

Micro-meteorological data comprising hourly readings of wind speed, wind

direction, dry bulb temperature, relative humidity and rainfall were

measured by installing an onsite meteorological station near the Mill site.

Hourly readings were collected for a period of three (3) months.

Micro-meteorological data was adopted for generating wind-rose diagrams

and also to predict the ground level concentrations due to release of


DEMO




Prepared by & C1-15

emissions from the proposed facility. As per the terms of reference issued

for the project, site specific mixing heights and inversion conditions were

estimated using SODAR technique.

Ambient Air Quality (AAQ) was measured at eight (8) locations in the study

area as per the methods and procedures recommended by Central

Pollution Control Board (CPCB) Air quality sampling was undertaken for

period of 12 weeks with a total of 24 samples per site were taken as per the

MoEF guidelines.

Stipulated criteria pollutants such as particulate matter size less than 10

microns (PM10), particulate matter size less than 2.5 microns (PM2.5),

Sulphur Dioxide (SO2), Nitrogen Dioxide (NO2), Ammonia (NH3), Ozone

(O3), Carbon Monoxide (CO), Lead (Pb), Nickel (Ni), Arsenic (As), Benzene

and Particulate phase Benzo (a) Pyrene (BaP) were analysed at all the

locations.

In addition to the above parameters, representative samples of particulate

matter samples (PM10) were also analysed for heavy metals, representative

ions and prominent Polycyclic Aromatic Hydrocarbons (PAHs) as per the

requirements of terms of reference issued by MoEF.

The measured background air quality data was compared with that of the

prevailing National Ambient Air Quality Standards and this will also form the

basis for predicting the cumulative air quality scenario due to the operation

of the proposed facility.

Hydro-geological studies were undertaken during the study period. Data on

sub-surface soil profile and also bore-log data in the study area was

obtained. In addition, a preliminary study on the regional and local aquifer

status was studied based on primary and secondary published long-term

data. Draw-down tests were undertaken at a few bore wells to assess the

condition of the ground water yield near the mill site.

Ground water samples from eight (8) locations were analysed as per the

terms of reference for all the designated parameters. The measured values

were compared with drinking water standards. The duro-V diagrams were

plotted to study the chemical properties of the ground water. This will help

to assess the scaling and corrosion potential of these waters. Secondary

data on the regional ground water status was also collected from the

Central Ground Water Board and the State Ground Water Board.


DEMO




Prepared by & C1-16

There are no major perennial rivers flowing within the study area. All

seasonal streams and rivers located within the study area were mapped

through latest remote sensing data under land use and land cover study.

Walkthrough surveys were undertaken to assess the current status of the

water resources. Details about the major cropping pattern and irrigation

methods etc were collected from local village offices and also published

district census data. Details of the surface water quality in the study area

were also collected and analysed for designated physicochemical,

elemental and biological parameters.

Land use and land cover was mapped using remote satellite imagery,

Ressourcesat 2 L4FMX dated 3rd January 2014. The data was processed

using applicable software models and level 1 and level 2 land use

classification within the study area was developed. As per the

recommendations made in the Terms of Reference (ToR), Digital Elevation

Model of the study area was developed to assess the terrain conditions and

also possible flooding scenarios, although there are no perennial rivers in

the study area.

A walkthrough survey was also undertaken in the major settlements and

plantation areas to verify the land use as a part of the ground truth survey

procedures. Soil samples were collected at 8 locations as per the terms of

reference and all relevant parameters such as texture, nutrients, heavy

metals, oil and grease and other parameters were analysed in the soil

samples.

Flora and Fauna survey was undertaken in the study area and all spotted

ecological and biological aspects were mapped based on grind sampling

method. Bio-diversity density and abundance were estimated. Walkthrough

surveys near forest areas and its environs were also undertaken to assess

the ecology around the forest areas and dependency of the local people on

the forest produce.

Primary socio economic survey was undertaken in the study area to

capture the socioeconomic conditions, major occupation of the people,

drinking water and sanitation facilities, transportation and other amenities in

the study area, with a specific reference to the villages located within five

(5) km radius of the mill site.


DEMO




Prepared by & C1-17

In addition to the above, district level census data published by National

Informatics Centre (NIC) was also collected for a detailed analysis on the

socioeconomic aspects. Based on the socioeconomic survey, a need

based Community Development Plan under Corporate Social

Responsibility (CSR) was suggested. Since, the expansion is within the

existing plant detailed Rehabilitation and Resettlement studies are not

envisaged under this study; however, the indirect impacts on the local and

regional community due to land acquisition were studied.

A detailed review on the process and material balance of the proposed

expansion were undertaken. Water and energy balance diagrams were

developed as per the terms of reference issued for the proposed project. In

addition, a detailed review on the process technology, material balance,

source of raw materials, fuels etc were also studied.

A typical review on the process equipment, various pollution control

systems proposed details of wastes and discharges that are envisaged

from the proposed expansion project were also undertaken. Such inputs

are adopted while predicting various environmental impacts due to

operation of the facility and also to suggest an appropriate environmental

management plan and environmental monitoring plan.

As a part of the environmental impact assessment study, an attempt was

made to predict the possible and likely impacts on background

environment. Likely air quality impacts due to release of emissions (captive

co-generation power plant and vehicular emissions) were modelled using

ISCST3 model. Ground level concentration of criteria pollutants such as

Particulate Matter, Sulphur Dioxide, Oxides of Nitrogen were estimated

using MOEF approved ISCST3 model. Hourly meteorological data

generated at the Mill site was adopted to assess ground level

concentrations. Second highest ground level concentrations were predicted

and concentration isopleths of the above mentioned pollutants were plotted.

Also an attempt was made to estimate the wind-borne dust emissions due

to storage and handling coal at the stock yard within the plant site.

Published emission factor guidelines were adopted for estimating coal dust

emissions (USEPA).

The predicted ground level concentrations of the respective pollutants were

added to the prevailing baseline concentrations of the designated pollutants


DEMO




Prepared by & C1-18

to assess the likely cumulative post project scenario and such values were

compared with the National Ambient Air Quality Standards.

Noise generating sources and the expected noise levels (with and without

control measures) were estimated. ISO compliant noise propagation

models were adopted to predict likely noise levels at the facility boundary

and nearby villages.

Impact due to utilisation of treated wastewater for green cover and irrigation

applications was studied using existing soil quality data and ground water

quality data at the places where treated waste water has been utilized in

the existing facilities. In addition to that one dimension sub-soil pollutant

transport model published by U.S Environmental Protection Agency to

predict long term impacts if any

In addition to the above aspects, the positive environmental benefits arising

from community development plans under CSR programme, ecological and

biodiversity enhancement aspects due to development of plantation and

green-cover development in the vicinity of the Mill site were also studied.

Based on a detailed environmental impact assessment study, a report on

the environmental management plan was developed covering the following

aspects: construction phase environmental management plan, air quality

management plan, noise and water quality management plan, wastewater

treatment, reuse, recycling and disposal programme, solid and hazardous

waste collection, storage and disposal programme, fly ash collection and

utilization plan, rainwater harvesting plan, socioeconomic and community

development plan, ecological and biodiversity enhancement plan. An

outline of the proposed environmental management systems,

environmental cell and environmental monitoring programme were also

presented in this report.

Although the proposed expansion facility utilises the limited quantities of

flammable and combustible materials with threshold levels below the

stipulated quantities under Hazardous Materials Handling Rules, a

preliminary risk assessment study, was undertaken to assess the residual

risks, if any, due to storage and handling of furnace oil and coal. Wherever

applicable, quantitative methods were adopted to establish the heat

radiation levels due to accidental fires at diesel storage facilities.


DEMO




Prepared by & C1-19

CPCB guidelines on risk assessment methods were adopted and CPR 18E

guidelines were used for estimating the consequences of fire accidents.

Based on the risk assessment study, a preliminary fire safety and

occupational health management plan was suggested. A road map for

onsite emergency and disaster management plan was suggested based on

the preliminary information available at this stage.

Public Hearing is exempted for this project since the mill is located in in the

notified Industrial area.

1.10 Structure of the EIA Report

This EIA report is structured into nine chapters as below.


Chapter 2 – (Environmental Management Aspects in the Existing

Facility) Overview of the of the existing facilities and consents issued (EC,

NOC etc), Summary of the environmental compliance, Air pollution

sources, stacks as per the NOC and summary of the emission test results,

Water allocation, Water consumption and water balance in the existing

facility, Wastewater quality and ETP data, Summary of various

environmental monitoring programs adopted, Details of the environmental

management cell.

Chapter 3 (Details of the Proposed Expansion Project) presents details

of the proposed expansion facility, land requirement and procurement

process, process and material balance, raw-materials and energy balance

and details of various supporting facilities required for the project, status of

various permits and clearances obtained and an outline of the project cost

and project implementation schedules.

Chapter 4 - (Baseline Environmental Status) presents a comprehensive

description of the baseline environmental conditions of the study area

including site specific mixing heights and ground level inversion conditions.

This includes the data obtained from primary surveys and also secondary

published data from various authentic sources. All the specified

environmental components such as meteorological data, air quality, noise

levels, surface and ground water resources, surface and ground water

quality, geological and mineralogical features, soil quality, land use and

land cover in the study area, cropping pattern, ecological and biological


DEMO




Prepared by & C1-20

environmental conditions and socioeconomic and cultural aspects of the

Mill site. All the relevant aspects as mentioned in the Terms of Reference

(ToR) were thoroughly addressed.

Chapter 5 – (Prediction of Environmental Impacts) presents the

environmental aspects associated with the proposed project, envisaged

emissions and discharges from the facility, an overview of various pollution

control systems proposed under project planning activities in the detailed

project report and construction and operational phase environmental

impacts.

Chapter 6 – (Environmental Management Plan) depicts the summary of

proposed environmental management plan.

Chapter 7 – (Risk Assessment and Risk Mitigation Plan) presents the

findings of the risk assessment study, risk mitigation plan, a preliminary

onsite emergency and disaster management plan.

Chapter 8 – (Project Benefits) presents the benefits of the project.

Chapter 9 – Presents the (Summary and Conclusion) of EIA report.

Chapter 10 – Disclosure and Declaration by Consultant presents the

declaration by the EIA consultant organisation as per the NABET

requirements.


DEMO




Prepared by & C1-21

(This page intentionally left blank)


DEMO

Mill Expansion Plan (MEP) EIA Report Dhaula Village Barnala District, Punjab

Chapter 2 – Environmental Management Aspects in the Existing Facilities

Prepared by & C2-1

2 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT ASPECTS IN THE EXISTING FACILITIES

2.1 Overview of the of the Existing Facilities

This section presents an overview of the existing facilities of Trident Limited

and its environmental compliance aspects and Environmental Management

Program implemented in the existing facility.

Trident Limited-Paper Division (TLPD) was established in Dhaula village,

Barnala District, Punjab, in the year 1993.The mill was initially established with

75 tpd capacity paper machine (PM#1) producing printing and writing grade

paper, based on wheat straw as basic raw material and later PM #1 has been

upgraded to produce upto 110 tpd. TLPD was accorded Environmental

Clearance (EC) for Mill Development Plan (MDP) during 2005 vide File no.J-

11011/52/2005 IA-II(I) dated, 07.11.2005 for increasing Paper production from

265 tpd to 375 tpd by upgrading PM # 1 to 110 tpd and installing PM # 2 of

capacity 265 tpd Elemental Chlorine Free (ECF) based 225 tpd wheat straw

pulp mill and 65 tpd wood waste based pulp mill and Captive generation of

49.4 MW. The mill is regularly submitting the Environmental compliance report

to the Regional Office of MoEF.

At present, TLPD is producing printing and writing grade papers with two (2)

paper machines, with a finished paper production capacity of 375 tpd from

wheat straw and wood pulp. TLPD complied with all conditions of the EC

issued by MOEF for Mill Development Plant (MDP). The Mill has obtained

CTO vide No. SEE (ZP-II)/SGR/APC/2012-13/V-(371) V-413 dated,

23.07.2013 under Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981 and CTO

No. SEE (ZP-II)/SGR/WPC/2012-13/V-(399)V-518 dated, 23.07.2013 under

Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974 for Mill Development

Plan (MDP).Extension of validity for Consent has also been obtained under Air

and water Act and the validity of the consents is up to 22nd January 2016. The

copy of the consent and their renewal is enclosed as Annexure 5

The mill has total land of 405 acres, with vacant spaces and well covered with

greenery, and plantation covering about 165 acres.


DEMO



Prepared by & C2-2

2.2 Process Description of the Existing facilities

The brief description of the existing process is given below

2.2.1 Raw Material Preparation

2.2.1.1 Straw Pulp Mill

The new wheat straw pulping plant was supplied by METSO. The plant’s rated

capacity is 225 BD tpd bleached pulp. The raw material, wheat straw, after de-

dusting and sand removal, is sent to cooking section, consisting of two (2)

continuous digesters, each of 125 tpd capacity. After cooking, the pulp is

blown to the blow tank.

From the blow tank, the pulp is pumped through a Delta Knotter (K4) to

remove larger impurities and uncooked material to protect the washing

equipment. The reject is passed through a junk trap before it is washed in the

Johnson screen. In the Johnson screen, fibres are recovered and pumped

back to the blow tank. The reject is then collected in a suitable vessel and

dumped.

The accept from the Delta Knotter is washed in the first vacuum filter and then

pumped to the first twin roll press. After this, the pulp is passed to the second

vacuum filter and the second press, via screening plant. The pulp leaving the

final twin roll press is diluted to ~ 12% (alkali is added in the stand pipe) and

pumped through a mixer to the oxygen reactor.

From the reactor, the pulp is blown to the MC storage tower. The MC storage

tower has a residence time of approximately 6 hours (390 min at 12% pulp

consistency).The oxygen delignified pulp is then discharged evenly with a

tower scraper (SA-D450), diluted in the bottom of the tower and washed on

one twin roll press. The filtrate is used as wash liquor on the press prior to the

oxygen stage. The discharge consistency from the press is 30%. The pulp is

diluted with hot water of > 75°C.

2.2.1.2 Bleaching Sequence of Wheat Straw

In the bleach plant, most of the coloured residual lignin is removed by

bleaching to give the pulp brightness high enough for its final use. This is done

in three stages (ECF sequence):

D0 Chlorine dioxide 100% in the first stage

EOP Oxygen reinforced alkaline extraction; there is an option to add

peroxide in this stage

D1 Chlorine dioxide


DEMO



Prepared by & C2-3

The D0 and D1 stages are upflow towers with a tower scraper at the top

(discharge). The Eo stage consists of one pressurised reactor and blow down

tank.

2.2.1.3 Hard Wood Pulp Mill

The hardwood pulping plant has a chipper house, three (3) stationary

digesters, each of capacity 120 m³ including ODL stage at the end of washing

stage and D 0 , EOP, D 1 stage bleaching sequence with one (1) additional

D-stage filter and a new screening plant. The production capacity of this plant

is 65 tpd.

2.2.2 Pulp Mill

2.2.2.1 Pulp Making

Pulp is produced from cellulosic raw materials like wood, rice straw, wheat

straw. These raw materials contain, in addition to cellulose and hemi-cellulose,

a significant amount of lignin, which binds the cellulosic fibres. In pulping, the

cellulosic fibre is separated from the surrounding lignin, either by mechanical

or chemical means. Removal of lignin is further accomplished by oxygen

delignification.

2.2.2.2 Pulp Bleaching

Conventionally, the cooked unbleached pulp is brown in colour, due to the

presence of residual lignin and chemicals. In order to obtain good brightness

of paper, the pulp is bleached using strong oxidants like oxygen, chlorine

dioxide, NaOH, hydrogen peroxide, etc. The aim is to obtain good brightness

without degradation or loss of cellulosic fibre. The utilisation of elemental

chlorine is dispensed with, in recent new installations, by way of a change

over to chlorine dioxide/ozone.

The pulp mill process flow diagram is given in Figure 2.1


DEMO



Prepared by & C2-4

Figure-2.1: Pulp Mill - Flow Diagram

2.2.3 Paper Machine

2.2.3.1 Stock Preparation

Pulp is conditioned in the stock preparation section for bondage to form sheet.

The pulp received from pulp mill is passed through a series of refiners for

fibrillation and then the required additives viz. fillers, dyes, whitening agents,

rosin and alum are added. These are added to impart functional properties to

the final paper such as opacity, reflectance, shade and water resistance. The

final blended stock is pumped to paper machine chest.

2.2.3.2 Paper Making

The blended stock in very dilute suspension is allowed to flow and spread on a

moving wire where water is drained and fibre binds together to form a wet

web. The wet paper web is then pressed, dried and wound. Papermaking is

purely mechanical in nature and the variations exist only in the design of the

paper machine.

2.2.3.3 Paper Machine # 1

Paper Machine #1 (PM #1), installed in 1993, was supplied by MECHANO –

Paper Machine, Kolkata.

PM #1, designed for a maximum operating speed of 350 mpm, is a fourdrinier

type paper machine with bi-nip press with separate III press, followed by

twenty five (25) drying cylinders in the dryer section, three nip four – roll

calendar stack and pope type reel. The design production capacity at the time


DEMO



Prepared by & C2-5

of installation was 75 tpd of non-surface sized grades. TLPD periodically

upgraded its PM #1, and at present PM #1 is operating at 465 mpm speed

and is producing about 110 tpd finished non surface sized grades.

2.2.3.4 Paper Machine #2

Paper Machine #2, (PM #2) installed in 2008, was supplied by ALLIMAND,

France.


with top wire forming section, tri nip press section, followed by thirty two (32)

drying cylinders in pre-dryer section, pre-metered size press, twelve (12)

drying cylinders in post-dryer section, single hard nip calender stack, and a

pope type reel. The electrical drive design speed of the PM is 900 mpm. The

design production capacity of paper machine is 325 tpd of surface sized/copier

grades at maximum operating speed of 750 mpm. But, it is possible to

increase the maximum operating speed upto 900 mpm and get a higher

production. The process flow diagram of the Paper machine is given below in

Figure 2.2

Figure 2.2 Paper Machine Flow diagram


DEMO



Prepared by & C2-6

2.2.4 Chemical Recovery Plant

The system will feature adoption of modern technology to reduce the

operating cost, environmental compliance and to maintain uniform quality of

outputs.

2.2.4.1 Evaporation Plant

TLPD has two (2) streets of multiple effect evaporators, supplied by PAS and

ENMAS Andritz. The designed water evaporation capacities and details are as

below:

Supplier Designed Capacity (tph)

Product liquor Solids (%)

Steam economy

ENMAS Andritz 175 65 6.05

PAS Engineering 65 50 6.00

2.2.4.2 Chemical Recovery Boilers

TLPD has two (2) chemical recovery boilers, having a combined capacity of

firing 565 tpd black liquor per day supplied by ENMAS.

2.2.4.3 Recausticising Plant

Originally, the recausticising plant was supplied by Swetha Engineering, and

has recently been upgraded by GL&V. Capacity of the existing recausticising

plant is 110 as Na 2O

2.2.4.4 Lime Mud Reburning Kiln

The lime kiln was supplied by FLSmidth and was commissioned in 2009. The

capacity of the kiln is 140 tpd burnt lime.


DEMO



Prepared by & C2-7

Figure-2.3: Chemical Recovery Flow Diagram

2.2.5 Electrical

2.2.5.1 Power Sources

TLPD has its own captive generation from the following turbo generators.

TG #1 – 9.4 MW

TG #2 – 20 MW

TG #3 – 20 MW

The above sources are made parallel in synchronised to limit the system fault

current:

TG #1, TG #2 and TG #3 are synchronised with electricity grid

Power also supplied to TLPD’s other units at Sanghera through TLPD’s

independent feeder

The above arrangements are suitably made in the double busbar system

provided with tie feeders.

The total plant load demand is 45 MW and grid load is 19.95 MVA

The total power generation is approx. 40 MW.

The power drawn from grid varies from 0 to 5 MW.

The mill has installed a load management system (SCADA) to monitor

and control the power demand based on the power requirement.


DEMO



Prepared by & C2-8

2.2.5.2 Power Distribution

The mill wide distribution is at 11 kV and stepped down to 6.6 kV and

433 V by using distribution transformers of 2 MVA and 2.5 MVA at

various LT load centers. The HT motors of 6.6 kV are fed with 5 MVA

and 7.5 MVA of 11 kV/6.6 kV transformers.

LT panel components are of L&T, SIEMENS and other reputed makes.

LT motors of 415 V 3 phase 50 Hz of SIEMENS/CGL and other reputed

makes

The 11 kV and 6.6 kV neutrals are resistance earthed. The fault level of

the new system is 40 kA 1 sec.

415 V 3 Ph, 50 Hz neutrals are solidly earthed. The fault level is 50 kVA

1 sec for LT distribution.

The power factor maintained by the mill distribution is 0.94-0.95 lag

using HT and LT capacitor at various load centres.

The drives of paper machines #1 & #2 are sectional drives.

PM #1 is driven with DC motors and DC drive panel.

PM #2 is driven with AC motor and AC drive panels.

2.3 Summary of the Environmental Compliance

TLPD was established in Barnala district, Punjab, in the year 1993. The mill

was initially established with 75 tpd capacity paper machine (PM #1)

producing printing and writing grade paper, based on wheat straw as basic

raw material and later PM #1 has been upgraded to produce up to 110 tpd.

Trident has obtained the “No Objection Certificate” from the Punjab Pollution

control Board for the expansion of industry for the manufacture of writing and

printing paper to 260 tpd and caustic soda at 45 tpd vide NOC no.3430 dated

21.02.2002. Again in 2004 NOC from Punjab Pollution control Board is

obtained for the expansion to 265 tpd and the expansion of captive power

generation plant from 9.4 MW to 49.4 MW vide NOC no.EE

(P)/2004/SGR/LM/9/ dated 26.10.2004 (Copies enclosed as Annexure 6)

TLPD obtained Environmental Clearance (EC) for Mill Development Plan

(MDP) during 2005 vide File no.J-11011/52/2005 IA-II(I) dated, 07.11.2005 for

Paper production from 265 tpd to 375 tpd by upgrading PM # 1 to 110 tpd and

installing PM # 2 of capacity 265 tpd and Captive generation from 9.4 MW to

49.4 MW. The industry obtained the Consent to Operate under Air (Prevention

and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981, vide No. SEE (ZP-II)/SGR/APC/2012-


DEMO



Prepared by & C2-9

13/V-(371) V-413 dated, 23.07.2013 and further got renewed vide no. SEE

(ZP-II/SGR/APC/2012-13/V-(371)V-413 dated 23.07.2012, which is valid up to

22/1/12013 and further extended upto 22.01.2016. Consent to Operate under

Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974, vide no No. SEE (ZP-

II)/SGR/WPC/2012-13/V-(399)V-518 dated, 23.07.2013 and further got

renewed vide no. SEE (ZP-II/SGR/WPC/2012-13/V-(399)V-518 dated

23.07.2012, which is valid up to 22.01.2013 and further extended upto

22.01.2016.

The MoEF regional officer from Chandigarh office has visited the site on 14th

and 15th February 2014 and issued a compliance status report vide letter no.

5-52/202-RO(NZ). Vol. II, dated 25th March 2014 and copy of the letter is

enclosed as Annexure 7 of this EIA report.

2.4 Existing Pollution Sources

In the process plants along with the useful products, several waste products

are also generated. These waste products include flue gases, wastewater and

solid wastes. The waste gases include the flue gases generated in the Power

boilers, chemical recovery boilers, vents from Wood pulp diagester, Vents

from straw pulp digester and lime kiln. The atmospheric pollutants from the

stacks of these sources include particulates, sulphur dioxide, nitrogen oxides

and carbon monoxide.

The quantities and the composition of the gaseous, liquid and solid waste that

are generated in the plant are regulated such that their final disposal into the

environment meets all the statutory requirements and the environmental

impacts are minimised.

2.4.1 Stack Emissions

The emission of PM, SO2 and NOX are being regularly monitored by MoEF

approved testing agency. Summary of stack and the emissions details of

power boilers, chemical recovery boilers and lime kiln are given in Table 2.1

and Table 2.2. The stack emission test and test reports monitored by Punjab

State Pollution Control Board (PPCB) are enclosed as Annexure 8 and

monitoring report by MoEF accredited testing agency is enclosed as

Annexure 9.


DEMO



Prepared by & C2-10

Table 2.1

Summary of Stack Details

Stack Connected

Type of Pollution Control System

Stack Height, m

Stack Diameter,

m

Stack Gas

Velocity, (m/sec)

Stack Gas Temperature,

(Deg C)

Power Boiler #1 ESP 67 2.1 0.55 150



Chemical Recovery Boiler #1

ESP 55 1.4 11.65 130

Chemical Recovery Boiler #2

ESP 70 2 10 150

Boiler #1 is operated, whenever required during the shutdown of either boiler

#2 or #3.

Table 2.2

Summary of Stack Emissions monitoring data

Stack Connected PM, mg/Nm3 SO2, mg/Nm

3 NOx, mg/Nm

3

Power Boiler 1 116 72.1 32.84

Power Boiler 2 - - -

Power Boiler 3 - - -

Chemical Recovery Boiler -1 65 56 51

Chemical Recovery Boiler -2 85 63 42

Note: Monthly average value are projected as per plant data

These are compared with the standards prescribed by Central Pollution

Control Board (CPCB) for emission standards for boilers. It is observed that

they are well within the CPCB standards

The steam requirement of the project is met by the captive power boilers and

chemical recovery boilers after extracting power from turbo generator. The fuel

consumption for the existing boilers is given in Table 2.3 and the quality of the

fuels used is given in Table 2.4

Table 2.3

Fuel Consumption in the Existing Plant

Input Units Existing (Pre- MEP)

Furnace Oil Kla 9,100

Coal for PG Plant tpa -

Husk/ Biomass tpa 1,21,000

Coal (Imported) tpa 59,000

Coal (Local) tpa 1,69,000

Pet Coke tpa 29,000


DEMO



Prepared by & C2-11

Table 2.4

Characteristics of the Fuel used in Boiler

Parameter Moisture (%) Ash (%) GCV (kcal/kg) Sulphur content (%)

Imported coal 18 12 6420 <0.7

Local coal 9.6 34 4940 <1

Pet coke 6.8 0.3 8035 <8

Rice husk 11.5 12.5 3760 -

Furnace oil - - 9500-10500 <2

2.4.2 Existing Water Sources and Requirement

Uppli canal and ground water are being used in the existing plant. Fresh water

from Uppli canal, which is 30 km away, is drawn through a channel in to the

existing Mill premises and stored in raw water storage reservoir. From the raw

water reservoir, water is pumped to overhead tank, from where it flows by

gravity to water storage tank in water treatment plant. The Mill got the

necessary permission to draws 14,040 m³/day ground water and 25,000

m³/day of canal water from Uppli canal. The plant records confirm that the

ground water consumption ranging between 1900m3/day to 4900 m³/day and

17,000 to 20,000 m³/day of Canal water from Uppli canal.

The necessary approval letter from the concern authority for the drawl of water

from the Uppli canal is enclosed Annexure 10 and for the ground water

abstraction from 7 bore wells within existing Mill premises is enclosed as

enclosed Annexure 11.

Water Balance in Existing facilities (typical Operation)

The existing overall water balance of the mill is as below.

Fresh water consumption in the existing Mill - 22,240 m3/day

Internally recycled wastewater - 1,200 m³/day

Total water consumption in the existing Mill - 23,440 m3/day

As per existing Environment Clearance, 2005 the fresh water requirement is

27,000 m3/day. During installation of new facilities, the mill has adopted water

conservation measures to bring down the water consumption from 60 to

55 m3/t of paper and it is which is far below the stipulated CREP guidelines of

120 m³/t. The existing mill water and wastewater balance in Figure 2.4


DEMO



Prepared by & C2-12

S

SF

L-S

tra

w F

ibre

Lin

e,

WF

L-W

oo

d F

ibre

Lin

e

Fig

ure

-2.4

: E

xis

tin

g m

ill W

ate

r an

d W

aste

wate

r B

ala

nce


DEMO



Prepared by & C2-13

2.4.3 Wastewater Treatment Plant (WWTP)

Based on their origin and characteristics, the waste water generated is mainly

categorized into two streams ie, High BOD stream mainly from the straw

washing and the low BOD stream from the Pulp mill, Chemical recovery plant,

Paper machine and Utilities area. The wastewater generation is around

21,440 m3/day. The existing wastewater overall balance is as under.

Waste water generation from existing operations - 21,440 m³/day

Loss of water in sludge - 200 m³/day

Recycle for coal ash Handling - 100 m³/day

Treated wastewater for irrigation - 12,440 m³/day

Treated wastewater to discharge in drain - 8,700 m³/day

The existing waste water treatment plant can handle 25,500 m3/day of waste

water.

2.4.3.1 WWTP Process Description

High COD wastewater stream

The waste water generated from wheat straw washing has high COD.

This waste water stream enters the screen chamber and then to

equalisation tank. The waste water from equalisation tank is pumped to

bioclarifier. The clarifier overflow is taken to buffer tank for maintaining

pH. The waste water from buffer tank is pumped to anaerobic digester

(UASB) for generation of methane gas. The overflow of UASB reactor

goes to pre aeration tank and then flows to main aeration tank. The

1433kg/day of gas generated from UASB reactor is stored in gas holder

basin and supplied to power boilers by using blowers. Concentration of

COD in the high COD stream is 3500 mg/l

Low COD wastewater stream

Waste water generated from pulp mill, paper machines, power boilers

and recovery boilers has low COD and this is collected in a collection

tank and pumped to primary clarifier #1 and primary clarifier #2. After

clarification, the waste water is pumped to aeration tanks 1and 2 for

BOD, COD reduction. The aeration tanks are equipped with eleven (8+3)

50 HP surface aerators, three (3) floating aerators each having a

capacity of 30 HP. Additionally, oxygen is supplied to aeration tank #1

by air liquid system to take care of any fluctuation in COD and to meet

the standards. The overflow of wastewater from aeration tank goes to

secondary clarifier for settling of biomass. The treated wastewater from

the outlet of secondary clarifier water is pumped for irrigation purpose.


DEMO



Prepared by & C2-14

COD of the low COD stream is 1100 mg/l and COD of the combined

waste water to aeration tank is 1335 mg/l and COD of the treated waste

water is 208 mg/l.

Sludge Handling System

The underflow sludge from primary clarifiers #1 and #2, bioclarifier and

secondary clarifier is pumped to sludge thickener and then it is pumped

to twin wire belt press for dewatering. The dewatered sludge is loaded in

trucks and sold to board manufacturers. The filtrate from sludge handling

system joins back low COD wastewater stream for treatment. Quantity of

sludge is generation from the WWTP from the existing facility is about

25tpd and it is disposed to the board manufacturing units.

The existing wastewater treatment plant flow diagram is given in Figure 2.6.

Summary on waste water showing average, min and maximum values of raw

water & treated wastewater is given in Table 2.5 and 2.6.


DEMO



Prepared by & C2-15

Fig

ure

-2.5

: In

flu

en

t W

aste

wate

r Q

uali

ty D

ata


DEMO



Prepared by & C2-16

Table 2.5 Influent Wastewater Quality Data

S.No Parameter Values as per Plant Record(Average values for 2013)

PCB Record*

1 pH 7.5 9.1

2 TSS, mg/l 1240 244

3 COD, mg/l 1335 1720

4 BOD, mg/l 350 350

Note: *Values are mentioned as per the Punjab Pollution Control Board Test report,

vide Sample No. 86-101/H.O.Lab. Monitoring/2013 dated: 08.01.2014 (report

enclosed as Annexure 12)

Table 2.6 Treated Wastewater Quality Data

S.No Parameter Values as per Plant records

Punjab Pollution Control Board

Test report*

Waste water discharge standard for Pulp &

Paper

1 pH 8 7.6 7.0 to 8.5

2 TSS, mg/l 54 48 500

3 COD, mg/l 270 208 350

4 BOD, mg/l 27.5 28 30

Note: *Values are mentioned as per the Punjab Pollution Control Board Test report,

vide Sample No.86-101/H.O.Lab.Monitoring/2014 dated: 08.01.2014 (report enclosed

as Annexure 12)

The existing treated wastewater from the WWTP is 21,440 m3/day and about

8,700 m3/day is discharged into Dhanaula drain and 12,440 m³/day treated

water is used for plantation and greencover maintenance within the existing

Mill. Necessary approval for discharging the treated waste water into the

Dhanaula drain is obtained from the Sub Divisional Officer, Drainage

Department, Barnala vide Memo no.2/7/02-I(5), dated 23rd January 2003

addressed to the Chief Engineer, Irrigation Works, Punjab (enclosed as

Annexure 13). The discharge of treated effluents into the drain, as recorded

through the meters installed by Punjab Pollution Control Board in the premises

of the company near the plantation area. Based on the primary survey, it was

observed that the entire treated wastewater discharged into drain is being

utilized by local farmers for irrigation needs.

The data about the discharge of treated water in drain with the permission of

the Punjab state Pollution Control Board and the treated water being used in

irrigation of greenbelt from July 2013 to 11th February, 2014 is given in Table

2.7


DEMO



Prepared by & C2-17

Table 2.7 Effluent discharge data (as till 11.12.2014)

Month Waste water discharged in Drain (m

3/day)

Effluent in Plantation (m

3/day)

Total Effluent discharged in

to drain (m

3/day)

July 2013 7612 11751 19363

August 2013 8157 11300 19457

September 2013 8224 11504 19728

October 2013 8070 11345 19415

November 2013 8070 11799 19869

December 2013 7793 11384 19177

January 2014 7547 11186 18733

February 2014 7683 11510 19193Average 7895 11472 19367

*Values as per the Compliance Data sheet, MoEF

As per the directions of State Pollution Control Board, Trident has acquired

land through Punjab Government for expansion of paper unit and Co-

generation during 2005-2006. Trident has 150 acres for plantation out of which

14 acres is sugarcane and 136 acres of Eucalyptus plantation. The 14 acres

of sugarcane has also been replaced with Eucalyptus plantation. In 2012

additional 10 acres and in 2013 additional 5 acres land has been added in

plantation. The whole 165 acres of plantation is being irrigated with treated

trade effluent. Trident has planted 1,43,000 saplings on the earmarked land

for plantation, which were fully grown.

2.4.4 Solid and Hazardous Wastes Generation and Disposal

The solid waste generation from the existing operation is from the AFBC

boilers, lime sludge and straw dust. In addition to this, there will be fibre

sludge generation from the wastewater treatment plant. Solid and hazardous

waste from the existing plant is with source of the solid waste and the disposal

method given below in Table 2.8. The necessary approval from the Punjab

Pollution Control Board for the collection, storage and disposal of hazardous

waste form the plant is obtained vide, authorization No.HMC/SGR/2013-14/F-

2506 dated 31.01.2013 and the copy of the authorization letter is enclosed as

Annexure 14. The MoU was signed with transporting agency for the disposal

of the fly ash to the brick and cement manufactures and copy of the same is

enclosed as Annexure 15.

About 180 tpd of lime sludge generated from the existing plant is being

processed in the existing lime-kiln and about 130 tpd of lime is recycled and

about 45 tpd of lime mud (non-recyclable waste from kiln) is disposed to

cement manufacturing units through transporters.


DEMO



Prepared by & C2-18

Table 2.8 Solid Waste Quantity and Method of Disposal

S.No Source Quantity, T/day Disposal Method

1 Straw dry dust 20 Used as a fuel for boilers

2 Straw wet dust 60 Used as a fuel for boilers

3 Wood saw dust 5 Used as a fuel for boilers

4 Primary clarifier sludge from ETP

25 Sold to board manufacturing units and also fired in the boilers in the existing Mill

5 Secondary clarifier sludge from ETP

0.8 Being used as manure in the existing green cover area of the Mill

6 Lime mud 45 Sold to cement manufacturing units through Tanya Enterprises

7 Fly ash 220 Sold to brick/cement manufacturing units through Tanya Enterprises.

2.4.5 Occupational Health and Safety

Pre-employment medical test is done and the necessary Counseling is given

by the Company Medical Officer. The Company is conducting various health

camps like Cardio, diabetic, eye, dental, respiratory etc., for employees.

Pulmonary function test, audio metric test are being conducted periodically for

the employees working in operation and maintenance in paper mill. Health

Awareness Programme by a qualified Doctor from outside on various diseases

is conducted every month for the benefit of employees.

Trident is having following facilities at its paper mill: -

1) Eye Wash

2) Safety Shower

3) Stretchers,

4) Medicines and disposal syringe

5) Wound suturing and dressing

First aid boxes provided with medicines, are kept at vulnerable places inside

the Mill.

Medicines are given for fever, cold, body pain, headache, etc., and dressing is

done for minor injuries. In case of major injuries, first aid is given and the

patient is sent to nearby hospitals at Barnala.

Test such as audiometric and pulmonary function test are conducted for the

employees working in paper mill, summary of same is given in Table 2.9.


DEMO



Prepared by & C2-19

Table 2.9 Summary of the Health Evaluation of the Workers

S.No Type of Test No. of Employees

Tested

Unit Department

1 Audiometric Test 87 Paper Division

Paper Machine

2 PFT (Pulmonary Function Test )

115 Paper Division

ClO2, Operation and Maintenance, SFL, WFL

2.4.6 Environmental Management Cell

Environmental protection is monitored and implemented by a centralised

Environmental Management Cell. The constitution of the Environmental

Management Cell of the Paper division is given in Figure 2.5

Figure-2.5: Environmental Management Cell of the Paper division


DEMO



Prepared by & C2-20



DEMO


Chapter 3 – Details of the Proposed Expansion

Prepared by & C3-1

3 DETAILS OF THE PROPOSED EXPANSION

3.1 Overview

This chapter covers details of projects highlighting the features of plant layout

and design, details of the process to be adopted, raw material requirement,

utilities and services, infrastructural facilities and sources of waste generation,

their quantity, treatment and safe disposal of the waste.

The environmental scenario as achieved in pre project stage will continue to

prevailing unaltered post project too, without any adverse impact on the

environment.


Mill Expansion Plan (MEP). The proposed Mill Expansion Plan (MEP) is to

increase the paper production capacity from 1,37,000 tpa to 2,01,000 tpa by

upgrading the existing paper machines, fibre lines and increasing the captive

generation capacity from 49.4 to 90.9 MW.

Overview of the proposed expansion project requirements are presented in

Table 3.1.

Table 3.1 Overview of the Proposed Expansion Project Requirements

Sections Units Existing Post

MEP Incremental Proposal

Paper Machines

tpa 1,37,000 2,01,000 64000 Paper machines

tpd 375 550 175

Augmentation

Pulp Mill

BD tpa 82,500 1,02,500 20,000 Straw Pulp Mill

BD tpd 225 280 55

Augmentation

BD tpa 24000 55000 31000 Wood Pulp Mill

BD tpd 65 150 85

Augmentation

Oxygen Plant Nm3/hr 300 300 - Existing is adequate

Chlorine dioxide Plant

tpd 6 10 4 Augmentation

Recovery Plant

Existing Recovery Boilers

tpd 565 450 (-)115 Recovery boiler #1 retired , Augmentation of recovery boiler #2

New recovery boiler #3

tpd - 300 300 Addition of new recovery boiler #3

Evaporation plant tph of water evaporation

235 335 100 Augmentation of evaporator #1 &#2

Re-causticising plant (AA production)

tpd of AA 110 140 30 Augmentation

Lime kiln tpd of lime 140 179 39 Additional burnt lime will be procured from the market

Power Plant


DEMO



Prepared by & C3-2

Sections Units Existing Post MEP

Incremental Proposal

Power boilers tph 310 510 200 2x100 tph new boilers will be installed

Turbo Generators

Turbo Generator MW 49.4 90.9 41.5 New 2x17.5 MW and 1x 6.5 MW will be installed

WTP capacity m³/day 25,000 27,600 2,600 Augmentation/ Upgradation

WWTP capacity m³/day 25,500 27,420 1,920 Augmentation/ Upgradation

3.2 Salient Features of the Project

Atmospheric Fluidised Bed Combustion Boiler (AFBC) with high

efficiency and low unburnt carbon in ash.

Higher efficiency Turbo Generator to generate power consuming less

steam/kcal.

DM/RO and condensate polishing plant to maximise condensate recycle

and to minimise fresh water requirement.

ESP designed to maintain emission of solid particulate matter (PM) of

50 mg/Nm³ maximum.

3.3 Land for the Project

Mill has total land of 405 acres, including 220 acres comprising of vacant

spaces, well covered with greenery & plantations using treated effluent.

The proposed facilities will be located in the vacant spaces in the mill and

some of the roads and drains will be rerouted. About 20 acres of land is

required for the MEP as per the broad break-up given in the Table 3.2 The

vacant spaces available in the mill premises, have been identified and found

to be suitable and adequate to accommodate all the new facilities planned

under the project. The figure showing the proposed facilities is given in Figure

3.1 and Overall Mill Layout showing the proposed expansion is given in

Figure 3.2 and enclosed as Plate 1. The photographs of the area for

proposed facilities is given in Figure 3.3


DEMO



Prepared by & C3-3

Table 3.2

Land use break-up of Existing and Post-MEP

S.No Description Existing (Acres) Post MEP (Acres)

1 Plants and Building 86.45 93.86

2 Effluent Treatment Plant 8.65 9.88

3 Storage Yards 12.35 37.05

4 Road and Pathways 6.17 9.88

5 Greenbelt and Plantation 113.6 249.47

6 Open Space 4.94 4.94

7 Total area 232.16 405.08

Figure-3.1: Proposed Mill facilities


DEMO



Prepared by & C3-4

Parking Area

Paper Machine

Area #1 & #2

Proposed Co-

Generation Plant

Recovery Plant

Oxygen Plant

Plantation area

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO



Prepared by & C3-5

Figure-3.2: Photographs of the Areas Intended for Expansion Activities

3.4 Site Analysis

3.4.1 Site Location aspects

The proposed land for the project is in the existing mill premises, so that the

topography will not change in the present land use. The proposed facilities will

be located in the vacant spaces in the mill and some of the roads and drains

will be rerouted. The surroundings of the mill site are mostly agricultural land.

The nearest village, Dhaula, is about 5 km from the mill and the nearest bus

route, viz. the State Highway SH-13, will be reachable at 0.5 km and the

railway network about 12 km. There is no stream crossing the plant site. Uppli

canal is about 30 km away from the plant. This area is not falling into the

forest land and there is no eco-sensitive zone.


DEMO



Prepared by & C3-6

3.4.2 Connectivity & Transportation

The plant is well connected with roadways, railways and airways. The plant is

well connected with National Highway 64 (Chadigarh- Dabwali) and State

Highway 13 (Barnala- Manasa Road). The nearest railway station is Barnala

which is 9.5 Km towards North east from the mill site. The road connectivity of

the mill site is given in Figure 3.4

Figure-3.3: Road Connectivity

NH 64

SH 13


DEMO



Prepared by & C3-7

3.5 Proposed Expansion- Paper Mill

3.5.1 Paper Machines


It is proposed to install a new head box suitable for proposed operating speed

of 600 mpm. The mill has installed one (1) duo-flow box with ceramic drainage

elements recently to increase the drainage capacity of the fourdrinier section

The mill also rebuild the press section by strengthening the present press

frames and also new bi-nip press followed by 3rd press as mini shoe press in

place of existing 3rd press

The existing dryer section will be rebuilt with silent drive arrangement suitable

for the increased paper machine operating speed. The new electrical drive

system for dryer section of paper machine suitable for a design speed of 600

mpm will be installed. Recently, the mill has modified existing semi open hood

to closed hood with new fans and modified hood and pocket ventilation system

would be suitable and adequate for the proposed higher operating speed of

the paper machine. Augmentation of existing steam and condensate system

will be done for the proposed expansion


PM #2 has adequate potential to enhance its capacity from the present level of

about 265 tpd to 380 tpd by increasing the maximum operating speed upto

900 mpm, and the following proposals are considered to increase the

operating speed of the paper machine.

Installation of shoe press in tri-nip press 3rd nip position to improve the

off press web dryness, consequent to the increase in maximum

operating speed of the paper machine

Replacement of approach flow system pumps to higher capacity pumps

Paper machine improvement programme, such as tail threading system

between press to dryer section and between dryer section to size press

With the implementation of all the above measures, it is possible to increase

the operating speed of paper machine from the present level of 750 mpm upto

900 mpm and to obtain high finished production capacity.


DEMO



Prepared by & C3-8

3.5.2 Pulp Plant

3.5.2.1 Wheat Straw Pulp Mill

The following modifications are proposed to enhance the capacity to 280 tpd.

One (1) more depither to be added

In wet washing, utilisation of excess machine back water by increasing

the purging of wet washing back water and installation of back water

clarification system.

One (1) continuous digester of 125 tpd capacity to be added

To increase the efficiency of ODL, one Post Oxygen Washing (POW)

press to be added

Bleaching, one D&D tower to be added to increase residential lime


The following modifications are proposed to enhance the capacity of hard

wood pulp mill to 150 tpd

Screens to be replaced by quality screens

Introduction of extended tube in ODL to improve the efficiency

Replacement of less efficient MC pumps, for better performance

Replacement of D1 tower by a new tower

Augmentation of auxiliaries

BSW 1 and 4 in washing and EOP washer in bleaching

3.5.2.3 Other Auxiliaries of Pulp Mill

Chlorine di-oxide plant is to be augmented to take care of the increased

demand for ClO2




outputs.


DEMO



Prepared by & C3-9


The additional water evaporation capacity required for the evaporation plant is

achieved by augmentation of existing evaporator by adding new evaporator

One (1) finisher effect (3 bodies)

Two (2) additional bodies at the back end

Surface condenser

Vacuum system

Similarly for evaporator #2 the following equipment are to be added:

One (1) finisher effect (1 body)

One (1) additional body as spare for third and fourth effect

Surface condenser

Vacuum system

3.5.3.2 Chemical Recovery Boiler

Recovery boiler #2 is to be augmented to 450 tpd capacity, an additional

capacity of 50 tpd dry solids, by augmenting the fans, motors etc. The ESP

also will be augmented for a particulate emission level of 50 ppm in flue gas.

A new recovery boiler of 300 tpd dry solids firing capacity will be installed to

care of the additional solids from pulp mill.


The additional capacity, 30 tpd AA, will be met by revamping the plant. A white

liquor CD filter will be installed for 150 tpd capacity AA as Na2O. The

uniclarifiers and washers will be rearranged. Two stage recausticising will be

practised to reduce silica content in lime mud fed to lime kiln.

There are several advantages in installing the WLCD filter, as shown below:

Better quality of white liquor

Less carryover of alkali to lime mud washers

Better performance of lime mud filter because of low alkali content in

lime mud


DEMO



Prepared by & C3-10

3.5.3.4 Lime Kiln

The lime mud filter will be fitted with all 6 discs and run on maximum capacity.

The lime kiln will be run on full capacity of 140 tpd burnt lime. There are

several advantages in operating lime kiln on a continuous basis:.

Assured supply of good lime for causticising process

Better settling of lime mud in clarifiers and mud washers

Better performance of lime mud filter

Less inserts in lime compared to purchased lime of low purity

3.5.3.5 Producer Gas Plant

A new coal based producer gas plant will be installed. Considering the high

cost of fuel oil, it is necessary to install a producer gas plant to replace 70% of

heat value required for lime kiln.

The producer gas is produced from new generation extended shaft

gasifier. These gasifiers are of modern design with respect to quality and

consistency of gas, smooth and trouble free operation without interruptions,

high calorific value, adaptability to lower grades of coal and DCS operation.

3.6 Proposed Expansion-Captive Co-generation Plant

3.6.1 Boiler (AFBC)

The boiler is of top supported single-drum natural circulation, semi-outdoor

type, Atmospheric Fluid Bed Combustion (AFBC) designed for firing coal and

start up firing with furnace oil.

The complete furnace section will be of fusion welded wall type arranged as a

gas and pressure tight envelope. The steam drum is conservatively designed

and the circulation system will be complete with the necessary number of

down comers, supply and riser piping. Drum internals are provided in the

steam drum to maintain the steam purity.

The superheaters will be located at furnace outlet. Inter-stage desuperheater

will be provided in between the two stages of superheaters to control the final

steam temperature from the unit. The boilers will be provided with bare tube

economiser fabricated from plain seamless tubes. The boilers will also be

provided with a tubular air heater as the last stage of heat recovery unit.

The fuel feeding system will consist of drag chain feeders with VFD and

mechanical spreader for distribution of coal. The above system is designed for


DEMO



Prepared by & C3-11

feeding overbed feeding system. Bed material feeding system will consist of

bed material bunker and rotary air lock feeders.

The draught system of the boiler will have one (1) 100% MCR of ID & FD fans

and 2 x 100% PA fans.

The feed water system will consist of deaerator, HP heater and two (2) motor

driven feed pumps, LP & HP chemical dosing system together with complete

piping, valves and other fittings. The process flow diagram of the new boiler is

given in Figure 3.5

3.6.2 Electrostatic Precipitator (ESP)

An electrostatic precipitator is used to remove the dust from gases emanating

from industrial processes. The dust particles suspended in the gases are

electrically charged and collected using electrostatic attraction. The

precipitator essentially consists of two sets of electrodes viz. collecting

electrodes and emitting (discharge) electrodes.

3.6.3 Turbo Generator

Turbine will be of impulse/reaction type with casing of welded construction.

The guide blade carriers are of cast construction. Blading system, attached to

rotor, will consist of a set of impulse blading and multiple stages of reaction

blading. The operating speed of the turbine is reduced at gear box before

alternator. The gearbox will be of single stage, double helical, parallel shaft

with flexible tooth gear coupling at input and output ends. The turbine shall be

provided with electronic governor to control the speed.

Steam admission to the turbine will be accomplished by a set of control

valves. Turbine will have two (2) controlled extractions and one condensing

stage.

Turbine oil system will consist of oil tank, main oil pump and AC motor driven

auxiliary oil pumps, DC motor driven emergency oil pump, oil purifier, oil

coolers etc. The main oil pump will be driven by AC motor. Condenser will be

of two section single pass arrangement type. Alternator rotor will be of salient

pole design and the insulation of the winding will be of class F category, with

temperature rise limited to class B. Temperature detectors will be provided for

continuous monitoring of winding temperature. The cooling method employed

for alternator will be of closed air circuit, water cooled design. Brushless

excitation is considered.


DEMO



Prepared by & C3-12

Fig

ure

-3.4

: P

rocess F

low

Dia

gra

m o

f th

e N

ew

bo

iler


DEMO



Prepared by & C3-13

3.6.4 Fuel Handling Plant

The coal handling system will be designed for 80 tph with single stream with

feed size of (-200) mm coal for providing less than 6 mm coal with minimum

fines. The coal handling plant consists of belt conveyors, crusher, vibrating

screen, reversible shuttle conveyor and dust extraction system. Flow diagram

for Coal Handling System is given in Figure 3.6

Figure-3.5: Flow diagram for Coal Handling System

3.6.5 Ash Handling System

3.6.5.1 Bed Ash

The bed ash from the boiler will be discharged into a submerged scrapper

chain conveyor, for cooling the ash and then to discharge on to a system of

belt conveyors for feeding into the silo. The process flow diagram for bed ash

handling system is given in Figure 3.7


DEMO



Prepared by & C3-14

Fig

ure

-3.6

: T

he P

rocess F

low

Dia

gra

m f

or

Bed

Ash

Han

dli

ng

Syste

m


DEMO



Prepared by & C3-15

3.6.5.2 Economiser/APH/ESP Ash

Below each hopper outlet at Economiser/Air Pre Heater and ESP, suitable MS

surge chutes with a manually operated isolation plate valve and an expansion

joint are provided. A level probe is provided in each surge chute for automatic

operation of the system.

An ash vessel will be installed below each surge hopper. Material will be

conveyed through conveying pipelines. Conveyed material will be discharged

into the fly ash silo with the help of terminal box provided on its top. The

process flow diagram for fly ash handling system is given in Figure 3.7

Figure 3.7 The Process Flow Diagram for Fly Ash Handling System

3.6.5.3 ESP Ash

Below each ESP hopper outlet, suitable adapter / MS surge chute with

fluidising arrangement, one (1) manually operated isolation plate valve and

one (1) expansion joint are provided. A level probe is provided in each surge

chute for automatic operation of the system.

An ash vessel will be installed below ESP hopper. Material will be conveyed

through a common MS ERW heavy duty conveying pipeline. Conveyed


DEMO



Prepared by & C3-16

material will be discharged into the fly ash silo with the help of a terminal box

provided on its top.

One (1) chain wheel operated plate valve with rotary feeder will be provided

along with drum type ash conditioners and canvas type retractable chute

below the silo for dust free unloading of fly ash on the truck.

1 set of fluidising pads and two (2) roots blowers are also considered for the

fly ash silo. A level probe will be provided at the silo for high level sensing.

Both the silos will be provided with vent filters on top to prevent any dust fly

off.

One (1) RCC/MS fly ash silo will be constructed for fly ash.

One (1) RCC/MS bed ash silo will be constructed for bed ash.

Two (2) air compressors will be provided for ash conveying.

3.6.6 DM/RO Plant

DM/RO Plant will be designed based on raw water quality. The two streams of

the plant are designed for a flow rate of 60 m3/h net output of each stream, to

treat it further with mixed bed exchanger.

The raw water is dosed with sodium hypochlorite for the disinfection purpose

and removes COD /BOD if any, present in the water. The raw water will be

pumped to DM/RO plant with the help of 2 X 100% raw water pumps. The

DM/RO plant with two (2) streams is designed for indoor installation. The

Table 3.3 will gives the DM/RO plant will consist of the following equipment.

Table 3.3

DM/RO Plant Equipment

S.No Description Units in no.

1 Multi grade filter 2

2 ACF 2

3 UF 2

4 RO 2

5 Strong acid cation exchanger 2

6 Degasser 1

7 Anion exchanger 2

8 Mixed bed 2

The operation of the entire water treatment is on manual except for the UF/RO

Plant, which will be fully automatic with PLC systems and, accordingly,

pneumatic actuated valves will be considered at appropriate points in the

UF/RO Plant.


DEMO



Prepared by & C3-17

The multi grade filter will have to be backwashed once in 24 hours. The

filtered water will be de-chlorinated by means of sodium sulphite dosing and

will then be passed through the cartridge filter. The plant is designed for

minimum 70%-75% recovery for the single stage treatment to achieve

required TDS. The reject will be sent to the neutralisation pit.

3.6.7 Condensate Polishing Unit (CPU)

CPU consists of plate type heat exchanger with provision for pumping system

to store in DM water storage tank. The condensate from process will be

polished with CPU, after passing through a plate type heat exchanger. DM

water will be used as cooling medium for the heat exchanger.

3.6.8 Cooling Tower

3.6.8.1 For Power Turbo Generators

Cooling tower will consist of three (3) cells, each of 3500 m³/hr capacity RCC

tower with induced draft (ID) fan. It caters to the requirements to cool both

main cooling water for condenser and cooling water for auxiliaries.

3.6.8.2 For Recovery Turbo Generator

Cooling tower consists of three (3) cells each, of 1500 m³/h capacity of RCC

construction with ID fan. It caters to the requirement to cool both main cooling

water for condenser and cooling water for auxiliaries.

3.6.8.3 Compressed Air System

This system comprises two (2) centrifugal air compressors (1W + 1S) each of

5000 Nm³/hr capacity with air receiver and air drying unit.

3.7 Materials and Resources Requirement

3.7.1 Raw Materials

The raw materials required for the project are wheat straw and wood. The

average annual requirement of the raw materials is given in Table 3.4.

Table 3.4

Raw Materials Requirement

Input Units Existing

(Pre-MEP) Post MEP Incremental Source

Straw tpa 169,000 269,000 100,000 Purchased from farmers and transported by trucks &Tractors

Wood tpa 1,00,000 227,000 1,27,000 80% venieer chips from Haryana and Punjab / 20 % wood logs transported by truck


DEMO



Prepared by & C3-18

3.7.2 Chemicals Requirement

The major process chemicals used and procured for the production is given in

Table 3.5. Most of the chemicals required for the production are already being

used and procured from Indian market.

Table 3.5 Chemical Requirement

Input Units Existing (Pre- MEP)

Post MEP Incremental

Caustic tpa 6,200 7,900 1,700

Hydrogen peroxide tpa 460 2,000 1,540

Chlorine dioxide tpa 2,070 2,900 830

Oxygen tpa 2,900 3,900 1,000

Sodium chlorate tpa 3,416 4785 1370

Methanol tpa - 435 435

Sulfuric acid tpa 2100 5800 3700

Lime tpa - 20,800 20,800

Lime stone tpa 34,600 40,900 6300

3.7.3 Fuels Requirement

Additional fuels requirement are given in Table 3.6. Imported coal will be

transported by ship and by trucks to mill and the local coal will be sourced

from Central Coal Limited, Ranchi and the coal will be transported by train

upto Barnala and by truck to mill. Petrography analysis of raw material, Grain

size, Major elemental analysis of raw materials is enclosed as Annexure 16.

The MOU for the existing coal linkage is enclosed as Annexure 17 and MOU

with Indian coal vendors for the purchase of additional requirement is


Table 3.6 Fuel Requirement


(Pre- MEP) Post MEP Incremental

Furnace oil Kla 9,100 4,600 (-)4,500

Coal for PG plant tpa - 25,600 25,600

Husk/Biomass tpa 121,000 221,000 100,000

Coal (imported) tpa 59,000 109,000 50,000

Coal (local) tpa 169,000 310,000 141,000

Pet coke tpa 29,000 52,000 23,000

3.7.4 Steam and Power - Requirement

The facility requires thermal energy in the form of steam for the process use

and captive power generation. The steam requirement of the proposed

expansion will be met by the captive power boilers and chemical recovery

boilers after extracting power from turbo generator. The total steam generation

from the Boilers is 503 tph. It can be inferred that Total steam use for the

proposed expansion will be 503 tph with the incremental of 231 tph from the


DEMO



Prepared by & C3-19

existing use of 272 tph. Out of the total steam use about 503 tph about

323 tph will be used for the process, 180 tph will be utilised for power

generation and 3 tph will be used for Soot blowing steam for recovery boiler.

The total power requirement for the proposed expansion will be about

81.4 MW About 81.0 MW of power demand will be met through the captive

power generation at the co-generation plant and about 0.4 MW of grid power

will be drawn for normal operating conditions.

The summary of the Steam and Power Balance is given in Table 3.7 and the

detailed mass and power balance for the proposed expansion is enclosed as

Annexure 19.

Table 3.7

Steam & Power Balance

Summary Unit Pre-MEP Post-MEP

Incremental

Steam

Steam generation from recovery boilers tph 46 82 36

Steam generation from power boilers tph 228 420 192

Total steam generation tph 274 503 229

Total LP steam consumption including De-aerators steam

tph 90 142 52

Total MP steam consumption tph 79 181 103

Condensing steam tph 103 180 67

Total steam use Tph 272 503 231

Power

Power Requirement MW 45.3 81.4 36.1

Captive generation MW 44.9 81.0 36.1

Grid Power MW 0.4 0.4 0.0

3.7.5 Raw Materials Transport

Construction of MEP and other facilities involves movement of materials of

great magnitude. The materials to be transported include earthwork, concrete

and other materials. Transport of construction materials to the mill site will

result in increased traffic in the area, which shall certainly put additional load

on the existing road infrastructure. Project needs heavy-duty equipment and

requires strengthening of the existing approach road to plant site to handle the

additional heavy traffic on the existing moderate road. While strengthening the

existing road, enough spaces on both sides of the road will be provided,

keeping in mind the low awareness levels of the local population regarding

heavy-duty vehicles.

Transportation for this project involves the following:

Raw materials and finished products to a maximum extent will be

transported through existing railway network


DEMO



Prepared by & C3-20

Coal is envisaged to be supplied from the CCL coal fields and terminals

using high capacity trucks and tankers and imported coal will be

transported by ships and then by trucks/rail.

The raw material and the transportation details are given in Table 3.8

Table 3.8 Raw Materials and Transport (Existing and after expansion)

Quantity, T/day Total No. of trucks per days, No.

Per day Inventory

Existing After

Expansion Existing

After Expansion

Straw 497 791 99 158

Wood 295 668 25 56

Chemicals and others 152 263 30 53

Husk and bio-mass 368 647 74 129

Coal 671 946 13 19

Total ash 152 357 13 30

WWTP Sludge 24 42 5 8

Lime Sludge 177 245 35 49

Finished product 375 550 31 46

Passenger vehicles 30 30Total Trucks per day 356 578

3.8 Water Requirement and Water Resources for the Proposed Expansion

The total water requirement for post MEP will be around 31,500 m³/day

including recycled water (internal recycled water – 1,200 m³/day) and the fresh

water requirement will be 30,300 m³/day.

The mill has permission for drawl of 25,000 m³/day water from Uppli canal and

permission from the Central Ground Water Board for the abstraction of 14,040

m³/day of ground water. The water drawal permission letter from the concern

authorities is enclosed as Annexure 10 & 11.

Fresh water from Uppli canal, which is 30 km away, is drawn through a

channel in to mill premises and stored in raw water storage reservoir. The

location of the fresh water intake point and the reservoir is given below in

Figure 3.9


DEMO



Prepared by & C3-21

Legend

: Ground Water Intake Location

: Surface Water Intake Location

: Water Reservoir

: Canal

: Plant Boundary

Figure-3.8: Water Intake Point

3.9 Wastewater Treatment Plant (WWTP)

The waste water generated after MEP will be around 27,420 m³/day. Total

treated waste water discharge from WWTP will be 27,020 m³/day. Post MEP

wastewater generation will be as follows

1 Waste water generation post MEP to WWTP : 27,420 m³/day

2 Loss of water in sludge : 400 m³/day

3 Total treated wastewater : 27,020 m³/day

4 Recycle for ash & Coal Handling : 100 m3/day

5 Treated waste water for irrigation : 18,220 m³/day

6 Treated waste water discharge : 8,700 m³/day

Additional equipment as given below will be installed to handle the additional

load.


DEMO



Prepared by & C3-22

Modification of existing primary clarifier #2

Addition of bio methanisation plant of capacity 6,000 m³/day

Conversion of existing sludge thickener into secondary clarifier

Sludge decanters for primary and secondary clarifier sludge

3.10 Solid Waste Generation and Disposal

The expected solid wastes generation in the proposed MEP is non-hazardous

in nature. The solid waste generation will be ash from AFBC boiler, lime mud

and straw dust. In addition to this, there will be fiber sludge generation from

the wastewater treatment plant. The details of solid waste generation and

quantities with disposal methods are given in Table 3.9

Table 3.9

MEP Solid Waste Generation and Disposal After Expansion program

S.No Source Quantity, T/day Disposal Method

1 Straw dry dust 26 Used as a fuel for boilers

2 Straw wet dust 78 Used as a fuel for boilers

3 Wood saw dust 6.5 Used as a fuel for boilers

4 Primary clarifier sludge

32 Sold to board manufacturing units /fired in the boilers

5 Secondary clarifier 1.1

Used as manure for green cover area

6 Lime mud (rejects from lime kiln) 61

Sold to cement manufacturing units through Tanya Enterprises

7 Fly ash 628

Sold to brick/ cement manufacturing units through Tanya Enterprises

3.11 Power Requirement and Source

The proposed project requires additionally about 12 MW of power for the

paper mill. In addition, other units of the group avail 26 MW at present and are

expected to go up to 50 MW as these units are also expanding their activities.

Hence, additional power demand will be 36 MW and the total power

requirement of all the group units will be around 81 MW.

Hence, it is proposed to add 41.5 MW captive power plant to meet the above

requirement. The power plant addition will be 41.5 MW (i.e.) the post MEP

installed capacity will be 90.9 MW. In addition, the mill has the facility to draw

power from state grid about 19.95 MVA capacities for any exigencies.

3.12 Fire Fighting System

Extension of the existing plant hydrant network (with augmentation of pumps,

if required) for power plant area from terminal point (TP) will be done. Further,


DEMO



Prepared by & C3-23

it will consist of fire alarm systems for control room, MCC room and cable

alleys. Portable extinguishers at strategic locations in the plant will be

provided.

3.13 Project cost estimates and Schedule

3.13.1 Project cost

Total investment for the installation of project is Rs.440 Crores as per broad

break up is given in the following Table 3.10

Table 3.10

Project Cost

S.No Description Cost in Crores

1 Civil Works 33

2 Plant & Machinery Cost (including erection and engineering) – excluding EMP cost

286

3 Other Capitalisation Cost (pre operative expense, escalation and contingency, start up expenses and interest during construction)

40

4 Environmental Protection and Monitoring 81

Total 440

3.13.2 Implementation Schedule

The MEP is proposed to be implemented in stages as per priority requirement,

in a sequence as below.

Paper machines will be augmented to increase the production using

purchased pulp, over and above the existing captive pulp production.

Augmentation of pulp mills and recovery plant to maximise the usage of

captive pulp and to reduce the imported pulp

Expansion of the captive power plant and augmentation of auxiliaries

The major activities are highlighted below and the completion time indicated

are from the “zero date” which is the date of Environment Clearance (EC)

Table 3.11

Tentative Project Schedules

Start date “Zero Date”

Ordering of long delivery plant and equipment 2nd

quarter

Commencement of civil construction 3rd

quarter

Commencement of start-up trial & commissioning 8th

quarter

Commencement of commercial production 10th

quarter

Total duration of the project implementation 27 months


DEMO



Prepared by & C3-24



DEMO


Village Barnala District, Punjab

Chapter 4 – Baseline Environmental Status

Prepared by & C4-1

4 BASELINE ENVIRONMENTAL STATUS

4.1 Introduction

This chapter illustrates the description of the existing environmental status of the

study area with reference to the prominent environmental attributes. The study

area covers 10 km radius around the boundaries of the proposed mill site.

The existing mill is located at Dhaula Village, Barnala District, Punjab State. The

existing mill site lies within the coordinates of 30°17'53.13"N Latitude and

75°29'41.08"E longitude and can be identified as per OSM Map of H 43J7, H

43J8, H 43J11, H 43J12. The study area of 10 km radius from the existing mill

site was defined for primary data collection as per the TOR approved by Ministry

of Environment and Forest.

The existing mill site is Adjacent to State Highway-13 (W) and National Highway-

64 at (2.8 km, NW). Nearest railway station is located at Barnala at 12 km NE

and nearest airport is at Chandigarh with a distance of 175 km.

The existing environmental setting is considered to adjudge the baseline

environmental conditions, which are described with respect to climate, hydro-

geological aspects, atmospheric conditions, water quality, soil quality, vegetation

pattern, ecology, land use and socio-economic profile of the people.

Land use section forms the first part of this chapter.

The physical environment consisting of geology forms the second part of this

baseline chapter.

The third part contains primary as well as secondary data for environmental

attributes viz.,

Ü Soil quality

Ü Micro-meteorology

Ü Ambient air quality

Ü Water quality, aquatic

Ü Terrestrial ecology and socio-economic profile of the study area.

The primary baseline data monitored covered three (3) months i.e., from October

2013 to January 2014, and secondary data was collected from Government and

Semi-Government organizations. The primary baseline data has been generated

by Spectro Analytical Labs Limited, an MoEF approved Environmental Testing

Laboratory.


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-2

4.2 Land Environment

4.2.1 Physiography and Drainage of the steady area

The topography of the district is under vast change with various venture

connection with the Green Revolution and whole area of the district is developed

on green outlook. There is no major river flowing through the city. Physiography

of the study area including drainage network is presented in Figure 4.1

The area form a part of Indo-gangetic plain. The country is more or less flat. The

elevation of the land in the buffer zone (10km) varies from 196 m in the

southwestern to 285 m above mean sea level in northeast. The elevation of the

land in the core zone (5km) varies from 198 m in the southwestern to 250 m

above mean sea level in northeast. The master slope of the area is towards

southwest. The elevation of the proposed mill expansion plan varies between

219.78 m to 224.33 m above mean sea level.

4.2.2 Digital Elevation Model of the Study Area

The 3D digital elevation model with an elevation grid of the buffer zone area and

core zones is presented in Figure 4.2. and Figure 4.3.


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-3

Figure-4.1: Physiography of the Study area


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-4

Figure-4.2: Digital Elevation Model (DEM) of the Buffer Zone (10km)


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-5

Figure-4.3: Digital Elevation Model (DEM) of the Core Zone (5km)

4.2.2.1 Drainage of the region

The drainage system plays an important role in shaping the landscape of an area

due to its erosional and depositional nature. The Satluj, Beas and Ravi rivers

form the main drainage system in the state of Punjab. The other main drainage

channels in Punjab are Ghahhar river, White Bein, Black Bein, Kiran nala,

Chakki River and Sakki Nala. In addition to these major drainage channels,

these are numerous choes (seasonal rivulets), originating in the Siwalik hills and

drain the Kandi area. The natural gradient of the drainage channels is generally

from north-east to south-west direction. In areas, where natural drainage is

lacking, artificial drains have been dug up for the disposal of storm water and

seepage from waterlogged areas in the state. The drainage network map for the

state was updated using the satellite data acquired during the period from 2003-


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-6

2004 and digitized for critical appraisal of waterlogging, flooding and drainage

congestion.

In Punjab, out of the total irrigated area, 29 percent is irrigated by canals and

remaining 71 percent by tubewells. There are six major canals system viz. Upper

Bari Doab, Sirhind, Bikaner, Rajasthan, Bist Doab and Bhakra. Only Upper Bari

Doab Canal is taking off from river Ravi and the other five canals from river

Satluj. The canal network has been digitized for better perception of the

command area of each major canal and their distributaries.

4.2.2.2 Drainage of the study area

According to the Watershed Atlas of India, the study area forms part of Lower

Sutlej Sub-Basin below Bhakra Dam and is shared by SLJL010 watershed.

There is no well defined material drainage system in the area. Two main drains

pass through the area – Upper Lisarna Nala in the northwest and Dhanaula

Drain in the central part. Large network of canals belonging to Bhakra main canal

runs through core and buffer zones. The drainage with watershed boundary is

presented Figure 4.4

Figure-4.4: Drainage and water bodies of the Study area


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-7

Land Use Pattern based on Remote Sensing Data

Remote sensing satellite imageries were collected and interpreted for the 10 km

radius study area for analysing the land use pattern of the study area. Based on

the satellite data, land use/ land cover maps have been prepared.

4.2.2.3 Satellite Data

IRS Resourcesat-2 L4FMX multispectral satellite data of 3rd January 2014 as

utilized for the buffer zone and core zone are shown in Figure 4.5 and Figure

4.6. The rectification of imagery was carried out on to bring the digital data on the

earth coordinate system by means of ground control point (GCP) assignments.

The details of the satellite data is given on Table

Table 4.1 Details of Satellite Data

Satellite Sensor Scale Path & Row

SOI Toposheet No.

Date of Pass

IRS Resourcesat-2

L4FMX 1:25,000 94-50A H43J7, H43J8 H43J11, H43J12

03.01.2014

The spectral bands of IRS Resroucesat-2 data are furnished in Table 4.2 and

Table 4.3 respectively.

Table 4.2 Characteristics of IRS Resourcesat-2 Data

Satellite Multi

Spectral Bands

Bandwidth / wave length in

microns

Spectral resolution

(mts.)

Product type

Format / scale

IRS Resourcesat-2 2,3,4 Band 2 : 0.52-0.59 Band 3 : 0.62-0.68 Band 4 : 0.76-0.86

5 Digital Geocoded scale 1:25,000

Table 4.3 IRS Resourcesat-2 LISS-IV Satellite Spectral Bands and their Principal Applications

Band Wave Length (microns)

Application

2 0.52 - 0.59 Soil/vegetation differentiations, coniferous/ deciduous flora discrimination, vegetation vigour assessment, rock/soil boundary differentiation, turbidity and bathymetry in shallow water.

3 0.62 - 0.68 Strong chlorophyll absorption leading to discrimination of vegetation types mining area, mapping of settlements and transport network.

4 0.76 - 0.86 Delineation of surface water features, land forms / rock types, mining area, mapping of settlements and transport network.


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-8

Figure 4.5 IRS Resourcesat-2 L4FMX Image of the Buffer Zone (10km)


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-9

Figure Error! No text of specified style in document.Figure 4.6 IRS Resourcesat-2

L4FMX Image of the Core Zone (5km)


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-10

4.2.2.4 Land Use/Land Cover Classification System

The present land use / land cover maps were prepared, based on the

classification system of national standards. For explanation of each of the land

use category, the details as given in Table 4.4 were considered.

Table 4.4 Land Use/Land Cover Classification System

S. No. Level-1 Level-2

1 Built-up Land Town/cities

Villages

Institution/Industry/Godown etc

Plotted Area/Layout

2 Agriculture Land Crop Land

Plantations

Fallow

3 Forest Evergreen/Semi evergreen

Deciduous

Forest Plantation

4 Wastelands Rocky/Stony Waste

Land with /without shrubs

Saline/sandy & Marshy/swampy

5 Water Bodies River/Stream

Lake/Reservoir/Tanks

6 Others Orchard/Other Plantation

Shifting cultivation

Salt Pans, Snow covered/Glacial

Barren/Vacant Land

4.2.2.5 Data Requirements

IRS Resource Sat-2 on L4FMX with 5m resolution was acquired for 3rd January

2014 (haze free and cloud free) and was used for the mapping and

interpretation. Besides, other collateral data as available in the form of maps,

charts, census records, other reports and especially topographical survey of

India maps are used. In addition to this, ground truth survey was also conducted

to verify and confirm the ground features.

4.2.2.6 Methodology

The land use/land cover map is prepared by adopting the interpretation

techniques of the image in conjunction with collateral data such as topographical

maps and census records. Image classification can be done by using visual

interpretation techniques and digital classification using any of the image

processing software. For the present study, ERDAS and ArcView Softwares are

used for preprocessing, rectification, enhancements and classifying the satellite

data for preparation of land use land cover map and assessing land use land

cover and land developmental activities. Flowchart showing the methodology

adopted is presented in Figure 4.7


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-11

Figure 4.7 Flowchart of Simplified Methodology

4.2.2.7 Pre-field Interpretation of Satellite Data

The False Colour Composite (FCC) of IRS Resource Sat-2 satellite has been

used for pre-field interpretation work. Taking the help of topo-sheets, geology,

geomorphology and by using the image elements, the features are identified and

the boundaries are roughly delineated. Each feature is identified on image by

their image elements like tone, texture, colour, shape, size, pattern and

association. A tentative legend in terms of land cover and land use,

physiography and erosion was formulated. The sample areas for field check are

selected covering all the physiographic, land use/land cover feature cum image

characteristics.

Ü Ground Truth Collection- Both topo-sheets and imagery were taken for

field verification and a transverse plan using existing road network was made to

cover as many representative sample areas as possible to observe the broad

land use features and to adjust the sample areas according to field conditions.

Detailed field observations and investigations were carried out and the land use

features on the imagery were noted.

Ü Post Field Work- The base maps of the study area were prepared, with the

help of Survey of India Topo-sheets. Preliminary interpreted land use and the

land cover features boundaries from IRS Resource Sat-2 False Colour

Composite were modified in the light of field information, and the final thematic

details were transferred onto the base maps. The final interpreted and classified

thematic map was cartographed. The cartographic map was coloured with

standard colour coding and detailed description of feature with standard


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-12

symbols. All the classes were noted and marked by the standard legend on the

map.

4.2.2.8 Final Output

Using the standard land use classification system proposed by NRSA, 4 classes

of level I and 13 of level II land use / land cover classes were identified and

mapped using satellite data in the present study. The results of Level I and Level

II land use/land cover mapping of the 10 Km and 5 Km radius areas of the

proposed Mill Expansion Plan is presented in the following steps.

4.2.2.8.1 General Level I Land Use/Land Cover in Study Area

The following are the main interpreted land use/land cover classes of the study

area and their respective areas are given in ha in Table 4.5 for the year 2014.

The thematic map and land use pattern within 10 km and 5 km radius based on

IRS Resource Sat-2 L4FMX with 5 m resolution for 3rd January 2014 are shown

in Figure 4.8 and Figure 4.9 and level I Land Use/Land Cover of the study area

is shown in Figure 4.9.

Table 4.5 Level 1 Land Use/Land Cover Statistics of 10 Km Radius of the Study Area

S.No. Land Use

10 Km Radius 5 Km Radius

Area (Hectares)

Area (%) Area

(Hectares) Area (%)

1 Built-up Land 3563.80 9.47 895.22 7.94

2 Agricultural land 33302.09 88.55 10116.31 89.74

3 Waste Land 441.05 1.17 163.99 1.45

4 Water Bodies 3302.17 0.80 96.94 0.86

Total 37609.12 100 11272.45 100.00

Observation

The overall land use of 10 km radius area reveals the dominance of agriculture

land (88.55%) followed by built-up land (9.48%), waste land (1.17%) and water

bodies (0.80%).

The overall land use of core zone (5km) also shows similar trend of land use as

in buffer zone with dominance of agriculture land (89.74%) followed by built-up

land (7.94%), waste land (1.45%) and water bodies (0.86%)..


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-13

Figure 4.8 Level-I - Land Use/Cover Map of 10 Km Radius Area


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-14

Figure 4.9 Level-I - Land Use/Cover Map of 5 Km Radius Area

Level-I Land Use/Land Cover in 10 and 5 Km Radius Area has been projected by pie-chart in Figure 4.10 and Figure 4.11 to understand variations in land use/land cover within the 10 km and 5 radius areas.


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-15

Figure 4.10 Distribution of LU/LC in 10 Km Radius Area – Level-I

Figure 4.11- Distribution of LU/LC in 5 Km Radius Area – Level-I

4.2.2.8.2 General Level II Land Use / Land Cover in Study Area"The level-II land use/land cover is further sub divided into meaningful sub-

classes to highlight the dominant land use in the study area. The level-II land

use/land cover statistics and features of the 10 km and 5 km radius area from the

proposed Mill site are presented in Table 4.6 shown in Figure 4.12 and Figure

4.13


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-16

Table 4.6 Level II Land Use/ Land Cover Statistics of 10 Km Radius

S.No. Land Use

10 Km Radius 5 Km Radius

Area (Hectares)

Area (%)

Area (Hectares)

Area (%)

Built-up Land

1 Settlements 2573 6.84 500.01 4.44

2 Industry/Institutional Land 908 2.41 386.70 3.43

3 New Development/Layout 83 0.22 8.51 0.08

Agricultural Land

8 Plantation 96.38 0.26 82.11 0.73

9 Double Crop/Irrigated Land 26114.96 69.44 8295.63 73.59

10 Other Agriculture Land 16726 18.44 1675.01 14.86

11 Fallow Land 2387 0.42 63.55 0.56

Waste Land

12 Land with Scrub 44.42 0.12 10.17 0.09

13 Land without Scrub 75.88 0.20 20.74 0.18

14 Rocky/Stony/Barren Land 306.21 0.81 128.32 1.14

15 Quarry/Mining Land/Dumps 14.54 0.04 4.75 0.04

Water Bodies

16 Stream/River/Tank/Reservoir/Pond/Lake 106.89 0.28 44.56 0.40

17 Canal 195.28 0.52 52.38 0.46

Total 37609.12 100 11272.45 100

Observations of Land Use/Land Cover in 10 Km Radius – Level-II

Of the 9.48% built-up area, 6.84% area is occupied by settlements/towns

including part of Barnala which is a major town located in the northeastern part of

the proposed MEP. Industrial area occupies 2.41%, followed by 0.22% of the

study area with new developments coming. There is no forest cover in the study

area. 88.55% of the buffer zone is occupied by agriculture land indicating the

dominance of agriculture activity in the area. In agriculture, irrigated agricultural

predominates (69.44%) followed by other agriculture lands (18.44%). Rice and

Wheat are the principal irrigated crops in the area. Fallow land occupy a

marginal area (0.42%) followed by a small area (0.26%) of plantations.

Waste land takes only a small share of 1.17% of which, small quarries and brick

industries occupy 0.81% followed by small patches of land with/without scrub

and area with rocky exposure or barren land occupying 0.36% of the area. Water

bodies occupy 0.80% of the study area of which, Upper Lisarna Nala in the

northwest and Dhanaula Drain in the central part covers 0.28% of the study area.

Other water bodies including medium irrigation tanks and small ponds occupy

0.52% of the buffer zone.


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-17

Figure 4.12 Land Use Classification (Level II) 10 km radius of the Study


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-18

Observations of General Land Use/Land Cover in 5 Km Radius – Level-II

The general land use pattern in the core zone is also agriculture dominant. Of

the 7.94% built-up area, 4.44% area is occupied by settlements/towns - Hadiaya

and Dhaula are the medium sized villages located in the core zone. Industrial

area occupies 3.43%, followed by 0.08% of the area with new developments

coming. There is no forest cover in the study area. 89.74% of the core zone is

occupied by agriculture land indicating the dominance of agriculture activity in

the area. In agriculture, irrigated agricultural predominates (73.59%) followed by

other agriculture lands (14.86%). Rice and Wheat are the principal irrigated

crops in the area. Plantations occupy a marginal area (0.73%) followed by a

small area (0.56%) of fallow land. Waste land takes only a small share of 1.45%

of which, small quarries and brick industries occupy 1.14% followed by small

patches of land with/without scrub and area with rocky exposure or barren land

occupying 0.31% of the area. Water bodies occupy 0.86% of the core zone of

which, Dhanaula Drain in the central part covers 0.40% of the study area. Other

water bodies including medium irrigation tanks and small ponds occupy 0.46% of

the core zone.


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-19

Figure 4.13 Land Use/Cover Map of 5 Km Radius Areas – Level-II


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-20

Distribution of LU/LC in 10 Km Radius Area – Level-II in the form of pie-charts for a

better understanding in Figure 4.14 & 4.15

Figure 4.14 Distribution of LU/LC in 10 Km Radius Area – Level-II

Figure 4.15 Distribution of LU/LC in 5 Km Radius Area – Level-II


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-21

List of Industries

There are no major industries in around the study area.

4.3 Geology and Soil Quality

4.3.1 Geology

The geological facts reveal that the Indo-Gangetic plain owes its origin to a

depression of synclinal nature. The origin of this depression or trough is

intimately connected with the origin of the mountains, though its exact nature is

not known and is a matter of conjecture. This trough was later on filled up with

enormous quantities of sediments brought down from the mountains by the rivers

of the Indo-Gangetic system. The exact depth of the alluvium has not been

ascertained, though it varies from less than 1,000 to over 2,000 meters. The

alluvial sedimentse comprise of massive beds of clay, silt, sand and gravels.

Geologically, the state of Punjab is formed by the alluvial deposits of various

rivers flowing through Punjab, namely Ravi, Beas, Satluj, Ghaggar and their

tributaries. Based upon the period of deposition these are further sub divided into

recent, newer and older alluvial deposits.

4.3.1.1. Geology at the study area

Geologically the area is covered by Sedimentary formation of Quaternary area.

The study area is underlined by Grey micaceous, fine to coarse grained sand,

silt and clay (Active flood plain), Cyclic sequence of grey micaceous sand silt and

clay (Older flood plain deposit and Mulitcyclic sequence of brown to grey silt, clay

and kankar and reddish brown to grey sand (older alluvial plain). The geology of

the study area is given in Figure 4.16

The land forms / geomorphic units and structures such as fractures, fissures and

faults have been interpreted from the recent satellite image. All the landform /

geomorphic units and structures occurring in the study area are mapped. The

geomorphology and structures of the area plays the vital role in identifying the

ground water potential zones. Two geomorphic units namely Dune complex,

Alluvial plain older – under canal command in the study area. The following

geomorphic units have been interpreted.

1) Dune Complex

2) Alluvial plain older – under canal command

Dune complex and the Alluvial plain older are good in ground water occurrence

and movement. However the Dune complex is very good as this unit completely

comprised of sand. Alluvial plan older under canal command are clay and silt

dominant. The percolation rate is comparatively low in this unit. The existing mill

site area is located in Alluvial Plain older under canal command. The

Geomorphology of the study area is presented in Figure 4.17


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-22

Figure 4.16 Geology of the Study area


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-23

Figure 4.17 Geomorphology of the Study area


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-24

4.4 Mineral Resources

Minerals reported to occur in the State are quartz and silica sand. Production of

sulphur and minor minerals were only reported in the State. Sulphur is recovered

as by- product from fertilizer plant. Production of sulphur and minor minerals

were only reported in the State. Geology and Mineral map is shown in Figure

4.18.

No major minerals are present at the existing mill area, only the sheet rock was

observed in the Mill site.


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-25

Figure 4.17 Geology and Mineral Map


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-26

4.5 Soil Environment

4.5.1 Soil of the Region1

There are many different classifications of soils of Punjab by different sources.

The soils of Punjab have been classified into the major soil types. Soil map of

Punjab state is shown in Figure 4.19.

Flood Plain or Bet Soils- Flood Plain or Bet Soils are Khadar soils of the

periodically flooded or old flood plain areas of various rivers, streams or choes of

the state. They are found in the form of elongated belts on the both side of the

river channel such as those of Satluj, Ravi, Beas and Ghagghar. They are pale

to yellowish brown in colour. The soils are well drained and very deep and they

vary in texture and these have generally a low and irregular organic matter.

Depending upon the source of alluvium, the soils are calcareous or non-

calcareous.

Loamy Soils- In Malwa plain, loamy soils have a large coverage in western

Patiala tehsil, Nabha area, Sangrur area, southern Moga district, some patches

in Mukatsar area and Bathinda district. hese are deep and fine grained soils,

which have developed under sub- moist and cool to warm temperate climate.

The pH value decreasing nears the surface from 8.0 to 7.8 in the B-horizon.

Sandy Soils- These are arid soils of south-western and south central Punjab

covering the districts of Bathinda, Mansa, southern parts of Firozepur and

Mukatsar districts, larger parts of Sangrur, south -central parts of Patiala district

and some patches of Ludhiana district. These soils have developed under semi

arid & warm to hot climatic conditions with rainfall ranging from 30cm to

50cm.The soils are yellowish to grey colour, the overall grey colure reflects the

deficiency of organic matter and also is poor in nitrogen, phosphorus and potash.

The pH value ranges from 7.8 to 8.5. The soils are sandy loam to silt in mixture.

They are dry and are called calciorthids in Taxonomy Classification. They have

low to medium fertility but by artificial irrigation they become much more

productive and are capable of producing cotton, citrus, oilseeds, wheat and

fodder crops.

4.5.2 Soil in the Study area

It is essential to determine the potential of soil in the area and identify the current

impacts of urbanization and industrialization on soil quality and also predict

impacts, which may arise due to the proposed project operations. Accordingly, a

study of assessment of the baseline soil quality has been carried out.

Prominent types of soil in the district are coarse loamy calcareous soils, fine

loamy calcareous soils and a thin layer of sandy over loamy soils presents

western and southern parts of the district. In the study area more specifically,

1 http:/ /www.punenvis.nic.in/ index2.aspx?slid=1854&mid=1&langid=1&sublinkid=376


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-27

Coarse loamy over sandy soils, Moderate flooding sandy soils are observed. Soil

classification of the study area (10 Km) is given in Figure 4.20

Figure 4.19-= Soil Map


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-28


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-29

Figure 4.20 Soil Classification of the study area


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-30

4.5.3 Background Soil Quality in Study Area

For studying soil quality in the region, sampling locations were selected to

assess the existing soil conditions in and around the existing plant area

representing various land use conditions. The physical, chemical and heavy

metal concentrations were determined. The present study of the soils establishes

the baseline characteristics and this will help in future in identifying the

incremental concentrations if any, due to the enhancement of capacity and allied

operations.

Eight locations within the 10 km around the study area were selected for soil

sampling. At each location, soil samples were collected from three different

depths viz. 30 cm, 60 cm and 90 cm below the surface and are homogenized

with the help of stainless steel soil-sampling probe. The soil samples were

collected during Northeast monsoon and winter season. Various physical and

chemical parameters were analyzed as per Indian Standards. The soil sampling

locations are given in the Table 4.7 and the same are shown in Figure 4.21. The

summary results of the soil quality are presented in Annexure 20. The soil

sampling results are compared with the standard soil classification.

Table 4.7 Details of Soil Sampling Locations

Location Name Location

Code Distance* Direction*

Sampling Coordinates (Latitude, Longitude)

Existing Mill Area S 1 - - 30°17'30.40"N, 75°29'40.03"E

Hadiaya S 2 2.8 NE 30°19'15.99"N, 75°30'16.55"E

Dhaula S 3 6.8 E 30°16'54.58"N, 75°27'36.19"E

Chhanna S 4 2.0 SE 30°16'47.74"N, 75°30'52.82"E

Kaleke S 5 7.2 SE 30°15'25.47"N, 75°29'7.04"E

Near Dhanaula S 6 2.0 SW 30°17'18.82"N, 75°34'2.32"E

Khuddi Khurd S 7 3.3 NNW 30°20'49.29"N, 75°29'40.45"E

Khuddi Kalan S 8 4.2 NNW 30°21'34.72"N, 75°29'12.84"E

*With respect to the Existing Mill Area

4.5.4 Observations on Baseline Soil Status

It has been observed from the site survey and the values of bulk density,

porosity, water holding capacity and, texture of soil is mostly sandy clay loam,

sandy loom and loam type. The pH of the soil extracts varied from 7.94 to 8.33.

Based on soil pH the soils can be classified into moderately alkaline type.


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-31

The concentration of chlorides and sulphates varied from 211.42 to721.97 mg/kg

and 481.96 to 2579.30 mg/kg respectively. The available nitrogen in soils ranged

from 1206 to 1695 kg/ha. Thus, the available nitrogen in soils was found

sufficient in terms of standard soil classification by Indian Council for Agricultural

Research (ICAR), New Delhi.

Figure 4.21 Soil Sampling Locations

Available phosphorus level in soils was found less at the plant site and it more

than sufficient in other sampling locations as their concentration (kg/ha) in soils

varied from 6.5 to 249.2. Available potassium in soils varied from 49.17-375kg/ha

indicating their very lesser levels to more than sufficient in soils.

Among heavy metals the concentrations of Cadmium found below 0.01mg/kg.

Zinc in soils was found in range from 19.39 mg/kg to 37.25 mg/kg. Iron content

was reported to range from 2117.61 to 8940.10 mg/kg which indicates that the

soil is rich in iron. Mercury and Molybdenum levels were found less than 0.01

mg/kg in all the soils. The soil results are compared with soil classification given

in the Hand Book of Agriculture published by Indian Council for Agricultural

Research (ICAR), New Delhi


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-32

Based on above results, it is evident that the soils are not contaminated by any

pollution sources since the levels of chemical parameters are normal. Further,

the soils are poor in nutrients viz., nitrogen, phosphorus and potash and hence,

the manual addition of fertilizers and manure are required for good agricultural

yield.

The soil extract showed electrical conductance in range from 0.172 millimhos/cm

to 0.500 millimhos/cm. Based on results the soils are average type and do not

harm the germination and crops.

4.5.5 Cropping pattern in the study area

The open lands near settlements are mainly agricultural fields. Cotton (A), Rice

Wheat, Rapeseed- mustard are the major crops in study area. Along with Ber,

Guava, peach, Grapes, chillies, Potato, Cauliflower and Peas are Horticultural

Crops in the study area. The vegetation around homes includes mainly fruit or

vegetable-yielding species such as Cocos nucifera, Musa paradisiaca, Emblica

officinalis, Luffa acutangula, Moringa oleifera and Psidium guyava.

4.6 Seismic zone:

The project area falls under ZONE III of seismic zones of India as per the IS

1893 (part 1):2002. According to GSHAP data, the state of Punjab falls in a

region of moderate to high seismic hazard. The Seismic zone map of India and

Punjab is shown in Figure 4.22 and Figure 4.23


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-33

Figure 4.22 Seismic Zone Map of India

Zone II- Low Damage Risk Zone (MSK VI or less)

Zone III-Moderate Damage Risk Zone (MSK VII)

Zone IV- High Damage Risk Zone (MSK VII)

Zone V- Very High Damage Risk Zone (MSK IX or more)

Figure 4.23 Earthquake Hazard map of Punjab

Source:GSHAP Harzard Map of Punjab, asc-india.org/maps/hazard/haz-punjab.htm

Study area

Study area


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-34

4.7 Meteorological Data

Micro-meteorological data forms an important component of the Environmental

Impact Assessment (EIA) study. As a part of the EIA study, both published long-

term data and site specific meteorological data was collected as per the ToR

(Terms of Reference) awarded for the proposed project. A meteorological station

was installed within the plant.

In order to assess the specific inversion levels and mixing heights for the

proposed Mill site, the upper air meteorological data was also collected by

installing SODAR equipment.

4.7.1 Climatological Data – IMD

The meteorological data collected from “Climatological Tables” comprises

monthly mean wind speed, wind direction, temperature, relative humidity, rainfall

etc., published by Indian Meteorological Department (IMD) and is presented in

Table 4.8 Thus, the secondary data collected was recorded over 30 years (1970

to 2000). IMD station located at Bhathinda (Aerial distance-32.5 km) was

considered as observatory station for the proposed project. This data was

compared with the site specific data generated during baseline monitoring

studies for analysis purpose.

Barnala region experiences maximum temperature to the tune of 45.6°C during

the summer months, especially in June, whereas the lowest temperature

reported during the winter season (January month) was in the order of 10.4°C.

The maximum relative humidity is generally experienced during August with a

peal level of about 75%. The lowest humidity can be observed during summer

period, especially in May and April with about 33%. The average annual rainfall

of the Barnala district was reported to be in the order of 558 mm and about 75%

of rainfall occurs from the last week of June to mid of September (south west

monsoon).

The winds predominantly blow from Northwest direction during January and

February. During summer (March to May), the winds blow from NW, SE and

western direction. Seasonal as well as annual wind rose diagrams are presented

in Figure 4.24 and Figure 4.25 respectively. Wind velocities were found almost

stable throughout year with an annual average level of 1.05 m/s (3.8 kmph).


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-35

Figure 4.24 Windrose diagrams for various seasons as per IMD Bhatinda Observatory Data

Winter (January-February) Summer (March-May)

South-West monsoon (June-September) North-East monsoon (October-December)

Figure 4.25 Annual Windrose (January-December) as per IMD Bhatinda Observatory Data


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-36

Table 4.8 Indian Meteorological Department – Climatological 30 Years Data:

1970-2001s Station: Bhatinda

Month

Temperature (ºC)

Humidity (%)

Rainfall (mm) Mean wind

speed (kmph)

Mean Extremes Monthly Total

No. of Rainy days

Heaviest fall in 24 Hrs

Date and Year

Highest

Lowest Highe

st Lowe

st

Jan 24.4 0.9 27.9 -3.9 72-51 10.9 1.1 26.4 25,1977 2.5

Feb 27.9 2.4 31.8 -0.9 68-49 17.9 1.7 50.0 13,1966 3.4

Mar 34.8 6.9 38.9 2.4 62-42 19.0 1.5 58.4 26,1967 3.9

Apr 41.5 13.2 45.4 8.9 48-33 6.3 1.0 11.8 14.1977 4.9

May 44.6 17.1 47.4 12.4 46-33 12.6 1.3 30.3 15.1973 4.8

Jun 45..6 21.4 48.2 17.2 52-35 32.5 1.8 97.7 24,1974 5.8

Jul 42.4 21.8 47.7 18.4 71-58 138.4 6.5 143.5 15,1981 5.9

Aug 38.9 21.7 40.7 19.3 75-65 115.2 5.3 185.4 18,1964 4.3

Sep 38.5 18.8 41.5 12.4 67-54 53.7 2.5 125.0 11,1962 3.3

Oct 37.0 11.8 39.4 7.9 59-45 7.3 0.5 40.0 9.1980 2.4

Nov 32.8 5.3 38.4 0.3 62-46 7.7 0.7 42.3 3.1981 1.8

Dec 26.6 1.4 28.9 -1.0 69-50 5.4 0.7 19.5 16.1973 2.0

Avg/ Annual Total

45.1 0.3 48.2 -3.9 63-47 42 36 181.4 - 3.8

4.7.2 Site Specific Meteorology Data for the Study Period

A continuous weather monitoring station was installed near the plant site at a

height of 5 m above the ground level and hourly measurements of the following

parameters were measured at site during the study period i.e from 27th

November to 6th January 2013. Wind speed (m/s), wind direction (Degrees),

Temperature (ºC), Relative humidity (%), Solar radiation (CCM) and Rainfall

(mm).

In addition to this, site specific upper air data was also collected by installing

SODAR instrument and the data thus generated was used to compute the

surface inversion levels and mixing heights.

Ambient Temperature - During the year, the temperature typically varies from

4°C to 40°C and is rarely below 1°C or above 44°C. The average month wise

temperature variation is shown in Figure 4.26. The warm season lasts from April

14 to July 8 with an average daily high temperature above 35°C. The hottest day

of the year is May 24, with an average high of 40°C and low of 24°C. The cold

season lasts from December 13 to February 10 with an average daily high

temperature below 20°C. The coldest day of the year is December 31, with an

average low of 4°C and high of 16°C.


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-37

Figure 4.26 Daily High and Low Temperature

Note: The daily average low (blue) and high (red) temperature with percentile

bands ((inner band from 25th to 75th percentile, outer band from 10th to 90th

percentile)

Relative Humidity - The relative humidity typically ranges from 22% (dry) to

97% (very humid) over the course of the year, rarely dropping below 13% (very

dry) and reaching as high as 100% (very humid). The air is driest around April

29, at which time the relative humidity drops below 26% (dry) three days out of

four; it is most humid around January 10, exceeding 94% (very humid) three

days out of four.

Wind Speed: The foregoing weather discussion reveals that the winter period of

present observations (27 November to 6 January) is normally associated with

light rains, light winds, humidity around 50% and dew point about 5 degrees. The

winter may witness clouds, thunder storms and day light for about 8 to 10 hours.

However, the actual weather conditions at site may vary from year to year

depending upon local /synoptic weather conditions. This year, the weather at site

has been variable mixed cold, cloudy, partly clear/ cloudy, foggy etc. As such

inversion/mixing height characteristics are accordingly variable from day to day

and persistence characteristics inversion / mixing height can be defined with

limited set of present data. It needs comprehensive studies at least over a couple

of years. However, an analysis of the data collected is given in Figure 4.27

average (black) wind speed with percentile bands.


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-38

Figure 4.27 Wind Speed data

Note: The average daily minimum (red), maximum (green), and average (black)

wind speed with percentile bands (inner band from 25th to 75th percentile, outer

band from 10th to 90th percentile).

4.7.3 Site Specific Upper Air Data Measurements

Mixing heights and inversion levels are one of the significant parameters that

would influence the overall dispersion of pollutants in the atmosphere and these

parameters will have some bearing on the predicted ground level concentrations

of the pollutants due to release of pollutants from the stacks. As per the

requirements of the terms of reference, site specific upper air meteorological

data was measured near the Mill site by installing a SODAR instrument. Site

specific SODAR study, at existing mill site for a period of about 40 days (27th

November to 6th January 2013) has been successfully completed shown in

Figure 4.28

Figure.4.28 Established SODAR instrument at Mill site

SODAR Antenna SODAR Data Acquisition System

Summary of the SODAR study findings are presented hereunder and detailed

report is presented in Annexure 21


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-39

Analysis of the data obtained during the study period shows that inversion height

varies from a minimum of 51m to maximum of 329m during the study period. The

averaged inversion level considering stable ABL conditions (1800-0600 hours) is

164±70m during the study period. The hourly averaged mixing height pertaining

to unstable ABL during the day time (1000-1700 hours) is seen to vary from a

minimum of 310m to a maximum of 1070m. The average level is seen to be

638±194m during the study period. The maximum day time mixing height,

around noon (1200-1400 hours) is seen to be about 1 Km on several days which

is fairly good for winter.

The diurnal variation of ABL mixing height ( Figure) further shows that maximum

of inversion height is in seen during periods of maximum ground cooling (0300-

0500 hours) while maximum of day time maximum mixing height is observed

around noon hours (1200-1400 hours) when the ground temperature is also

maximum. These observations support the concept of the meteorological

considerations that maximum inversion height and mixing heights are observed

during periods of maximum cooling and heating of the ground.

Figure 4.29 Diurnal variation of ABL mixing height at Barnala (27 Nov. 2013-6 Jan. 2014)

Besides above, fumigation period is seen to vary from couple of hours to more

than 4 hours depending local/ synoptic cold/fog weather condition. The low level

elevated inversion due to lifting of fog is seen on few days during this period.

They are normally seen at any site during extreme winter and particularly during

fog conditions. These elevated layers curtail the mixing height significantly and

their occurrence need special focused study to characterize their

occurrence characteristics so as to incorporate the outcome in planning

environment management strategies.


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-40

4.8 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring

The ambient air quality with respect to the study area of 10 km radius around the

proposed Mill site forms the baseline information. Various sources of air pollution

in the region are rural activities, traffic and industrial. This will also be useful for

assessing the conformity to standards of the ambient air quality during the plant

operation. The study area represents mostly rural environment. This section

describes the selection of sampling locations, methodology adopted for

sampling, analytical techniques and frequency of sampling.

4.8.1. Methodology Adopted for Air Quality Survey

4.1.1.1 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Stations

The selection of the ambient air quality monitoring stations was done based on

the CPCB guidelines and Environmental Impact Assessment Manual published

by MoEF. The study area forms a typical rural background and there are no

major industries located within the study area. The primary source of air pollution

is the national highway-64 connecting Chandigarh to Dabwali at (2.8 km, NW)

and State Highway-13 (W) is passes adjacent to the mill area, the secondary

published data collected from the district census records indicated that there are

no minerals and mining exploration facilities located in the study area.

The air quality monitoring stations were selected based on a screening air quality

modeling exercise prior to commence of the study. Long-term meteorological

data of nearest IMD station at Bhatinda for the specific seasons was adopted

while estimating the possible impact zone due to emissions from the proposed

facilities at the existing mill. The regional meteorological data for October to

January indicates the winds predominantly blow from Northwest direction and

during summer (March to May), the winds blow from NW, SE and western

direction. Based on the findings of the screening air quality models, the impact

zone is limited to 2 to 3 km from the mill site beyond such a distance the

pollutants would rapidly get diluted.

Eight (8) air quality monitoring stations were selected for a detailed monitoring as

per the CPCB guidelines. Details of the air monitoring stations are presented in

Table 4.9. Stations at villages Dhanaula (AAQ3) and Chhanna (AAQ4) and

Kaleke (AAQ5) represent the down-wind direction of the mill site, whereas

stations at Handiaya (AAQ2) and Khuddi Khurd (AAQ8) represent the upwind

direction. Stations at Handiaya represent the air quality near major town and

major settlement. Ambient air quality station near the mill site represents typical

background scenario of the proposed facility. Location of the ambient air quality

stations are presented in Figure 4.30


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-41

Table 4.9 Details of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Locations

Location code

Location Distance from

Boundary (Aerial Distance in km)

Direction Environmental

setting

AAQ1 Existing Mill Site - - -

AAQ2 Handiaya 2.8 NE Upwind/Town

AAQ3 Near Dhanaula 6.8 E Downwind /Rural

AAQ4 Chhanna 2.0 SE Downwind /Rural

AAQ5 Kaleke 7.2 SE Downwind /Rural

AAQ6 Kahneke 4.3 S Crosswind/Rural

AAQ7 Dhaula 2.0 SW Crosswind/Rural

AAQ8 Khuddi Khurd 3.3 NW Upwind/Rural

Ambient air quality monitoring was carried out at a frequency of two days per

week at each of the identified location during study period (October to January

2013). The following criteria parameters were monitored according to the terms of

reference and National Ambient Air Quality Standards as stated under MoEF

Notification dated 16th November, 2009: (1) Particulate Matter (PM10) (2)

Particulate Matter (PM2.5) (3) Sulphur dioxide (SO2) (4) Nitrogen dioxide (NO2) (5)

Carbon monoxide(CO) (6). zone (O3) (7) Lead (Pb) (8) Ammonia (NH3) (9)

Benzene (C6H6) (10) Benzo (a) pyrene (BaP) in Particulate Phase; (11) Arsenic

(As) and (12) Nickel.

In addition to the above parameters representative samples of PM10 samples

were analyzed for elemental analysis and polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons as

per the terms of reference issued for the project and the test reports are

presented in Annexure- 23 (B) of this EIA report. The measured data was used

for assessing for any anthropogenic impacts on the existing background levels.


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-42

Figure 4.30- Location of Air Quality Monitoring Stations

The consolidated data of ambient air quality monitoring is shown in the Table

4.10 and Table 4.11 and test reports are presented in Annexure 22. It indicates

that except PM10 and PM2.5 concentration all the values are within the limits of

National Ambient Air Quality Standards prescribed by Central Pollution Control

Board.


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-43

Table 4.10 Summary Of The Maximum Baseline Concentrations of Pollutants

Station Location SO2

(µg/m3)

NO2 (µg/m

3)

PM2.5

(µg/m3

PM10 (µg/m

3

Pb (µg/m

3)

CO (mg/m

3)

O3 (µg/m

3)

AAQ1 Project Area 18.1 42.8 79 117.0 BDL(DL: 0.05)

BDL(DL: 0.005)

BDL (DL: 10)

AAQ2 Handiaya 11.2 36.1 87 142.0 BDL(DL: 0.05)

BDL(DL: 0.005)

BDL (DL: 10)

AAQ3 Near Dhanaula

16.9 40.2 81 114.0 BDL(DL: 0.05)

BDL(DL: 0.005)

BDL (DL: 10)

AAQ4 Channa 10.8 24.5 87 144.0 BDL(DL: 0.05)

BDL(DL: 0.005)

BDL (DL: 10)

AAQ5 Kaleke 14.6 38.8 78 121.0 BDL(DL: 0.05)

BDL(DL: 0.005)

BDL (DL: 10)

AAQ6 Kahneke 11.9 34.7 74 119.0 BDL(DL: 0.05)

BDL(DL: 0.005)

BDL (DL: 10)

AAQ7 Dhaula 14.5 37.9 84 118.0 BDL(DL: 0.05)

BDL(DL: 0.005)

BDL (DL: 10)

AAQ8 Khuddi Khurd

11.9 31.1 77 114.0 BDL(DL: 0.05)

BDL(DL: 0.005)

BDL (DL: 10)

Note: BDL (Below detectable limit), DL (Detectable limit)

Table 4.11 Summary of the Average Baseline Concentrations

Of Pollutants

S.No Location NH3

(µg/m3)

Benzen (mg/m

3)

Benzo (a) pyrene (ng/m

3)

Arsenic(As) (ng/m

3)

Nickel (Ni) (ng/m

3)

1 Existing Mill Area

BDL (DL: 5) BDL (DL: 1) BDL (DL: 1) BDL (DL: 1) BDL(DL: 5)

2 Handiaya BDL (DL: 5) BDL (DL: 1) BDL (DL: 1) BDL (DL: 1) BDL(DL: 5)

3 Near Dhanaula


4 Channa BDL (DL: 5) BDL (DL: 1) BDL (DL: 1) BDL (DL: 1) BDL(DL: 5)

5 Kaleke BDL (DL: 5) BDL (DL: 1) BDL (DL: 1) BDL (DL: 1) BDL(DL: 5)

6 Kahneke BDL (DL: 5) BDL (DL: 1) BDL (DL: 1) BDL (DL: 1) BDL(DL: 5)

7 Dhaula BDL (DL: 5) BDL (DL: 1) BDL (DL: 1) BDL (DL: 1) BDL(DL: 5)

8 Khuddi Khurd


Note: BDL (Below detectable limit), DL (Detectable limit)

4.8.1.2 Observations on Ambient Air Quality of the Study Area

Particulate Matter (PM10): Average, minimum and maximum reported

concentrations of PM10 are presented in Table 4.12 and Figure 4.31. The PM10

concentrations were observed in the range of 67 µg/m3 to 144 µg/m3, with the

average values in the range of 93 to 99 µg/m3. The measured average PM10

concentration in the study are within the stipulated National Ambient Quality

Standard of 100 µg/m3 prescribed for 24 hourly monitored values of

concentration for industrial, residential, rural and other areas. The occurrence of

PM10 levels across the study area could be attributed to wind ban dust in the

region.


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-44

Table 4.12 Measured Ambient PM10 Concentration

S.NO Location PM10 Concentration µg/m³

Minimum µg/m

3

Maximum, µg/m

3

Average, µg/m

3

98th

Percentile

1 Existing Mill Area 77 117 99 115

2 Handiaya 79 142 96 133

3 Near Dhanaula 72 114 94 112

4 Channa 79 144 98 141

5 Kaleke 72 121 88 116

6 Kahneke 67 119 99 118

7 Dhaula 78 118 93 115

8 Khuddi Khurd 69 114 86 112

Figure 4.31 Trends of Measured Ambient PM10 Concentrations in the Study

Area

Particulate Matter (PM2.5) - Average, minimum and maximum reported

concentrations of PM2.5 are presented in Table 4.13 and Figure 4.32. The PM2.5

concentrations were observed in the range of 38 to 87 µg/m3, with the average

values in the range of 52 µg/m3 to 60 µg/m3. The measured average PM2.5

concentration in the study area are within the stipulated National Ambient Quality

Standard of 60 µg/m3 prescribed for 24 hourly monitored values of concentration

for Industrial, Residential, Rural and other areas. The occurrence of PM2.5 levels

across the study area could be attributed to wind ban dust in the region.

Table 4.13 Measured Ambient PM2.5 Concentration

Sl.No Location PM2.5 Concentration, µg/m

3

Minimum µg/m

3

Maximum, µg/m

3

Average, µg/m

3

98th

Percentile


2 Handiaya 44 87 56 81


4 Channa 46 87 58 86

5 Kaleke 40 78 53 74

6 Kahneke 38 74 58 73

7 Dhaula 44 84 55 78

8 Khuddi Khurd 38 77 52 72


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-45

Figure 4.32 Measured Ambient PM2.5 Concentrations

Sulphur Dioxide (SO2): Average, minimum and maximum reported

concentrations of SO2 are presented in Table 4.14 and Figure 4.22. SO2

concentrations at the designated eight locations were observed in the range of

<5 to 18 µg/m3. The average values were found to be in the range of 7 to 10

µg/m3. Thus, the observed SO2 concentrations as well as their average values

are well within the limits (80 µg/m3) specified for Industrial, Residential, Rural and

other areas. The 98th percentile values, observed in the range 12 µg/m3 to 18

µg/m3 are also less than the standards (80 µg/m3) for Industrial, Residential,

Rural & other areas are well within the National Ambient Air Quality Standards.

Table 4.14 Measured Ambient SO2 Concentrations

Sl.No Location SO2 Concentration, µg/m

3

Minimum µg/m

3

Maximum, µg/m

3

average, µg/m

3

98th

Percentile


2 Handiaya 7 8 7 8

3 Near Dhanaula <5 17 9 16

4 Channa <5 15 9 15

5 Kaleke 6 7 7 7

6 Kahneke <5 12 9 12

7 Dhaula 6 15 7 14

8 Khuddi Khurd <5 12 8 12


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-46

Figure 4.33 Measured Ambient SO2 Concentrations

Oxides of Nitrogen- Average, minimum and maximum reported concentrations

of NOX are presented in Table 4.15 and Figure 4.34. The NOx concentrations at

the eight locations were observed in the range of 10 to 43 µg/m3. The average

values were found to range from 21 to 31 µg/m3. The 98th percentile values,

observed in the range 31 to 42 µg/m3, the NOx values are well within the

standards (80 µg/m3) for Industrial, Residential, Rural & other areas as per the

National Ambient Air Quality Standards.

Table 4.15 Measured Ambient NO2 Concentrations

S.No Location NO2 Concentration, µg/m

3

Minimum µg/m

3

Maximum µg/m

3

Average µg/m

3

98th

Percentile


2 Handiaya 19 36 27 35


4 Channa 22 39 29 38

5 Kaleke 20 35 25 34

6 Kahneke 19 35 29 35

7 Dhaula 20 38 27 36

8 Khuddi Khurd 10 31 21 31


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-47

Figure 4.34 Measured Ambient NO2 Concentrations

Other Parameters – Concentration of other pollutants were reported to be below

the reportable limit of the respective pollutants as stated in the CPCB test

methods. This aspect reconfirms that the study area represents a typical rural

background without any interference from industrial and other major activities

4.9 Noise Environment

To evaluate the noise level in the study area, noise levels were recorded at the

proposed Mill site and other eight locations in the study area. The

measurements were carried out using Type 1 noise level integrated sound level

meter. Monitoring was done at each location during the study period for 24 hrs

on hourly basis to obtain hourly equivalent sound pressure level. A digital noise

level meter was used to record the noise levels. From these values, day time

and night time and 24-hrs Leq values were calculated. Day time is considered

from 0600 hrs to 2200 hrs and night from 2200 hrs to 0600 hrs.

Location of noise monitoring stations is presented in Figure 4.35 Noise level

equivalent values are presented in Table 4.16. The measured noise levels have

been compared with the standard specified in Schedule III, Rule 3 of

Environmental Protection Rules.

Table 4.16 Noise Sampling Locations

S.No Location Location

code Direction

Distance from Boundary (Aerial Distance in km)

1 Existing Mill Area N 1

2 Dhanaula N 2 E 6.8,

3 Channa N 3 SE 2.0,

4 Dhaula N 4 , SW 2.0

5 Kaleke N 5 SE 7.2,

6 Kahnoke N 6 S 4.3

7 Handiaya N 7 NE 2.8,

8 Khuddi Khurd N 8 NW 3.3,


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-48

Figure 4.35 Noise Monitoring Locations

Observations- Average Leq values of all the observations during day time were

found in the range of 53.1 to 57.9, during night time the values were observed in

the range of 46.5 to 49.5 dB (A). The noise levels are found to be below the

noise levels standards for Industrial Areas Category 75 dB during day and 70

during night prescribed by CPCB. The hourly noise level monitoring data is

enclosed in Annexure 23

4.10 Water Environment

Both water resources and water quality have been studied within the 10 km

radius of the Mill site under this EIA study. No major perennial rivers were

observed in the study area. The main source of water for the mill is from the

Uppli canal. The Uppli canal is a manmade canal which is flowing in the south

direction of the boundary of the mill.

4.10.1 Surface Water Resources in the Study Area

The main canals in the area which feed the various distributaries and minor

canals are the Bathinda branch and Kotla branch canal originated from Sirhind


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-49

canal. All of which originate from Satluj River. The Uppli canal is one of the

distributaries of the Bathinda branch. The Sirhind Canal is a large irrigation canal

that carries water from the Sutlej River in Punjab state, India. Sirhind Canal is in

Punjab state, northwestern India. It opened in 1882 and consists of an extensive

canal system that irrigates more than 2,000 square miles (5,200 square km) of

farmland1. The canal begins at Ropar headworks near Ropar city in Rupnagar

district of Punjab.

4.10.1.1 Canal Water System for Irrigation

Punjab Irrigation System is accompanied by a network of drainage system. The

drains were originally constructed to meet agricultural drainage, counter the

problem of water logging and to collect the surplus irrigation water and flood

water. The State has three dams namely Bhakra Dam with storage capacity of

5.60 MAF constructed on River Satluj, Pong Dam with storage capacity 1.90

MAF constructed on River Ravi.

At present the area under irrigation is 40.77 lakh hectares, which is 97.68% of

the area under cultivation. The canal surface water distribution System consists

of 14500 km of Canals/ Distributaries covering six major systems in the state

namely: Sirhind Canal system, Bhakra Main Line, Bist Doab Canal, Upper Bari

Doab Canal, Sirhind feeder and Eastern canal. 27% area is irrigated by canal

surface water and 73% area by 12.82 lakh tubewells. The total length of

watercourses is 1,20,000 km in the State, out of which 41,294 km watercourses

has been lined so far. The canal water and electricity is being provided free of

cost to the farmers in the State.

4.10.1.2 Sirhind Canal Water System

The Sirhind Canal begins at Ropar and heads southwest to Doraha in Ludhiana

district. At Doraha, the canal splits into three: the Abohar branch, the Bathinda

branch and the Patiala branch. Each of these further subdivides extensively to

irrigate a large swathe of the Malwa region of Punjab. There are many

distributaries, in addition to the three principal branches. Once a partially arid

zone, this area is now extremely fertile due to the water distributed by the canal

network.

The Sirhind Canal which offtakes from Ropar headwork has an authorized

capacity of 12620 Cs with a culturable command area of 13.59 lac hec. The

Sirhind Canal and its distribution network are spread over a length of 3215Km.2

The canal network of Punjab is given below in Figure 4.36

Before 1947, headwork at Ropar was constructed in the year 1874-82 for

utilizing water of river Sutlej in the old Sirhind Canal system and this system was

developed on run off the river basis. The canal irrigation infrastructure in the pre-

partition period was well maintained.


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-50

During post independence period, numbers of multipurpose projects were

planned over rivers, Sutlej, Beas and Ravi. For better utilization of the stored

water for irrigation, dams and reservoirs, substantial expansion of irrigation

infrastructure by constructing additional network of canals and remodeling the

existing canals has been initiated in Punjab. The salient features of the Sirhind

canal system is given below in Table 4.17

Table Error! No text of specified style in document..17 Salient Features of Sirhind Canal System

Attributes Values

Name of Project Sirhind Canal System

Name of the River Satluj

Basin/s Involved Indus up to International Border

Year of Start 1874

Year of Completion of project 1887

Gross Command Area (GCA) (Th a) 1510.57

Potential Created (Th ha) 845

Potential Utilized (Th ha) 845

District's Benefitted Ropar, Ludhiana , Sangrur , Barnala , Bathinda , Faridkot , Mukatsar , Moga & Ferozepur

Source : http://india-wris.nrsc.gov.in/wrpinfo/index.php?title=Sirhind_Canal_System_JI03039

Discharge capacity and the length of the canal system are indicative of the

strength and coverage of the network. The Capacity (discharge and length) of

Sirhind canal of Punjab is given in Table 4.18

Table 4.18 Capacity of Sirhind Canal

Canal Discharge (Cusecs) Length (Kms.)

Sirhind canal 12622 59.44

Source: pbirrigation.gov.in

1 http:/ /www.britannica.com/EBchecked/ topic/546579/Sirhind-Canal 2 Canal Administration, Department of Irrigation, Government of Punjab


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-51

Figure 4.36 Canals Network of Punjab2

2 http:/ /www.punenvis.nic.in/show_file.aspx?linkid=3-941443757.jpg

Bathinda Branch (Distributaries of Srihind Canal

Srihind Canal


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-52

Water shed in the Study area-There are around 23 watersheds within study

area which covers an aerial extent of 328.38 Sq.Km. Watershed within 10Km

radius from the mill is given in Figure 37

Table 4.19 Watershed within 10Km radius Study Area

Micro Watershed No Area in Sq.M Area in Sq.Km

1 11356841 11

2 11032807 11

3 7013753 7

4 9858691 10

5 10111696 10

6 14533836 15

7 14733643 15

8 13249695 13

9 14420284 14

10 12330145 12

11 3774924 4

12 5960680 6

13 9169896 9

14 7140468 7

15 8723138 9

16 17572254 18

17 18523860 19

18 13187960 13

19 26525604 27

20 28065386 28

21 24134578 24

22 22105979 22

23 24852793 25


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-53

Figure 4.37 - Watershed Within 10Km Radius from the Project Boundary

The canal water system within the study area and the photograph showing the

canal water intake and storage arrangement made by TLPD is given in Figure

4.38 and Figure 4.39


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-54

Figure 4.38 Canals within the study area

Figure 4.39 - Canal Water intake arrangement in mill site

Water Intake system Flow meter for the measure of water

intake


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-55

Canal Water Storage Arrangement at

existing mill Canal Water Inflow in to the Sump at

existing mill

4.10.2 Surface Water Quality

Water quality parameters of surface water resources within the study area have

been considered for assessing the water environment. To assess the water

quality of the study area a surface water sampling location was selected. The

water sample was collected in the Uppli Canal which is the major source of water

for the project. The result of the surface water sample is given below in Table

4.20 and surface water quality analysis report are enclosed in Annexure 24 (a)

Table 4.20 Surface Water Analysis Results Treated Uppli Canal Water S.No Parameters Units Results

1. pH value - 7.93

2. Colour Hazen units

3. Odour - Unobjectionable

4. Taste - Agreeable

5. E. Conductivity µS/cm 314

6. Turbidity NTU <1.0

7. Total Suspended Solids mg/l 2.0

8. Total Dissolved solids mg/l 198

9. Dissolved Oxygen (as O2) mg/l 6.02

10. COD mg/l Nil

11. BOD (3 days at 27°C) mg/l Nil

12. Total Alkalinity(as CaCO3) mg/l 82.0

13. Ph. Alkalinity (as CaCO3) mg/l Nil

14. Carbonate (as CO3), mg/l Nil

15. Bicarbonate (as HCO3) mg/l 100

16. Total Hardness (as CaCO3) mg/l 132

17. Chlorides (as Cl) mg/l 5.87

18. Fluorides (as F) mg/l 0.33

19. Calcium (as CaCO3) mg/l 32.06

20. Magnesium (as CaCO3) mg/l 12.63

21. Sulphate (as SO4) mg/l 33.33

22. Nitrate (as NO3) mg/l 1.52

23. Total iron (as Fe) mg/l 0.02

24. Zinc (as Zn) mg/l 0.04

25. Copper (as Cu) mg/l <0.01

26. Nickel (as Ni) mg/l <0.01


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-56

27. Cadmium (as Cd) mg/l <0.01

28. Chromium (as Cr+6

) mg/l <0.01

29. Manganese (as Mn) mg/l <0.01

30. Lead (as Pb) mg/l <0.01

31. Oil & Grease mg/l <1.0

32. Residual Free Chlorine mg/l Nil

33. Boron (as B) mg/l <0.01

34. Mineral Oil, mg/l <0.01

35. Anionic Detergent (as MBAS) mg/l <0.01

36. Mercury (as Hg) mg/l <0.001

37. Phenolic Compounds (as C6H5OH)

mg/l <0.001

38. Arsenic (as As) mg/l <0.01

39. Cyanide (as CN), mg/l <0.005

40. Aluminium (as Al) mg/l <0.01

41. Selenium (Se) mg/l <0.01

42. Silica (as SiO2) mg/l 0.20

43. Sodium (as Na) mg/l 7.88

44. Potassium (as K) mg/l 2.0

45. Coliform Organisms/100 ml, (MPN) <2.0

Observations- The pH of canal waters is often found alkaline in nature.

IS:10500, 1993 and WHO (1984) standard which is within the standard. The

water samples are found to be slightly alkaline in nature along the canal stretch.

The TDS was represented to be 198 mg/l. The Heavy metals concentration is

well within the drinking water quality standards. Water quality reports indicate

that surface water in sampled area confirms to IS 10500:1992 drinking water

quality standards. Bacteriological studies reveal that Coliform bacteria of <2.0

MPN/100ml are present in the samples.

4.10.3 Ground Water Resources

4.10.3.1 Regional Hydro-geological Features and Aquifer Details

The district is occupied by Indo-gangetic alluvial plain of Quaternary age and falls

in Ghaggar sub-basin. The ground water occurs in alluvium formations

comprising fine to coarse sand which forms the potential aquifers. In the shallow

aquifers upto 50m ground water occurs under unconfined /water table conditions

where as in deeper aquifers semi confined /confined conditions exists.

Water level Behaviour- The depth to water level ranges from 8.72 (Haryao) to

23.89m (Barnala) during the pre monsoon period and 9.95 m to 25.41m bgl

during post monsoon period, The seasonal fluctuation varies from 1.05 m to

5.32m in the area. The long term fluctuation trend indicates average fall of

0.65m/year. The hydrogeology map of the district is given in Figure 4.40


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-57

Figure 4.40 Hydrogeology Map of Bathinda and Barnala region (Earlier Sangrur District)

Source: Ground Water Information Booklet Sangrur District, Punjab, CGWB, North Western Region, Chandigarh, 2008


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-58

Ground water level data for a monitoring well collected from CGWB located in

Barnala observation well indicates that the deepest water level is 30.4 m bgl

during November 2011 and shallowest water level is 25.13 m bgl during May

2007. The season wise ground water level data collected for Barnala monitoring

well is given in below in Figure 4.41

Figure 4.41 Barnala Observation well (CGWB) Ground water level

Source : Central Ground Water Board (CGWB)

4.10.3.2 Ground Water Resources- Block wise

The block wise ground water resources potential in the district has been

assessed as per GEC –97.The stage of ground water development ranges

between 119% (Mahel Kalan) to 229% (Dhuri) . The net ground water resources

of the district have been estimated to be 2282.16 MCM and gross ground water

draft of the district is 4177.44 leaving behind a short fall of 1911.06 MCM. The

stage of ground water development in the district is 183%.

The proposed Mill site falls under Barnala Block according to ground water

management survey by CGWB. Ground Water Resources & Development

Potential of district as per CGWB is given below in Table 4.21


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-59

Table 4.20 Ground Water Resources & Development Potential of Sangrur District

Block

Net Ground water

Availability in

HaZm

Utilizable ground water

Resources for

irrigation (MCM)

Existing ground

water draft For

Domestic industrial and other

Uses (MCM)

Gross draft

Allocation for future up to next 25 years

for domestic

and industrial

uses (MCM)

Net ground water

availability for future irrigation develop-

ment (MCM)

Stage of ground water

develop ment, %

Category of the Block

Barnala 274.58 550.86 3.97 554.83 5.56 -281.83 202 Over

exploited

Source: Ground Water Information Booklet Sangrur District, Punjab, CGWB, North Western Region,

Chandigarh, 2008

As per CGWB 31st March 2004, the Barnala block is categorized as an Over

Exploited Zone and the ground water potential and the categorization of blocks is

given in Figure 4.42


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-60

Figure 4.42 Ground Water Potential and the Categorization of Blocks

Source: Ground Water Information Booklet Sangrur District, Punjab, CGWB, North Western Region, Chandigarh, 2008


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-61

4.10.3.3 Groundwater Table and Yield in the Study Area

In order to identify the hydrogeology conditions of the study area, detailed hydro-

geological investigations were conducted during January 2014 The occurrence

of ground water in the study area (10 km radius) has been studied in detail by

collecting the water level from 21 well (tube wells). The depth of the wells ranges

from 85 m to134 m. The ground water levels are collected from the tube well. At

the time of the collection of water level the yield of the wells has been recorded.

The ground water levels varies between 15 to 27 m bgl and yield of the wells

varies between 1000 to 4000 liters / minutes. Ground water level contour has

been constructed and presented below and the irrigation tube well with 3 km

radius is given below in Figure 4.43

Figure 4.43 Irrigation Tube Well in 3 km Radius of Existing Mill


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-62

The ground water level zone clearly depicts that the water level varies between

15 to 27m. The ground water level zone map shows that the water level ranging

between 23-27 m occupies majority of the area. The existing mill area is located

in 19-23m zone. The ground water level zone map is presented in Figure 4.44.

The location, ground water level and depth collected from the 10 m radius is

given the Table 4.22

Table Error! No text of specified style in document..21 Ground water level (10m radius)

S.No Location Longitude Latitude Depth in m

Water level in m

1 Mehta 75° 24' 39.07" 30° 17' 14.733" 104.0 24.0

2 Ghunnas 75° 25' 20.673" 30° 18' 34.696" 91.0 24.0

3 Jodhpur 75° 27' 16.701" 30° 22' 27.022" 122.0 27.0

4 Pharwal 75° 34' 51.763" 30° 20' 3.98" 134.0 27.0

5 Kalake 75° 32' 24.128" 30° 13' 47.8" 85.0 18.0

6 Dhurkot 75° 28' 22.076" 30° 14' 28.457" 121.0 26.0

7 Dhaula 75° 28' 9.772" 30° 16' 55.598" 114.0 24.0

7 Gamja Dhanaula

75° 30' 57.816" 30° 19' 14.543" 122.0 24.0

9 Hadlaya 75° 29' 30.828" 30° 20' 23.835" 104.0 27.0

10 Charnna 75° 30' 57.796" 30° 16' 38.5" 122.0 21.0

11 Bhani Jassa 75° 30' 55.114" 30° 15' 53.148" 103.0 15.0

12 Dhanaula 75° 34' 31.008" 30° 17' 0.32" 120.0 21.0

13 Badra 75° 30' 14.2" 30° 13' 21.123" 115.0 19.0

14 Rura Kalan 75° 26' 29.036" 30° 15' 26.989" 118.0 22.0

15 Barnala 75° 32' 34.553" 30° 21' 41.855" 122.0 24.0

16 Khuddi Khurd 75° 27' 19.428" 30° 19' 30.269" 118.0 21.0

17 Gurudwara 75° 25' 50.047" 30° 13' 45.113" 124.0 25.0

18 Gurusar Jamendpindi

75° 34' 39.819" 30° 14' 46.13" 109.0 19.0

19 Manapati 75° 33' 25.075" 30° 18' 32.412" 118.0 22.0

20 Mill site 75° 30' 11.639" 30° 17' 40.967" 102.0 21.0

21 Mauran 75° 25' 41.792" 30° 21' 35.31" 115.0 19.0


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-63

Figure 4.44 Ground Water Level Zone of the Study Area (10 Km radius)

4.10.3.4 Lithology

The Bore well lithology pertaining to Barnala has been collected from the CGWB

Bore well and it is presented in Table 4.23 and Figure.4.45 The lithology of the

borehole shows that up to 15.5 m the bore well composed Clay mixed sand (The


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-64

clay is dominant) The horizontal and vertical permeability of the formation up to

15.5 m is very less.

Table 4.22 The Bore well lithology

Depth Range (mbgl)

Thickness (m)

Lithology

0-15.5 15.5 Clay mixed Sand

15.5-57 41.5 Medium Sand

57-61 4 Clayey Sand

61-67 6 Fine Sand

67-73 6 Clay

73-91.5 18.5 Medium Sand

91.8-98 6.2 Clay

98-105.5 7.5 Coarse Sand

105.5-113 7.5 Clay mixed Sand

113-145 32 Medium Sand

145-164 19 Clay

164-169 5 Medium Sand

169-185 16 Clay

185-218 33 Coarse Sand

218-225 7 Clay

225-231 6 Coarse Sand

231-261 30 Clay

Figure 4.45 Barnala Borehole Lithology


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-65

The soil results of the mill site reveals that the porosity of the soil is 46.82% and

the Texture is Sandy clay. The porosity indicates that the infiltration rate of the

soil is moderate.

4.10.3.5 Movement of Groundwater in the Study area

The movement of ground water is controlled by the hydraulic conductivity of the

aquifer and hydraulic gradient. In study area the hydraulic conductivity is mainly

based on the Primary porosity. The homogeneity of the sedimentary formation

plays a vital role in the movement of the ground water. In the study area the

formations are nearly homogenous in nature. Below in the alluvial plan and in

sand dune complex the formations are homogenous within the mill site and in 10

km radius. The hydraulic conductivity of the aquifer is mainly due to the

coarseness of the sedimentary formations. Based on the water level data (Pre

and Post monsoon) the ground water table has been constructed for the Pre and

Post monsoon periods.

The ground water table contour depicts that the flow is in the south west both the

seasons. The hydraulic gradient in the mill site is moderate and has been

observed as 4.8 m/Km in pre monsoon and 3.9 m/Km in post monsoon. It is also

noticed ground water trough and mound in isolated pockets of the study area

which indicates the convergent and divergent flow of ground water. The ground

water table constructed for the study area is presented in Figure 4.46 and Figure

4.47


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-66

Figure 4.46 Ground Water Table- Pre Monsoon


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-67

Figure 4.47 Ground Water Table- Post Monsoon


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-68

4.10.3.6 Evaluation of Aquifer Parameters

Pumping test is the most accurate reliable and commonly used method to

evaluate the hydraulic parameters of an aquifer, efficiency of a well / tube well,

safer operational rates of pumping and selection of suitable pump. The methods

of a pumping test are highly varying in its application. The main objective of

pumping test is to determine the aquifer parameters such as Transmissivity (T),

Storage co-efficient (S) Hydraulic Conductivity (K), well performance and safe

yield for execution of water supply.

In order to evaluate the aquifer characteristics, constant discharge test has been

conducted in the borehole located in the project area. The draw down and

recovery has been measured for a period of 180 minutes and 120 minutes

respectively.

Pumping test Methodology

Ü The constant discharge test has been carried out with the help of tripod and

accessories like 30 HP submersible pump, orifice, Manometer, pipes valve

and electronic water level indicator etc.,

Ü During the pumping test, discharge has been measured by orifice as well as

volumetric methods and ground water level has been measured using

electronic indicator.

Ü Draw down and recovery have been measured both from the pumping and

observation wells.

The most important part of the pumping test is measuring the depth of water

level at different stages. This could be achieved using the electronic water level

indicator. During the initial stage of pumping the frequency of water level

measurement should be at closer time intervals and in the later part of the

pumping the frequency may be at larger intervals. The following Table 4.16 gives

the time duration adopted for measuring the water level

Table 4.23 Pumping Test

Constant Discharge Test Recovery Test

Time since Pumping started in minutes

Time intervals in minutes

Time since Pumping stopped in minutes

Time interval in minutes

0-10 1 0-10 1

10-20 2 10-60 5

20-60 5 60-120 10

60-180 10

Measurement of Discharge:

Variations in discharge rate results errors in draw down that are difficult to

analyze the pumping test data. To avoid the above, the discharge rate should be

kept constant throughout the pumping period. The error of draw down


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-69

measurement should not more than 5 percent. Orifice and volumetric methods

have been adopted to measure the discharge.

Ü Orifice Method:

The circular orifice weir is commonly used to measure the discharge from high

capacity pumps. The orifice is a perfectly round hole in the center of a circular

steel plate that is fastened to the outer end of discharge pipe. A manometer is

fitted into the discharge pipe. The water level in manometer represents the

pressure in the pipe when the water flows through the orifice. The control valve

fitted with discharge pipe controls the water level in manometer.

Ü Volumetric Method:

A very simple and accurate method is to measure the time required to fill a

container of known capacity. Example. Oil Drum. During the test, three per hour

discharge has been measured by volumetric method.

Ü Recovery Test:

Recovery test involves measuring the water level rise after pumping is stopped.

Recovery rest is used to calculate the transmissivity value of the aquifer as well

as to check the results of the draw down data. The duration of recovery test

conducted is 120 minutes.

Results of the Pumping test

The result of the pumping test is given in Table 4.25

Table 4.24 Result of Pumping Test

Depth of Tube well in m 110

Static Water level in m 21

Pump capacity 30 HP

Discharge in lpm 3500 lpm

Time in min. 180 minutes

Drawdown in m 2.1 m

Rate of recovery In 120 minutes 90 % recovery of static water level was attained

Based on the Transmissivity from Draw down data calculation the “T” Value is

2406 m2/day. The “T” value derived from the recovery data has been used for all

other calculations. The average “T” Value is 2607 m2/day

From the pumping test results it is clear that the transmissivity of the deeper

sandy aquifer is very good and the yield of the aquifer around 1 km radius of the

mill site is good.

The pumping test results reveal that the drawdown is only 2.1 m at the pumping

rate of 3500 lpm. As the aquifer potential is high, the drawdown is very less. It is

also observed that the average T Value is 2607 m2/day which indicates the

aquifer is a very potential aquifer. From the above values the radius of influence


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-70

of the wells located in the mill site has been estimated. The estimated radius of

influence is 360 m. The radius of influence confines within the existing mill site

itself and there would not be any adverse impact in the surrounding irrigation or

drinking water wells located outside the mill site.

Estimated Yield from Borewells- There are 7 tube wells within the premises of

the existing mill area. The google image showing the location and photographs of

the tube well located within the existing mill and the arrangement made for the

storage of the water is given in Figure 4.48 and 4.49. The locations and its

latitude and longitude values and yield from each tube well are given in Table

4.21

Figure 4.4.8 Google Image Showing the Location of Tube Well in the Existing Mill

Figure 4.49 Tube well Photos in the Existing Mill

Tube well 1 Tube well 2


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-71



Tube well 7 Tube well water storage arrangement

Ground water inflow in to the sump


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-72

Table 4.25 Estimated Yield from Borewells

S.No Latitude Longitude

Yield in Liters / Minutes (LPM)

Hours of Pumping

Total yield from the

existing tube well CUM/Day

1 30°17'35.50"N 75°29'45.80"E 3700 9 Hours 1998

2 30°17'35.00"N 75°29'50.80"E 3700 9 Hours 1998

3 30°17'34.40"N 75°29'54.50"E 3700 10 Hours 2220

4 30°17'28.20"N 75°29'57.50"E 3700 10 Hours 2220

5 30°17'23.20"N 75°29'59.20"E 3700 9 Hours 1998

6 30°18'6.93"N 75°29'22.17"E 3700 9 Hours 1998

7 30°17'39.60"N 75°29'46.80"E 3700 9 Hours 1998

Total 14,430

Hence the consented groundwater quantity of 14040 m3/day from the CGWD will

be safe to drawl for the project.

4.10.4 Ground Water Quality

Selected water quality parameters of ground water resources within the study

area have been considered for assessing the water environment. To assess the

water quality of the study area, six (6) ground water sampling locations were

selected. These samples were collected as grab samples and were analysed for

various parameters. Forty three (43) water quality parameters are analysed. The

water sampling locations are listed below in Table 4.27 and the locations are

marked in 10 km map which is given below in Figure 4.50

Table 4Error! No text of specified style in document..26 Details of Water Sampling Locations

Location Location

Code Distance (Aerial distance in Km

Direction*

Existing Mill GW1 - -

Dhaula GW2 2.0 SW

Hadiaya GW3 2.8 NE Rura Kalan GW4 5.4 NW

Mehta GW5 6.3 W

Channa GW6 2.0 SE

Khuddi Khurd GW7 3.3 NW

Dhanaula GW8 6.8 E

*with respect to the proposed Mill site


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-73

Figure 4.50 Water sampling locations

Observation The analysis results of ground water samples indicate that the

average pH ranges in between 7.2 and 7.9, TDS ranges from 706 mg/l to 1790

mg/l which is higher than the desirable drinking water standards, TDS in the tube

mill sample at existing mill is 1790 mg/l. total hardness is in the range of 204 mg/l

to 628 mg/l which is also higher than the desirable drinking water standard. The

heavy metal concentration is Below Detectable Limit in all sampled locations and

well within the standards for drinking water as per IS: 10500 –1991 “Specification

for drinking Water” for ground water. Fluorides concentrations are in the ranges

of 0.66 mg/l to 3.69 mg/l apart from Handiya other sampled locations are found

within the drinking water standards The ground water analysis results are

compared with the standards for drinking water as per IS: 10500 –1991

“Specification for drinking Water” for ground water. The analysis report is

enclosed as Annexure 24 (b)

All the sampled locations are found to be slightly salty in nature with presence of

prominent sodium ions, chlorides ions and Bicarbonate ions Figure 4.51 and

Ionic Variation in surface and Ground water is given in Table 4.16, represents

the groundwater quality at different sampling locations in a piper diagram. The


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-74

groundwater at the proposed mill area has high TDS and hardness

concentration, and treatment will be needed for drinking and for domestic use.

Figure 4.51 Piper- Duro diagram

GW1-Existing Mill GW2-Village Dhaula

GW3-Village Handiya

GW4-Village Rura Kalan

GW5-Village Mehta GW6-Village Channa

Village Khuddi khurd

Village Dhanaula


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-75

Surface water near Plant Site

Table 4.27 Ionic Variation in Surface and Ground water

Sampling Location

Unit Na

++

K+

Ca2+

Mg2+

Cl¯ +F SO42- HCO3¯ +CO Water Type

Existing Mill

meq/L Percentage

10.61 45.8%

7.98 34.5%

4.56 19.7%

10.99 0.47%

4.58 0.19%

8.77 0.37%

Sodium Chloride Type Water

Dhaula meq/L Percentage

8.94 66.6%

2.56 19.1%

1.92 14.3%

2.50 0.19%

3.02 0.22%

8.94 0.66%

Sodium Bicarbonate Type Water

Handiya meq/L Percentage

18.30 69.3%

4.84 18.3%

3.28 12.4%

6.40 0.24%

6.66 0.25%

8.94 0.338%


Rudra Kalan

meq/L Percentage

8.58 71.9%

2.40 20.1%

0.96 8.0%

0.97 0.08%

2.3 0.19%

9.59 0.80%


Mehta meq/L Percentage

7.40 46.3%

4.84 30.2%

3.76 23.5%

4.56 0.28%

3.2 0.20%

8.77 0.54%


Channa meq/L Percentage

8.54 66.0%

2.40 18.6%

2.00 15.5%

1.62 0.13%

2.57 0.19%

7.85 0.60%


Khuddi Khurd

meq/L Percentage

9.88 60.1%

2.80 17.0%

3.76 22.9%

2.90 0.18%

5.35 0.32%

7.31 0.44%


Dhanaula meq/L Percentage

6.02 59.6%

2.48 24.6%

1.60 15.8%

2.91 0.29%

1.74 0.17%

4.97 0.49%


Surface Water

meq/L Percentage

0.39 13.0%

1.6 52.8%

1.04 34.3%

0.18 0.06%

0.69 0.22%

1.64 0.54%



DEMO




Prepared by & C4-76

4.10.5 Ground Water Quality of the Study area- (Published Data)

According to the CGWB, The shallow ground water of the district is alkaline in

nature (pH 7.68 to 9.04) and is moderate to highly saline (EC 894-6990µS/cm. at

2°C). Among anions, either bicarbonate is the dominant anion or none of the

anion dominates, whereas among cations, sodium is generally the dominant

cation. Comparing the concentration values of major ions with the desirable and

permissible concentration limits for drinking water, as recommended by Bureau

of Indian standards, more than half (56 %) of the ground waters are not suitable

for drinking purposes either due to salinity or fluoride or nitrate concentration

beyond the permissible limit of safe drinking waters.

Ground water quality of the Barnala district is studied by Venu and Madhuri S

Rishi on “Suitability Evaluation of Groundwater for Drinking Purpose: A Case

Study of Barnala, Punjab, India” and the studies inferred that, pH value ranges

from 7.37 to8.92 in pre-monsoon and in post-monsoon it ranges to 7.06 to

8.71.36% of samples in pre-monsoon and 6% samples in post-monsoon were

above the permissible limit of drinking water standard In the study area the EC

was found varying from 726 µS/cm-3532 µS/cm in pre-monsoon and 706

µS/cm-2875 µS/cm in post-monsoon. 88.6% samples in pre-monsoon and 46%

in post-monsoon were having value above the permissible limit. During the pre-

monsoon was 54% of the samples were having value of fluoride above than 1.5

mg/L and 27% samples in post- monsoon. As per analysis the groundwater is

alkaline in nature in both pre- and post-monsoon. However, it was more alkaline

in pre-monsoon than in post-monsoon because of water recharging due to rains.

The higher average value of EC in the pre-monsoon suggests the enrichment of

salt due to evaporation effect in the pre-monsoon followed by subsequent

dilution through rainwater. Bicarbonate is higher in the pre-monsoon period.

Bedrock containing fluoride minerals is generally responsible for high

concentration of fluoride in groundwater (Handa, 1975 and Wenzel and Blum,

1992). Sodium was also found in higher concentration in both the seasons.

4.11 Ecological Environment

Natural flora and fauna are important features of the environment. They are

organized into natural communities with mutual dependencies among their

members and show various responses and sensitivities to physical abiotic

influences. Integrating ecological thinking into the planning process is essential

in the context of natural environment’s dramatic deterioration which has a direct

consequence on socioeconomic development.

4.11.1 Objectives of Ecological Monitoring

a) To evaluate the prevailing ecological status of the habitats adjacent to the

Existing Mill.

b) To assess the impact of proposed development on ecology, flora and fauna.

c) To recommend suitable environment management plan to minimize any

adverse impact on adjacent ecology due to the proposed developments.


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-77

4.11.2 Methodology

4.11.2.1 Study Area

The region within 10 km radius from mill site was designated as study area for

ecological survey. As confirmed by toposheet and satellite imagery, entire study

area is comprised of plane grounds and agricultural fields. No hills, swamps,

geographical or habitat zones were observed in study area. Hence, the study

area was divided into two zones viz. Zone I – Mill site to 5 km and Zone II – 5 km

to 10 km. 10 locations were randomly selected within study area. Table 4.29

gives coordinates of survey locations and the map Showing Ecology Survey

Locations is given in Figure 4.52

Table 4.28 Coordinates of Survey Locations in Study Area

Station Latitude Longitude Nearest Village

1 30° 17' 38.9" N 75° 29' 08.5" E Plant Site – Greenbelt

2 30° 16' 58.0" N 75° 27' 56.8" E Dhaula

3 30° 14' 37.4" N 75° 26' 22.4" E Rura Kalan

4 30° 15' 26.5" N 75° 29' 03.5" E Kahnoke

5 30° 13' 12.3" N 75° 30' 16.0" E Badra

6 30° 14' 39.0" N 75° 33' 24.8" E Kaleke

7 30° 18' 40.9" N 75° 33' 59.0" E Dhanaula

8 30° 20' 19.1" N 75° 30' 55.9" E Handiya

9 30° 19' 11.6" N 75° 24' 18.6" E Ghunas

10 30° 21' 54.2" N 75° 29' 30.2" E Khudi Kalan


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-78

Figure 4.52 Map Showing Ecology Survey Locations

4.11.3 Ecology Assessment

At each site, a study of floral diversity was carried out in the following manner:

A quadrat of approximately 20 m x 20 m was marked. The species of trees,

shrubs and large climbers, as well as the number of individuals of each species,

falling within this area were noted. Faunal diversity was studied through direct

evidence, in the form of visual sightings, and indirect evidence such as calls,

nests, burrows, droppings, scats, tracks etc. All available types of habitats at the

site were evaluated and marked. These areas were visited at specific times

when most bird activity is expected i.e. early morning – noon and late afternoon

– late evening (for crepuscular birds). The activities of birds and animals were

observed during this time and an exhaustive list of the birds seen was prepared.

The birds were identified and confirmed with their unique calls wherever they

were not observed directly. The survey was conducted with Olympus 10x50

Binoculars and Digital cameras (Nikon 3100D) and photographs were clicked

wherever possible and are presented in the report.


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-79

4.11.3.1 Statistical Analysis

The biodiversity of the survey area was then evaluated in terms of:

Ü species richness of the woody flora, and the avifauna,

Ü percentage frequency, abundance and density of each floral species,

Ü Vegetation structures were assessed by estimating Shannon, Simpson and

Margalef indices.

4.11.4 Observations

4.11.4.1 Forest Types in Study Area

According to the revised survey of forest types in India, the vegetation of this

region falls under “Tropical Dry Deciduous” with sub-type: Northern Dry Mixed

Deciduous type. However, no forest division is present in study area. Forest

cover details in neighboring districts are given in Table 4.30 Forest survey map

(Figure 4.53) Shows that no reserve forest, sanctuaries or national parks are in

the District.

Table 4.29 Forest Cover (in sq. km.) of Sangrur, Bhatinda and Moga Districts

District Barnala and

Sangrur#

Bathinda

Total Area (sq. km.) 5108 3353

Very Dense Forest (sq. km.) 0 0

Mod. Dense Forest (sq. km.) 6 13

Open Forest (sq. km.) 26 33

Total (sq. km.) 32 46

% Forest Cover in District 0.63 1.37

Source: India State of Forest Report, ISFR 2011


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-80

Figure 4.53 - Forest Cover Map of Punjab

Source: Department of Forest and Wildlife Preservation, Punjab


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-81

4.11.5 Ecological Settings of Study Area

4.11.5.1 Agricultural Area

Agricultural area is largest land use in study area. Hectares of fertile land are

under cultivation and agriculture is mainly divided into two season viz. kharif and

rabi (Table 4.31). The main Kharif crops are Cotton (Gossypium arboreum) and

Rice (Oryza sativa). Horticulture crops like Ber (Zizhiphus mauritiana), Amrud

(Psidium guajava), Peach (Prunus spp.), Grapes (Vitis vinifera) and Chilly

(Capsicum spp.) are common during kharif season. The Main Rabi crops are

wheat (Triticum aestivum) and mustard (Brassica junctea) and oil seeds. Minor

Rabi crops like Potato (Solanum tuberosum) and other winter vegetables were

observed to be planted on banks of paddy fields.

Other weeds like Achyranthes aspera, Calotropis gigantea, Leucas aspera,

Hygrophila verticillata and Sphaeranthus Indicus were commonly observed near

fields.

Table 4.30 Total Kharif and Rabi production of Barnala District

Production and Productivity

Kharif Rabi

Production ('000 t)

Productivity (kg/ha)

Production ('000 t)

Productivity (kg/ha) Major crops

Cotton 9.1 831 - -

Rice 485 4757 - -

Wheat - - 554 4859

Mustard - - 2 1547

Horticulture Crops

Ber 3.3 17150 - -

Guava 1.9 22834 - -

Peach 0.4 17334 - -

Grapes 0.5 28374 - -

Chillies 14.8 16800 - -

Potato - - 62.3 32500

Cauliflower - - 1.5 23600

Peas - - 3.6 5900

Source: www.agripb.gov.in

In Barnala district major area is under agriculture crops i.e. 92%. Horticulture,

fodder, forest occupy 1%, 6.19% and 0.9% respectively. The prominent cropping

system is paddy- wheat followed by cotton-wheat. Wheat, paddy and cotton are

major crops which occupy 90%, 80% and 10% of net sown area. Whereas

Mung, Barley and oilseeds are the minor crops. The cropping intensity is 200%

in entire district. Among the agriculture crops, during kharif season Paddy is the

major crop which occupy 102000 ha. area in this district. The next crop is cotton

with an area of 12000 ha.. In rabi wheat is the major crop which occupies

114000 ha which is 3.2% area of the state under wheat.


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-82

Horticulture and vegetable crops occupies 1% of area. Ber and Guava are the

fruits grown in the district. Area under Ber is 46 ha. and Guava is 73 ha.

Vegetables are grown on 1023 ha. area. Out of vegetable area winter

vegetables occupy 972 ha. and summer vegetables 41 ha. among winter

vegetables Potato occupy 90% area. Dairy is second most preferred enterprise

next to agriculture which contributes to additional income of farmers. The

average milk yield of Murrah Buffalo is 1830 liters per lactation and that of

crossbred cows was 2945 liters per lactation and local cows gave 915 liters per

lactation.

Cotton Fields In Study Area Survey Being Conducted Near Fields

Vegetable Fields In Study Area Agricultural Market

4.11.5.2 Human Settlements

Several human settlements were observed in the area. A major city Barnala is

present in Zone II of study region. Villages like Dhanaula, Dhurkot, Pakhho,

Ghunas, Handiya and Rura Kelan are prominent settlements. Around village-

roads, Pipal (Ficus religiosa), Bargad (Ficus benghalensis), Neem (Azadirachta

indica), Babul (Acacia niotica), Dhak (Butea monosperma), Jamun (Syzygium

cumini), Nilgiri (Eucalyptus globulus) and Amaltash (Cassia fistula) were

commonly observed. The vegetation along the roads is given in Figure 4.54


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-83

Figure 4.54 Vegetation Along Village Roads

4.11.5.3 Green Cover Area

Nearly 165 acres of thick greenbelt have been developed by Trident Industries

with 1,43,000 plants. The flora of greenbelt exhibited wide variety of native as

well as exotic species. Flora was dominated by Casuarina equisetifolia,

Terminalia arjuna, Lagerstomia parviflora, Azadiracta indica, Bignonia spp,

Delonix regia and Alstonia scholaris. Maximum diversity of flora was observed

inside plant due to extensive greenbelt development. Diversity indices of plant

site are discussed in detail in following section.

Avifauna observed in greenbelt included scrub as well as arboreal species. Koel,

Greater Coucal, Drongo and Doves were dominant bird species observed in

greenbelt region.

The Green cover Development inside Plant is given in Figure 4.55


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-84

Figure 4.55 Green Cover Development Inside Mill Area

4.11.5.4 Water Bodies

Each village in surrounding area showed presence of lakes or canals. Canal

water is predominantly being used for agriculture purpose while lake water is

being used for domestic purpose. However, most of the lakes showed high

amount of eutrophication. This could be attributed agricultural runoff from nearby

fields. The vegetation around lakes was observed to be stunted. Tall and dense

trees were rarely observed.


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-85

Lakes in Surrounding Villages

Canals Constructed for Irrigation

4.11.6 General Characteristics of Flora

Natural flora in the region was observed to be sparse and highly disturbed.

Various species of trees and shrubs were found growing indigenously. On

account of the pressure of population and extensive cultivation, no land has been

left as natural forests. Wherever the natural vegetation was observed, it was in

the form of individual trees or bunch of shrubs growing as weeds. Several

ornamental trees are found near villages and along the roads. Commonly

observed tree species include Azadirachta indica (Nim), Acacia niotica (Babul),

Butea monosperma (Dhak), Cassia fistula (Amaltash), Ficus religiosa (Pipal),

Bauhinia variegata (Kachnar), Ficus benghalensis (Bargad) and Eucalyptus

globulus (Nilgiri)

Among the fruit trees, the important ones were Ziziphus mauritiana (Ber),

Syzgium cumini (jamun) and Psidium guajava (Amrud). Dischanthum annuatum,

a fodder grass was growing on normal soils while Cenchrus celaris another

fodder species grows on sandy soil patches. Other grasses found in the study

area are Diplachne fusca, Heteropogon controutus, Sporobolous maraginatus,

Aristida hixtrix, Dactylon centicem, etc.

Weeds like Calotropis gigantea, Ricinus communis, Alternanthera sessilis and

Achyranthes aspera were commonly observed on the banks of fields. No distinct

variation was observed in the floral characteristics of Zone I and Zone II. Entire

vegetation was equally distributed and this could be attributed to absence of


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-86

variation in geographical features and habitats. The density, abundance and

frequency of flora are presented in Table 4.32

Table 4.31 Density, Abundance and Frequency of Plant Species in Study Area

Species Family Density Abundance % FO

Zone I Zone II Zone I Zone II Zone I Zone II

Acacia niotica Mimosea 10 35 2 1.75 20 80

Achyranthes aspera Amaranthaceae 580 670 23.2 26.8 100 100

Alstonia scholaris Apocynaceae 90 0 18 0 20 0

Azadirachta indica Meliaceae 360 340 14.4 13.6 100 100

Bauhinia variegata Fabaceae 70 0 14 0 20 0

Bignonia spp Bignoniaceae 90 0 18 0 20 0

Butea monosperma Fabaceae 65 40 4.3 2 60 80

Calotropis gigantea Asclepidiaceae 185 215 7.4 8.6 100 100

Cassia fistula Ceasalpinae 110 5 11 1 40 20

Casuarina equisetifoli

Casuarinaceae 100 0 20 0 20 0

Delonix regia Ceasalpinae 200 30 13.3 2 60 60

Eucalyptus globulus Myrtaceae 435 0 17.4 0 100 0

Ficus religiosa Moraceae 130 25 5.2 2.5 100 40

Ficus benghalensis Moraceae 45 45 3 3 60 60

Hygrophila auricullata

Acanthaceae 655 620 32.75 24.8 80 100

Lagerstomia parviflora

Lythraceae 70 0 14 0 20 0

Leucas aspera Lamiaceae 270 450 27 30 40 60

Mangifera indica Anacardiaceae 25 40 2.5 2 40 80

Moringa oleifera Moringaceae 0 70 0 14 0 20

Psidium guajava Myrtaceae 285 205 11.4 8.2 100 100

Ricinus cummunis Euphorbaiceae 55 65 11 6.5 20 40

Syzygium cumini Myrtaceae 35 15 3.5 1 40 60

Terminalia arjuna Combretaceae 80 0 16 0 20 0

Ziziphus mauritiana Rhamnaceae 235 255 9.4 10.2 100 100

4.11.7 General Characteristics of Fauna

The capacity to measure the status and any changes therein of animal

resources is an elementary requirement for the meaningful assessment. Present

assessment surrounding mill site incorporates approaches of measuring

population densities and collecting information regarding animal species from

respective resources. The biological environment within the identified zone of 10

Km radius has been studied with respect to terrestrial and aquatic habitats.

Since animals, unlike plants, are capable of movement from one place to

another, this makes their study entirely different. Specific methods were adopted

for counting them in the field. The on-site observations were further

supplemented by the information collected from respective Govt. offices and


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-87

other agencies. Among vertebrates, the major population comprised of

mammals, birds and reptiles.

4.11.7.1 Avifauna

Avifauna of study area was dominated by birds occurring in scrub, since dense

canopy vegetation was totally absent except in greenbelt. Most common birds

observed at various places were cattle egret, house sparrow, common myna,

streaked weaver bird and bank myna. These birds were found in close

association with man and cattle. It has been observed that the majority of birds

recorded in study area are omnivorous in habit preferring insects, worms etc. as

the principal food item.

Various species of egrets and herons were commonly observed near lakes and

canals. While arboreal birds like Greater Coucal, Koel, Doves and Parakeets

were observed only in greenbelt.

Table 4.32 Avifauna observed in the study area

S. No. Common Name Scientific Name Habit IUCN Redlist Status

1 Great Egret Casmerodius albus R Least Concerned

2 Intermediate Egret Mesophoyx intermedia R Least Concerned

3 Little Egret Egretta garzetta R Least Concerned

4 Cattle Egret Bubulcus ibis R Least Concerned

5 Grey Heron Ardea goliath R Least Concerned

6 Little Heron Butorides striatus R Least Concerned

7 Indian Pond Heron Ardeola grayii R Least Concerned

8 Black Kite Milvus migrans R Least Concerned

9 Black Eared Kite Milvus migrans lineatus M Least Concerned

10 White Breasted Water Hen Amaurornis phoenicurus R Least Concerned

11 Red Wattled Lapwing Vanellus indicus R Least Concerned

12 Black Tailed Godwit Limosa limosa M Least Concerned

13 Euarasian Collared Dove Streptopelia decaocto R Least Concerned

14 Laughing Dove Streptopelia senegalensis R Not Assessed

15 Spotted Dove Streptopelia chinensis R Not Assessed

16 Rock Pigeon Columba livia R Least Concerned

17 Indian Rosering Parakit Psittakula krameri R Least Concerned

18 Eurasian Cuckoo Cuculus canorus M Least Concerned

19 Greater Coucal Centropus sinensis R Least Concerned

20 Asian Koel Chrysococcyx maculatus R Least Concerned

21 Indian Roller Coracias benghalensis R Least Concerned

22 House swift Apun affinis R Least Concerned

23 White Throated Kingfisher Halcyon pileata R Least Concerned

24 Blue Tailed Bee-eater Meropus philippinus M Not Assessed

25 Green Bee-eater Meropus orientalis R Not Assessed

26 Common Hoopoe Upupa epops R Least Concerned

27 Ashy Crown Sparrow Lark Erimopterix grisea R Least Concerned

28 Sand Lark Calandrella raytal R Least Concerned

29 Crested Lark calandrella crestata R Least Concerned

30 Black Drongo Dicrirus macrocercus R Not Assessed

31 Long Tailed Shrike Laniaus schach R Least Concerned


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-88

32 Bank Myna Acridotheres ginginianus R Least Concerned

33 Common Myna Acridotheres tristis R Least Concerned

34 House Crow Corvus splendens R Least Concerned

35 Red Vented Bulbul Pycnonotus cafer R Least Concerned

36 Red Whiskered Bulbul Pycnonotus jocosus R Least Concerned

37 Large Grey Babbler Terdoides malcolmi R Least Concerned

38 Jungle Babbler Terdoides striatus R Not Assessed

39 Clamorous Reed Wabler Acrocephalus stentoreus M Not Assessed

40 Booted Wabler Hippolais caligata M Not Assessed

41 Sykes's Wabler Hippolais rama M Least Concerned

42 Blyth's Reed Wabler Acrocephalus dumetorum M Least Concerned

43 Oriental Magpie Robin Copsychus saularis R Least Concerned

44 Grey Wagtail Motacilla cinerea M Least Concerned

45 White Wagtail Motacilla alba M Least Concerned

46 Scaly Breasted Munia Nonchura punchulata R Least Concerned

47 House Sparrow Passsel domesticus R Not Assessed

4.11.7.2 Mammals

This group is represented by 9 species, the majority being domestic animals.

Buffalo and Cows were dominating at various places due to the availability of

grazing land resulting in intensive dairy farming as the major occupation of the

people in the area. Other domestic animals like dogs, cats and goats were also

seen. However, no Schedule I species as specified in Wildlife Protection Act,

1972 or rare and endangered species was observed during present survey.

Other minor mammals like three striped squirrel, rodents and bandicoot were

also common in study area.

4.11.8 Diversity Indices

Following indices were used for estimation of ecological status of this area

1. Shannon’s index

2. Margalef’s index

3. Simpson’s index

The indices were applied to flora in study area.

4.11.8.1 Shannon’s Index

Typically the value of the index ranges from 1.5 (low species richness and

evenness) to 3.5 (high species evenness and richness), though values beyond

these limits may be encountered. Because the Shannon Index gives a measure

of both species numbers and the evenness of their abundance, the resulting

figure does not give an absolute description of a sites biodiversity. It is

particularly useful when comparing similar ecosystems or habitats, as it can

highlight one example being richer or more even than another. There is always

the need to inspect the data or use another index to unpack the true reasons for

the difference.


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-89

Where: where S is the total number of species and pi is the frequency of the ith

species.

The value Shannon’s index of flora in study area was observed in range of 1.98

to 2.46 indicating moderate diversity (Table 4.34).

4.11.8.2 Margalef’s Index

It is calculated from the total number of species presentand the abundance or

total number of individuals.

Margalef Index (D) = S – 1/ log e N

Where: S – total number of species, N – total number of individuals

The higher the index the greater is the diversity. The value of Margalef’s index

for woody flora was observed to be 2.66 – 3.46.

4.11.8.3 Simpson’s Index

Simpson's Index measures the probability that two individuals randomly

selected from a sample will belong to the same species (or some category other

than species).

Simpson's Index"そ = ¬ n(n-1)/N(N-1)

Where: n – total individuals of each species, N – total individuals of all species

With this index, 0 represents infinite diversity and 1, no diversity. That is, the

bigger the value of D, the lower the diversity. This is neither intuitive nor logical,

so to get over this problem, D is often subtracted from 1 to give:

Simpson's Index of Diversity 1 -"そ

The value of this index also ranges between 0 and 1, but now, the greater the

value, the greater the sample diversity. This makes more sense. In this case, the

index represents the probability that two individuals randomly selected from a

sample will belong to different species.

Simpson index values of woody flora was very close to 1 (0.86) indicating even

distribution of flora over entire study area.


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-90

Table 4.33 Diversity Indices of Flora in Study Area

Sample Margalef Index Shannon Index Simpson Index

Mill site 3.22 2.77 0.93

Zone I 2.52 2.28 0.87

Zone II 2.49 2.25 0.87

The statistical analysis showed that diversity of Zone I and Zone II was moderate

and no variation was observed. Margalef Index was highest at mill site which

could be attributed to greenbelt development. Shannon Index value at mill site is

more than 2.5 indicating rich diversity. While that of Zone I and Zone II was

below 2.5 indicating moderate diversity. However, Simpson index values are

close to 1, indicating floral vegetation is evenly distributed in entire study area.

4.11.9 Ecologically Sensitive Sites

Majority of study area is agricultural land and plantation area. No vegetation

area with high diversity and with rare or endangered faunal species was

observed. Similarly no breeding grounds and migration routes of birds or

animals were observed.

4.11.10 Socioeconomic Environment

4.11.10.1 Socioeconomic Profile of Barnala District

Punjab is a state gifted with rich culture, tradition, religion and acknowledged for

its self dependence, self reliance and glory. It is located in the North Western

region of India and is bounded on the West by Pakistan, on the North by Jammu

and Kashmir, on the North East by Himachal Pradesh and on the South by

Haryana and Rajasthan. Punjab is predominantly an agrarian state and more

than 60% of the population lives in rural area3.

The administrative structure of Punjab is divided into 22 districts. The proposed

mill site is located in the district of Barnala. Earlier Barnala District was part of

Sangrur district of Punjab state. Barnala City is the head quarters of the District

Barnala. The total geographical area of the District is 1410 sq.km.

Based on Census 2011 data, the District has a population of 5,95,527, of which

32% is urbanized.

The District has the highest rate of Sikh population. The average population

density of the District is about 402 inhabitants per square kilometer as against

the State population density of around 551. The average household size is 5.

The District has a sex ratio of 876 females for 1000 males. The children sex ratio

was found to be about 843. Vulnerable population such as SC and ST were

found to be about 32.24% and 0.0% respectively. The District has a literacy rate

of about 67.82% which is lesser than the state's average (75.84%). In terms of

3 PHD Chamber of Commerce and Industry


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-91

education facilities, the District has 182 primary schools, 27 middle schools, 54

High School and 32 senior secondary schools and 5 colleges4.

Agriculture is the main occupation of the people of Barnala district. Nearly about

83% district’s land is under cultivation and about 69% of the land is cultivated

more than once. About 58% population depends on agriculture. The main crops

of the district are wheat, rice and cotton. Apart from the main crops some of the

crops like maize and pulses are grown.

In addition to the District’s Agriculture importance the district is emerging as an

important Industrial Centre. Some of the products produced in the district were

small cutting tools, threads by spinning mills, chemicals, paper, towels,

combines, tractors, electric scooters, bulldozers, cranes and their components,

agricultural implements including harvester combines and thrashers, milk

products, pesticides. Some of the major industrial players in the districts are

Trident Group, Malwa Cotton, Geeta Threads, Standard Combines and Balkar

Combines.

With regard to amenities, Government health facilities such as 1 Government

General Hospital, 11 primary health centers, 3 Sub Health Centres, 3

Community Health Centres and 3 Rural Hospitals are available in the district.

4 District Education Office (SE) Barnala


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-92

Figure 4.56 Map showing the villages falling within study area

4.11.10.2 Socioeconomic Profile of Study Area

4.11.10.2.1 Demographic Profile

Cumulative population in the study area is 2,29,806 with 1,23,053 males and

1,06,753 females, which is about 38.58% of the District’s population. The

population of children below 6 years was found to be 25,968 which are of about

11.3% of the total population. District’s Population density is 1482 per square

kilometer as compared to State 551. The Sex Ratio was found at 868 females

per thousand males, with that of District’s and state’s ratio of 876 and 895

respectively. Comparing sex ratio of the study area with national sex ratio (943)

the rate is very poor. The Sex ratio of the children was about 885, which is less

than the District rate of 937. The main reason for decline in sex ratio in Punjab is

due to sex selection in birth. Out of top 10 districts with least sex ratio in the

country 7 districts are from the state of Punjab5. The Cumulative of Vulnerable

population such as Scheduled Caste was 67,430 and there is no existence of ST

population in the study area. Table 4.35 depicts the population distribution of the

study area.

5 Journal of Economic and Social Development, Vol. VII, No. 1, 2011, Gender Discrimination Sex Ratio Imbalance In Punjab


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-93

Table 4.34 Population Distribution

S.No Panchayat House-holds

Population Males Females Sex

Ratio Children

<6 SC ST

1 Fatehgarh Chhanna

2008 10819 5772 5047 874 1144 3568 0

2 Dhaula 438 2405 1231 1174 954 252 590 0

3 Bhaini Jassa 536 2905 1587 1318 830 310 744 0

4 Dhanaula Khurd 1028 5406 2939 2467 839 555 1382 0

5 Dhanaula 1042 5593 3049 2544 834 558 989 0

6 Handiaya (NP) 2702 12507 6810 5697 837 1670 4887 0

7 Kahneke 536 2655 1408 1247 886 241 442 0

8 Khudi Kalan 961 5142 2784 2358 847 502 1626 0

9 Khudi Khurd 256 1406 736 670 910 142 574 0

10 Aspal kalan 764 3911 2058 1853 900 467 1553 0

11 Attargarh 339 1755 945 810 857 186 693 0

12 Badra 513 2766 1481 1285 868 283 553 0

13 Barnala (M Cl) 24490 116449 62554 53895 862 13296 30597 0

14 Dangarh 486 2371 1265 1106 874 246 771 0

15 Dhanaula (M Cl) 3878 19920 10521 9399 893 2218 7011 0

16 Dhurkot 1018 5473 2855 2618 917 636 1655 0

17 Ghunas 550 2836 1537 1299 845 381 1133 0

18 Jodhpur 640 3409 1785 1624 910 366 1144 0

19 Kaleke 1277 6804 3615 3189 882 717 1942 0

20 Mehta 420 2304 1223 1081 884 278 925 0

21 Patti Sohlan 101 523 282 241 855 67 282 0

22 Pharwahi 955 5047 2700 2347 869 567 2229 0

23 Rajgarh 207 1174 626 548 875 131 357 0

24 Rura Kalan 1162 6154 3249 2905 894 741 1738 0

25 Tappa (R) 18 72 41 31 756 14 45 0

Total 46,325 2,29,806 1,23,053 1,06,753 868 25,968 67,430 0

Source: Census 2011.

4.11.10.2.2 Cultural Aspects

The people in the study area have a strong association with the nature. Majority

of the people are engaged in Agriculture activity and very much attached to their

land. Punjabi culture is one of the oldest and richest cultures dating back to

Vedic times. Punjabi's belong to three major religions Islam, Sikhism and

Hinduism. Punjabi Dishes are usually prepared with onions, garlic, ginger and

tandoori. Most punjabi food is eaten with either rice or roti. There are some

dishes that are exclusive to punjab such as ‘Mah Di Dal’ and ‘Saron Da Saag’.

Punjabi weddings are strongly based on traditions and conducted with a strong


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-94

reflection of the Punjabi culture. (Ref.6) The average age of marriage for girls

was reported to be 21.3 and boys enter into wedlock at the age of 24.2(Ref.7).

4.11.10.2.3 Economic Indicators

Under this component, following aspects are studied, a. Population under Below

Poverty Line (BPL), b. Tourism, c. Fisheries, d. Agriculture, e. Employment

Aspects.

Population Under Below Poverty Line- Below Poverty Line (BPL) is an

economic benchmark of any particular area. Higher the rate of BPL family, lower

is the prosperity of the area. Baseline survey report of Ministry of Drinking water

and Sanitation indicated that an average of 21.6% population in the study area

falls under BPL category. The study area is mixed up of both economically

strong and weak society with the rate of BPL families ranges less as 3.9%

(Handiaya) to higher rate of 51.2% (Jodhpur).

Table 4.35 BPL Households

S.No Panchayat Households Total BPL HH BPL %

1 Dhaula 1,204 202 16.7%

2 Fatehgarh Chhanna 298 44 14.7%

3 Bhaini Jassa 310 57 18.3%

4 Dhanaula Khurd 228 65 28.5%

5 Handiaya 253 10 3.9%

6 Kahne Ke 425 84 19.7%

7 Khudi Khurd 183 32 17.4%

8 Khudi Kalan 846 161 19.0%

9 Ghunas 501 170 33.9%

10 Jodhpur 500 256 51.2%

11 Mehta 343 79 23.0%

12 Aspal Kalan 477 79 16.5%

13 Attar Garh 309 92 29.7%

14 Badra 422 63 14.9%

15 Barnala- Rural 474 50 10.5%

16 Dangarh 313 106 33.8%

17 Dhanaula - Rural 232 31 13.3%

18 Dhurkot 341 164 48.0%

19 Kaleke 848 147 17.3%

20 Pharwahi 635 115 18.1%

21 Rajgarh 241 27 11.2%

Total/Average 9383 2034 21.6%

BPL-Below Poverty Line HH- Household

Source: Nirmal Bharat Abhiyan, Ministry of Drinking Water & Sanitation, 2011.

Agriculture- Punjab is one of the most fertile regions on earth. The region is

ideal for wheat-growing. Rice, sugar cane, fruits and vegetables are also grown.

Indian Punjab is called the "Granary of India" or "India's bread-basket". Majority

of the people in the study area are directly or indirectly engaged in agriculture

and allied activities. The major source of rainfall is through South West

Monsoon (June – September) amounting to 91% of the total rainfall. 88% of the

total land is used for cultivation and percentage of crop intensity is 200%. 100%

6 https:/ / files.nyu.edu/ssg289/public/understanding.html 7 District Level Household Survey – 3 by IIPS


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-95

of the total cultivated land is irrigated and Open wells/Bore wells and canals are

the major source of irrigation. In the study area cropping is done in two seasons

namely Kharif and Rabi. The major crops grown here are Wheat, Cotton, Rice

and Rapeseed mustard. Horticulture crops like Ber, Guava, Peach and Grapes

and vegetable crops like Potato, Chilli, Cauliflower, peas are grown in extensive

manner. Apart from these crops other fodder crops also grown in this area i.e.

Jowar, Bajra, Makh Chari, Berseem, Oats, Cowpea, Lucerne and Senji are

commonly grown in this area.

Figure 4.57 Showing the Agriculture Activities in the study area.

Wheat Fields at Bhaini Jassa Wheat Processing Kahnoke Village

Cotton Fields in the Kahnoke Village Dhanula Drain for Irrigation purpose

Employment and Livelihood- The total working population in the study area is

81,361 with the percentage of 35.4% as against the state’s level of 35.67%.

91.62% of the working population is main workers and this shows the improved

life style of the people as they are employed for more than 6 months in the year.

Only about 30% of the total working population is engaged in agricultural activity.

The agricultural workers group is sub-grouped into Cultivators and Agricultural

Labors. In which 61.71% were cultivators and 38.28% were Agricultural Labors.

Though the Punjab State is being agriculture state and the major source of

income to the state, the rate of people involved in agriculture activity is less

because of the land holding size of the farmers. In Punjab state the average land

holding size is 3.95 Hectares/ farmer which is a having a larger difference with

the national average of 1.23 Hectares/Farmer (Ref8). Household Industry

relates to production, processing, servicing, repairing or making and selling of

8 Agricultural Census, 2005 - 06


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-96

goods. Other workers are all workers who have been engaged in some

economic activity like employed in industries, fishing activity, wagers,

construction workers, etc., but are not cultivators or agricultural laborers or

Household Industry. The percentage of Household and Other workers group

were 2.8% and 67.26% respectively. The higher rate of other workers with

respect to study area shows the majority of the people are depended on the

nearby industries for their livelihood.

Table 4.36 Workers Group Distribution in the Study Area.

S. No

Villages Working Population Agricultural Household Other

Total MAIN MGN MCL MAL MGC MGA

MHH MGH MOT MGO

1 Fatehgarh Chhanna

4231 4118 113 1338 11 691 22 59 12 2030 68

2 Dhaula 736 711 25 394 5 129 4 10 1 178 15

3 Bhaini Jassa 983 958 25 454 1 290 3 8 3 206 18

4 Dhanaula Khurd

1943 1633 310 813 13 132 29 17 0 671 268

5 Dhanaula 2344 2299 45 1109 4 91 2 25 0 1074 39

6 Handiaya 4215 3981 234 247 3 607 111 48 6 3079 114

7 Kahneke 1007 984 23 553 7 156 2 26 0 249 14

8 Khudi Kalan 1664 1516 148 704 22 220 43 16 2 576 81

9 Khudi Khurd 442 429 13 274 0 17 1 3 0 135 12

10 Aspal kalan 1208 902 306 378 51 338 185 11 5 175 65

11 Attargarh 734 725 9 221 1 48 3 5 0 451 5

12 Badra 900 764 136 516 3 91 62 4 0 153 71

13 Barnala (M Cl) 40769 37806 2963 1858 84 1374 279 801 109 33773 2491

14 Dangarh 773 576 197 287 10 144 95 24 6 121 86

15 Dhanaula (M Cl)

6671 6184 487 1012 22 958 160 232 42 3982 263

16 Dhurkot 2248 1796 452 818 28 481 299 15 3 482 122

17 Ghunas 1024 1013 11 380 1 120 1 1 0 512 9

18 Jodhpur 1373 1069 304 445 15 182 39 25 3 417 247

19 Kaleke 2540 2319 221 973 37 495 76 145 6 706 102

20 Mehta 677 572 105 319 9 112 29 11 2 130 65

21 Patti Sohlan 192 105 87 33 5 14 7 23 10 35 65

22 Pharwahi 1565 1438 127 497 9 399 40 14 9 528 69

23 Rajgarh 382 373 9 177 1 118 5 25 2 53 1

24 Rura Kalan 2718 2250 468 862 15 490 122 390 120 508 211

25 Tappa (R) 22 22 0 11 0 6 0 0 0 5 0

Total- Total Working Population, MAIN – Main Workers, MGN - Marginal Workers, MCL - Main Cultivators,

MAL -Main Agricultural Labors, MGC- Marginal Cultivators, MGA - Marginal Agricultural Labors, MHH-

Main Household Industry, MGH - Marginal Household Industry, MOT – Main Other Industry, MGO- Marginal

Other Industry.

4.11.10.2.4 Health Indicators

Under this component the various health indicators, people’s attitude on using

the health facilities and available health facilities are included. Within the study


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-97

area major Government Health facilities are available at Barnala, Rureke Kalan,

Tappa and Dhanoula. In addition to Government Hospitals there are number of

private clinics at Barnala City. Villagers are having a practice of visiting

allopathic hospitals at the time of ailment. The nearest District Headquarters

Hospital is at Barnala.

The District health indicators based on DLHS-3 are as follows. Institutional Birth

Rate was about 64.8% with respect to state the rate was 63.1%. The childhood

immunization was to be only 67.4% which is less than that of state rate of

79.8%. Drinking water and Sanitation is the major concern in relating to public

health. The percentage of people having access to safe drinking water facility

(100%) is very good when compared to the state rate (99.5%). The Sanitation

facility in the place seems to be very good, about 82% of the population having

access to safe sanitation facilities.

Table 4.37 Major Health Facilities in the study Area

S.No Health Facilities Gov/Pvt Location

1 District Hospital Gov Barnala

2 Community Health Centre Gov Dhanoula

3 Community Health Centre Gov Tappa

4 Primary Health Centre Gov Dhanoula

5 Primary Health Centre Gov Rureke Kalan

6 Subsidiary Health Centre Gov Handiaya (D)

7 Subsidiary Health Centre Gov Dhaula

8 Subsidiary Health Centre Gov Fathegarh Channa

9 Subsidiary Health Centre Gov Dan Garh

10 Subsidiary Health Centre Gov Khudi Kalan

11 Subsidiary Health Centre Gov Ghunas

12 Subsidiary Health Centre Gov Kale Ke

13 Dilshad Hospital Pvt Dhanaula

14 Pabby Hospital Pvt Barnala

15 Astha Hospital Pvt Barnala

16 Noor Multi Speciality Hospital Pvt Barnala

17 Life Line Multi Specialtity Hospital

Pvt Barnala

18 ESIC Model Dispenciary Gov Barnala

Cancer Prevalence- The state of Punjab is experiencing a rising burden of

cancer. It is emerging as a major health concern of the state. The people in the

age group of 35-65 are often been a prey for the deadly disease. There are an

estimated 20,000-25,000 cancer cases in Punjab. The risk factors for these

cases are mostly unhealthy diet, physical inactivity, alcohol consumption &

tobacco use, excessive use of insecticides, pesticides fertilizers, heavy metals,

etc. According to the survey conducted by Department of Health in 2009 the

number of cancer cases in the Barnala district is 379 and Bhatinda District

having the highest number of 942 Cases. The cancer prevalence in the Barnala

district reported to be 93.4 which is more than the Punjab states rate of 90 per 1

lakh people. Number of Cancer cases in the district of Punjab during the survey

2009 by Punjab Health Department is given in Figure 4.58 and Figure 4.59

showing the health facilities located in the study area.


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-98

Figure 4.58 Cancer Cases in the Districts of Punjab.

Source: Department of Health, Punjab-2009

Figure 4.59 showing the health facilities in the study area.

District Hospital – Barnala City Private Hospital Barnala City

Private Clinic - Barnala Civil Hospital - Barnala City


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-99

Private Clinic at the Study Area Private Dispensary at Barnala City

Toilet Facility in study area- According to District Level Household Survey

(DLHS-3), only 82% of district’s population had access to toilet facilities. When

the same is compared with rural facilities the rate was 77.2%. Based on the

reports of Total Sanitation Campaign, the rate of people availing safe sanitation

within the study area was only 68.14%. Sanitation coverage for BPL families is

less when compared to APL families. 100% schools are having toilet facilities

and 49% of the Anganwadi centers having safe sanitation facilities9. The below

table 4.34 depicts the percentage of population availed safe sanitation facility in

the study area.

Table 4.38 Percentage availed Safe Sanitation Facilities in the Study Area

S.No Panchayat Name Toilet

Facilities (BPL)

Toilet Facilities

(APL)

Toilet Facilities

(APL+BPL)

School Toilet

Anganwadi Toilet

Sanitary Complex

1 Dhaula 41.1% 77.0% 71.0% 100% NA NA

2 Fatehgarh Chhanna 34.1% 61.4% 57.4% 100% 0% NA

3 Bhaini Jassa 36.8% 73.9% 67.1% 100% NA NA

4 Dhanaula Khurd 55.4% 65.6% 62.7% 100% NA NA

5 Handiaya 80.0% 83.1% 83.0% 100% 100% NA

6 Kahne Ke 75.0% 86.8% 84.5% 100% 25% NA

7 Khudi Khurd 65.6% 72.8% 71.6% 100% 50% NA

8 Khudi Kalan 53.4% 82.3% 76.8% - 100% NA

9 Ghunas 57.1% 76.7% 70.1% 100% 0% NA

10 Jodhpur 69.5% 82.0% 75.6% 100% 100% NA

11 Mehta 34.2% 76.1% 66.5% 100% 0% NA

12 Aspal Kalan 60.8% 65.1% 64.4% 100% 0% NA

13 Attar Garh 65.2% 56.7% 59.2% 100% 100% NA

14 Badra 57.1% 83.8% 79.9% 100% 50% NA

15 Barnala(R) 38.0% 72.4% 68.8% 100% 100% NA

16 Dangarh 42.5% 61.8% 55.3% 100% 100% NA

17 Dhanaula(R) 74.2% 77.6% 77.2% 100% NA NA

9 Nirmal Bharat Abhiyan (NBA), Total Sanitation Campaign, Ministry of Drinking Water and Sanitation.


DEMO




Prepared by & C4-100

S.No Panchayat Name Toilet

Facilities (BPL)

Toilet Facilities

(APL)

Toilet Facilities

(APL+BPL)

School Toilet

Anganwadi Toilet

Sanitary Complex

18 Dhurkot 34.8% 64.4% 50.1% 100% 0% NA

19 Kaleke 48.3% 76.6% 71.7% 100% NA NA

20 Pharwahi 24.3% 71.0% 62.5% 100% 0% NA

21 Rajgarh 59.3% 57.0% 57.3% 100% 0% NA

22 Rure Ke Kalan 51.0% 68.0% 66.4% 100% 100% NA

BPL- Population under Below Poverty Line, APL – Population Above Poverty Line, NA- Facility Not Available in the Village Source: Nirmal Bharat Abhiyan, Ministry of Drinking Water & Sanitation-http://tsc.gov.in

Drinking Water Facilities in the study area- The main sources of drinking

water in the study area were through Public distribution supply and Hand Pump.

Based on the reports of the National Rural Drinking water Programme, on the

average of 91% of the study area is fully covered under Safe drinking water

facilities network. The village wise drinking water facilities and percentage of

villages fully covered by facilities are shown in the below Table 4.40

Table 4.39 Coverage of Drinking water Facilities in the Study Area

S.No Panchayat

Name Habitation

% Fully Covered*

% Partially Covered*

No of PWS

HP Others

1 Dhaula 1 100% 0 2 0 0

2 Fatehgarh Chhanna

1 100% 0 1 0 0

3 Bhaini Jassa 1 100% 0 1 0 0

4 Dhanaula Khurd 2 50% 50% 1 0 0

5 Kahne Ke 1 100% 0 1 0 0

6 Khudi Khurd 1 100% 0% 1 1 0

7 Khudi Kalan 2 50% 50% 1 0 0

8 Ghunas 1 100% 0% 3 0 1

9 Jodhpur 1 100% 0% 1 0 0

10 Mehta 1 100% 0% 1 0 0

11 Aspal Kalan 1 100% 0% 1 0 0

12 Badra 1 100% 0% 1 0 0

13 Dangarh 1 100% 0% 1 0 0

14 Kaleke 2 50% 50% 1 0 0

15 Pharwahi 1 100% 0% 1 0 1

16 Rajgarh 1 100% 0% 2 0 0

17 Rure Ke Kalan 1 100% 0% 1 0 0

PWS- Public Water Supply, HP – Hand Pump, [* ]-Percentage of Habitation Covered by Drinking Water Supply.

Source: National Rural Drinking Water Programme, Ministry of Drinking Water and Sanitation,

http:/ /www.mdws.gov.in/ 4.11.10.2.5 Education Indicators

In the study area about 71.09% of the total populations are literates, which is

less than the national literacy rate of 74.04% and state’s literacy rate of 75.84%.

In the district 68.3% of the children (aged 7plus) are literate and 99% of the girl

children (aged 6 to 11) are going to school10. The below figure shows the higher

rate of literacy rate is observed in the urban areas and the rate of male literacy is

more when compared with the female literacy rate. The literacy pattern of rural

urban scenario is shown in the Figure 4.60

10 District Level Household Survey (DLHS -3) 2007-08


DEMO





Figure 4.60 Literacy Pattern in the study area


Table 4.40 Village-wise Literacy rate in the study Area

S.No Villages Population >6 Years

Literates Literacy

Rate Male

Literates

Male Literacy

Rate

Female Literates

Female Literacy

Rate

1 Fatehgarh Chhanna 9675 5922 61.2% 3309 63.9% 2613 58.0%

2 Dhaula 2153 1296 60.2% 691 62.6% 605 57.6%

3 Bhaini Jassa 2595 1533 59.08% 890 62.6% 643 54.7%

4 Dhanaula Khurd 4851 3347 69.0% 1924 73.% 1423 63.9%

6 Dhanaula 5035 3152 62.6% 1820 66.5% 1332 57.9%

7 Handiaya 10837 7181 66.2% 4209 71.2% 2972 60.2%

8 Kahneke 2414 1405 58.2% 784 61.3% 621 54.6%

9 Khudi Kalan 4640 3101 66.8% 1787 71.7% 1314 61.1%

10 Khudi Khurd 1264 842 66.6% 471 70.7% 371 62.0%

11 Aspal kalan 3444 1856 53.8% 1013 55.9% 843 51.5%

12 Attargarh 1569 862 54.9% 487 57.7% 375 51.6%

13 Badra 2483 1475 59.4% 835 63.2% 640 55.0%

14 Barnala (M Cl) 103153 80889 78.4% 45254 81.9% 35635 74.3%

15 Dangarh 2125 1423 66.9% 835 73.5% 588 59.3%

16 Dhanaula (M Cl) 17702 12477 70.4% 6986 74.6% 5491 65.7%

17 Dhurkot 4837 2803 57.9% 1511 60.1% 1292 55.5%

18 Ghunas 2455 1439 58.6% 828 62.3% 611 54.2%

19 Jodhpur 3043 2038 66.9% 1128 70.5% 910 63.0%

20 Kaleke 6087 3619 59.4% 1980 61.4% 1639 57.1%

21 Mehta 2026 1279 63.1% 728 67.5% 551 58.1%

22 Patti Sohlan 456 295 64.6% 167 66.8% 128 62.1%

23 Pharwahi 4480 2877 64.2% 1627 68.2% 1250 59.6%

24 Rajgarh 1043 682 65.3% 387 70.1% 295 60.0%

25 Rura Kalan 5413 3099 57.2% 1718 60.3% 1381 53.7%

26 Tappa ( R) 58 23 39.6% 17 50.0% 6 25.0%

Total /Average 2,03,838 1,44,915 71.09% 81,386 65.9% 63,529 57.4%



DEMO





Table 4.41 Major Education Facilities in the Study Area

S.No Education Facilities Gov/Pvt Location

1 Y S Public School Pvt Handiaya

2 S S International School Pvt Khudi

3 Akal Polytechnic College Pvt Rure Ke Kalan

4 GGS Group of Insitutes Pvt Barnala

5 Baba Gandha Singh Public School Pvt Barnala

6 Y S School Pvt Barnala

7 Sacred Heart Convent School Pvt Barnala

8 Jumla Malkin School Barnala Pvt Barnala

9 S D Senior Secondary School Pvt Barnala

10 LBS Arya Mahila College Pvt Barnala

11 Sabt Baba Longpuri Adarsh Senior

Secondary School Pvt Pakho Kalan

12 S.S.N Sen Sec School Pvt Tappa Mandi

13 Sri Sai Public School Pvt Tappa Mandi

14 Government Senior Secondary School Gov Tappa Mandi

15 Dasmesh Model School Pvt Dhillwan

16 Government Primary School Gov Dhillwan

17 GNS Public School Pvt Sukhpura Mour

18 Government Boys School Gov Barnala

19 Mother Teacher Preparatory School Pvt Barnala

20 Government School Gov Khudi

21 Government Primary School Gov Kahne Ke

Figure 4.61- Educational Facilities in the Study Area

Senior Secondary School at Rureke Kalan Government High School Dhurkot Village


DEMO





High School at Bhaini Jassa Primary School Kahnoke Village

Government High School Badra Village Governement Senior Secondary School, Kaleke

Primary School, Kaleke Senior Secondary School, Ladke

4.11.10.2.6 Historical Places and Cultural Aspects of the Facility

Within the study area there is no archeological important sites located and the

nearest ASI notified place is Bhatinda Fort at Bhatinda at the aerial distance of

55 Km from the mill site and the list of ASI notified sites in Punjab state along

with the distance from the projects site is given in the below Table:4.43.

Table 4.42 Historical Places in the study area

S.No Historical Place Location with Aerial

Distance Notified by ASI

1 Bhatinda Fort Bhatinda at 55 Km R

2 Ancient Site Sunet Sunet at 72 Km R

3 Ancient Mound Katpalon Katpalon at 85 Km R

4 Theh Gatti Mound Nagar at 86 Km R

5 Sarai including gateway Nurmahal at 88 Km R

6 Muhammed Momin's Tomb & Haji Jamal

Nakodar at 93 Km R


DEMO





S.No Historical Place Location with Aerial

Distance Notified by ASI

7 Sarai including gateway Dakhni at 98 Km R

8 Ancient Site & Buddhist Stupa Sanghol at 100 Km R

9 Ancient Site Ropar Ropar at 123 Km R

10 Gateway of the old Sarai Akbar or Jahangir on the Old

Fatehabad at 125 Km R

11 Mound Known as Mud Fort Abohar at 126 Km R

12 Gateway of the old Sarai Akbar Amanat Khan at 150 Km R

13 Ram Bagh Complex Amristar at 162 Km R

14 Baradari Anarkali Batala at 170 Km R

15 Shamsher Khan Tomb Batala at 170 Km R

16 Takht-I-Akbari Kalanaur at 193 Km R

Source: Archaeological Survey of India and Primary Survey.

4.11.10.2.7 Various Government Schemes Implemented by Punjab Government

Punjab Government along with Central government is successfully implementing

various schems relating to economic aspects and health promotion programs.

The following are the some of the program which can be effectively implemented

in the study area with the coordination with Government people.

‚ Old Age Pension scheme ‚ Financial Assistance Scheme

‚ Post Metric Scholarship Scheme

‚ Rajiv Gandhi National Fellowship

‚ Scholarships to Scheduled Caste students to pursue programmes in

Higher Education such as M.Phil, Ph.D

‚ Central Sector Scholarship of Top Class Education for SC students

‚ Scheme of National Scholarships for persons with disabilities

‚ Post Metric Scholarship Scheme for Minority students

‚ Babu Jagjivan Ram Chhatrawas Yojana

‚ Prime Minister's Rozgar Yojana

‚ Mukh Mantri Punjab Cancer Raahat Kosh Scheme

‚ National Vector Borne Disease Control Programme

‚ Revised National Tb Control Programme

‚ Immunization Programme

‚ Janani Suraksha Yojana

4.11.10.3 Summary Socioeconomic Indicators of the Study area compared to State

Indicators

Table 4.43 Summary Socioeconomic Indicators of the Study Area

S.No Particulars Study Area State

1 Study Area

22 Villages, 2 Urban Settlements, 1 Municipal Corporation

Punjab

2 Total Households 46,325 55,13,071

3 Total Population 2,29,806 27,743,338

4 Sex Ratio 868 895

5 Children Population (<6 Years Old) 25,968 3,076,219

6 Children Sex Ratio 885 846

7 Urban Rural Ratio 65:35 37:63


DEMO





S.No Particulars Study Area State

8 SC Population 67,430 88,60,179

9 ST Population 0 0

10 Age at Marriage – Male 21.3 Yrs.

11 Age at Marriage – Female 24.2 Yrs.

12 BPL Population 21.6% (Ranges 3.9%-51.2%)

15%

13 Total Working Population 81,361 9897362

14 Main Workers 91.62% 85.4%

15 Marginal Workers 8.38% 14.6%

16 Agricultural Workers 30% 35.6%

17 Household Industries 2.8% 3.9%

18 Other Workers 67.26% 60.5%

19 Institutional Birth Rate 64.8% 63.1%

20 Childhood Immunization 67.4% 79.8%

21 Cancer Prevalence per 1,00,000 people 93.4 90

22 Drinking Water Facilities 100% 99.5%

23 Sanitation Facilities 68.14% 76.3%

24 Sanitation Facilities – BPL Families 52.62% -

25 Sanitation Facilities – Schools 100% -

26 Literacy Rate 71.09% 75.84%


DEMO







DEMO


Chapter 5 – Assessment of Environmental Impacts

Prepared by & C5-1

5. ASSESSMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS

5.1 General

The chapter presents identification and appraisal of various impacts due to the

proposed expansion project during construction and operational phases. The

environmental impacts are categorized as primary and secondary. Primary

impacts are those, which are attributed directly to the project and secondary

impacts are those, which are indirectly induced and typically include the

associated investment and changed pattern of social and economic activities

by the proposed action.

5.2 Impacts during Construction Phase

This includes the following activities related to leveling of site, construction and

erection of plant components.

5.2.1. Impact on Land use

The total land area of the existing plant is 405 acres. About 20 acres of land

required for MEP has been identified within the existing mill premises. The

land for the MEP is already under the possession of Trident and is located

within the premises of the existing plant area. Hence, there is no additional

land acquisition process and no Rehabilitation and Resettlement (R&R) issues

involved in the MEP.

5.2.2. Impact on Soil Quality

The land identified for the proposed expansion project is a plain land and

wherever partial filling and leveling to the plant formation level will be carried

out. The topsoil requires proper handling like separate stacking so that it can

be used for greenbelt development. Apart from localized construction impacts

at the plant site, no significant adverse impact on soil in the surrounding area

is anticipated.

5.2.3. Impact on Air Quality

The sources of emission during the construction period are the movement of

equipment at the construction site and dust emitted during erection of plant

related activities. The dust emitted during the above mentioned activities

depend upon the ambient humidity levels. Temporary increase in air pollution

will result from the use of construction equipments, and fugitive dust. Due to

the short duration of the planned action, any impacts on ambient air quality

during construction activities are expected to be short term.


DEMO



Prepared by & C5-2

5.2.4. Impact on Noise Levels

The major sources of noise during the construction phase are vehicular traffic,

construction. The operation of these equipments will generate noise ranging

between 85-100 dB (A) near source. These noises will be generated mostly

within the existing plant boundary and will be transient in nature. Due to

existing green cover all around the periphery of the plant boundary, these

noise levels will be attenuated to a large extent and are not likely to have any

significant impact on the nearby villages. Overall, the impact of noise due to

construction on the environment is likely to be insignificant, reversible and

localised in nature.

5.2.5. Impact on Water Quality

The required water during construction phase will be supplied from the existing water

system. The construction equipment is more related to mechanical fabrication,

assembly and erection. Temporary sanitation facilities (soak pits/septic tanks)

will be set up for disposal of sanitary. Sewage generated by the work force as

per the prevailing labour laws. Since most of the construction work force will

consist of floating population, the demand for water and sanitation facilities will

be low and it will be managed by the existing water supply system and

additional sanitation.

5.2.6. Impact on Terrestrial Ecology

The construction activities of new installations will be carried out in the existing

mill premises. This phase does not involve major changes in the terrain.

Impacts on flora during construction period are not envisaged.

5.2.7. Demography and Socio-Economics

There is no rehabitation and resettlement for the proposed project site since

the proposed expansion will be in the existing plant premises. During

construction phase of the project, this project will provide temporary

employment to many unskilled and semi skilled labour for erection and

movement of material. Approximately 500 people on an average peak day will

be employed for a period of about 10 to 12 months.

5.3 Impacts during Operational Phase

The following activities related to the operational phase will have varying

impacts on the environment and are considered for impact assessment:

Air Quality-Point and fugitive emission and associated environmental

impacts

Noise Levels


DEMO



Prepared by & C5-3

Water resources and quality- Wastewater discharge quantities,

characteristics and disposal practices

Solid and hazardous waste -collection, storage and disposal practices

Impacts on ecological and biological environment

Socioeconomic Impacts

5.3.1. Land Use

The proposed project involving MEP is within the plant premises and. Hence,

there will not be any change in the land use pattern in the study area due to

the proposed MEP.

5.3.2. Impact on Air Quality- Point Source Emissions

The main source of pollution is due to emissions from proposed co-generation

plant boilers, new recovery boiler and lime kiln units. A high efficiency ESP will

be installed to reduce the particulate matter and the stack will be designed

suitably to reduce the effect of SO2 and NOx emissions.

Prediction of impacts on air environment has been carried out by employing

mathematical model based on a steady state Gaussian Plume Dispersion

Model designed for multiple point sources for short term. In the present case,

Industrial Source Complex [ISC3] 1993 dispersion model, designed for

multiple point sources for short term and developed by United States

Environmental Protection Agency [USEPA] has been used for simulations

from point sources. The model simulations deal with dispersion of three major

pollutants viz., Sulphur Dioxide (SO2), Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) and

Particulate Matter (PM) emitted from the stacks.

5.3.3. Emissions from Proposed Power Boilers

Based on the preliminary information provided in the project report, it has been

estimated that about 13 TPH of imported coal and 19.42 TPH of Indian coal

will be used in power boiler to generate required steam. Whereas for the

purpose of this environmental impact assessment study with sulphur content

of 0.64%w/w and ash content of 34% Indian coal is considered as a worst

case scenario for predicting emissions from the proposed power boiler. It can

be noted from Table 5.1 that the peak sulphur dioxide emissions from each of

the boiler due to burning of Indian coal will be in the order of 248 kg/hr. As per

the AP42 emission factors published by United States Environmental

Protection Agency (USEPA), about 2.2 kg of NOx would be generated for

every one tone of coal fired in the boiler. Based on this information, it can be

estimated that about 51.9 kg/hr of NOx emissions would be released from

each stack when both the boilers are operated at full capacity.


DEMO



Prepared by & C5-4

In order to control the particulate emissions from the boilers, ESP will be

installed for boiler flue gas streams. ESP will be designed to maintain 150

mg/Nm3 in the exhaust flue gas released from the stack as the stipulated

emission discharge standards of 150 mg/Nm3.

Table 5.1 Basis for the Air Quality Modelling Inputs - Power Boiler Stack Emissions

Based on 100% Indian Coal Firing Option

Based on 100% Imported coal Firing

Option Parameter Units

100TPH Power

Boiler 1

100TPH Power

Boiler 2

100 TPH Power

Boiler 1

100 TPH Power

Boiler 2

Capacity TPH 100 100 100 100

Type of fuel used - Imported Coal and

Indian coal

Imported Coal and

Indian coal

Imported Coal and

Indian coal

Imported Coal and

Indian coal

Heat input Thousand Kcal/Hr

68000 68000 68000 68000

Boiler efficiency % 81 81 81 81

Calorific value of the Indian coal as per feasibility report

Kcal/Kg 4318 4318 6400 6400

Coal consumption TPH 19.42 19.42 13 13

Sulphur content in Coal % 0.64 0.64 1 1

Bio-gas consumption TPH Nil Nil Nil Nil

Rice husk consumption TPH Nil Nil Nil Nil

Combustion air volume Nm3/hr 124645 124645 446849

Stack gas temperature OC 150 150 150 150

Stack gas velocity from each boiler

m/sec 20 20 20 20

Stack height required m 90.18 90.18 74 90.18

Stack height proposed m 95 95 95 95

Stack tip diameter m 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5

ESP inlet dust load grams/Nm3 42.7 42.7 9 9

ESP outlet concentration

mg/Nm3 150 150 150 150

PM emission rate Kg/hr 40.6 40.6 67 67

PM emission rate g/sec 11.3 11.3 19 19

SO2 concentration mg/Nm3 919.25 919.25 582 582

SO2 emission rate Kg/hr 248.61 248.61 260 260

SO2 emission rate g/sec 138.12 138.12 72 72

NOx concentration mg/Nm3 192 192 64 64

NOx emission rate as per AP42

Kg/hr 51.9 51.9 29 29

NOx emission rate as per AP43

g/sec 14.4 14.4 8 8

5.3.4. Emissions from Proposed Recovery Boiler

The proposed black liquor processing quantity of Recovery Boiler# 2 will be

augmented to 450 tpd from the existing quantity of 400 tpd and for the post MEP,

Recovery Boiler# 1 with the capacity of 165 tpd will be retired. An addition of new


DEMO



Prepared by & C5-5

Recovery Boiler with the capacity of 300 tpd is proposed and the same

incremental quantities are considered for emission estimation. After the post

MEP the combustion air volume of new proposed boiler and augmented recovery

boiler #2 are estimated in the order of 169441 Nm3/hr and 135929 Nm3/hr

respectively, hence modelling is undertaken for incremental emissions from the

current operations. The incremental emission concentrations of PM and SO2 and

NOx for the both boilers are shown in Table 5.2.

Table 5.2 Basis for the Air Quality Modelling Inputs- Recovery Boiler Stack

Emissions

Existing operations After Expansion

Inputs to model (Increase in

emissions from current baseline

levels) Parameter Units

Boiler 1 Boiler 2 Boiler

2 New

Boiler Boiler 2

New Boiler

Black liquor processing quantity

TPD 165 400 450 300 450 300

Combustion air volume

Nm3/hr 47716 79636 169441 135929 169441 135929

Stack gas temperature

OC 130 150 160 160 160 160

Stack gas velocity m/sec 11.65 10 18 16 18 16

Stack height m 55 70 70 65 70 65

Stack tip diameter m 1.4 2 2.2 2.09 2 2

ESP outlet concentration

mg/Nm3 107 107 150 150 150 150

PM emission rate Kg/hr 5.1 8.5 25.4 20.4 16.9 20

SO2 concentration mg/Nm3 56 56 60 60 60 60

SO2 emission rate Kg/hr 2.7 4.5 10.2 8.2 5.7 8

NOx concentration mg/Nm3 54 54 60 60 60 60

NOx emission rate Kg/hr 2.6 4.3 10.2 8.2 5.9 8

*Boiler#1 will be retired after post MEP

5.3.5. Emissions from proposed Lime Kiln operations

The existing Lime Kiln processing capacity of 140 TPD will be upgraded to

179 TPD for the proposed MEP, and the combustion air volume is estimated

in the order of 47393 Nm3/hr. Hence the model emissions inputs are

calculated based on the incremental combustion air volume. The emission

concentrations of PM, SO2 and NOx are shown in the following Table 5.3.


DEMO



Prepared by & C5-6

Table 5.3 Basis for the Air Quality Modeling Inputs-Lime Kiln Stack Emissions

Parameter Units Existing scenario

After Upgrade

Model Input (Increase in

emissions

from current

baseline levels

Capacity TPD 140 179 179

Net lime sludge dried TPH 5.83 7.45 7.45

Type of supporting fuel used - FO FO FO

FO consumption kla 9100 4600 4600

Sulphur content in FO % 3.5 3.5 3.5

Bio-gas consumption TPH Nil Nil Nil

Sulphur content in bio-gas % NA NA NA

Combustion air volume Nm3/hr 37067 47393 47393

Stack gas temperature OC 220 220 220

Stack gas velocity m/sec 15 15

Stack height M 60 60 60

Stack tip diameter M 1.36 1.36 1

Dust collection outlet concentration

mg/Nm3 100 150 150

PM emission rate Kg/hr 3.7 7.1 3.4

SO2 emission rate Kg/hr 23.4 30 6.5

Nox emission rate Kg/hr 19.7 25.2 5.5

In order to assess the likely possible impacts on the background air quality, air

quality modelling exercise was undertaken as per the CPCB guidelines. Site

specific meteorological data collected at the site was adopted while predicting

the 2nd highest 24 hrs average ground level concentrations of Particulate

Matter, sulphur dioxide and oxides of nitrogen. ISCST3 air quality modelling

tool, an MOEF approved software, was used for predicting the ground level

concentrations in the study area.

Mixing heights play a vital role in predicting the ground level concentrations of

the pollutants. Site specific SODAR data obtained during the study period

showed that inversion height varied from a minimum of 51 m to maximum of

1070 m. The averaged inversion level considering stable Atmospheric

Boundary Layer (ABL) conditions (1800-0600 hrs) is 164+70m (in December).

Inversion conditions were found to occur for not more than an hour in a typical

day through the season. The hourly averaged mixing height pertaining to

unstable ABL during the day time (1000-1700 hrs) is seen to vary from a

minimum of 310 m to a maximum of 1070 m. The average level is seen to be

638+ 194 m (in December).

Since the stack gas velocity is one and a half times higher than that of the

peak wind speed in the area during the unstable environmental conditions,

stack tip down-wash conditions are not envisaged. As per the requirements

stated in the ToR, plume raise calculations were performed for the estimated

emissions from the proposed stack.


DEMO



Prepared by & C5-7

Based on the Gaussian dispersion modeling protocols, the estimated

buoyancy of the power boiler stack gas will be in the order of 60 m4/s2 and that

of the recovery boiler as 50m4/s2 , hence the emissions from the proposed

stack are buoyant dominant due to significant enthalpy of the flue gas

released into the atmosphere. The estimated plume rise for the specific flue

gas during the unstable and neutral conditions will be in the order of 450m,

225m and 150m at 1m/sec, 2m/sec and 3m/sec wind velocity respectively in

the case of power boilers, whereas the same would be in the order of 400m,

200m and 135m respectively for new recovery boiler

The corresponding effective stack heights (sum of plume rise and physical

stack height) will be in the order of 540m, 315m and 240m respectively for

power boilers. It can be inferred that the effective stack height will be higher

than that of the measured average inversion level of 165m. Based on this

discussion, it can be concluded that the plume rise will be always higher than

of the inversion height and hence the ground level fumigation scenarios are

not envisaged for the specific stack gas emissions at the proposed Mill site.

The site specific meteorological information indicated that, predominantly,

winds were found to blow from north westerly direction and hence the impact

zone in the down wind direction will located in the south easterly direction.

Predicted ground level concentrations in the form of Isopleths are presented in

Figures 5.1 to Figure 5.3. It can be inferred from the predicted data that the

peak ground level concentrations would occur during the unstable conditions

at a downwind distance of 2150 m from the stack. The input and output files

used for ISCST3 modelling are enclosed in Annexure 25.

5.3.5.1. Output of the Modeling

Particulate Matter- The predicted 2nd highest 24 hrs GLC of particulate matter

will be in the order of 2.3 µg/m3 and such concentrations may occur at a

distance of 1280 m from the stack. The concentrations were found to get

diluted rapidly and the GLC will reach less than 2 µg/m3 within a distance of

7.14 km from the Mill site. The envisaged result concentrations in the down-

wind villages will be in the range of 86 to 100 µg/m3 during the post project

scenario, which will be well below the prescribed NAAQ standards in Table

5.4. Figure 5.1 gives the Predicted 24-Hrs GLC’s of Particulate matter within

10 km Radius of the Study Area.


DEMO



Prepared by & C5-8

Table 5.4 Estimated Post Project Scenario of Resultant Particulate Matter Concentration

Particulate Matter (µg/m³)

Code Station Direction

from Stack

Distance from Stack

(in km ) GLCs

Baseline (Average values)

Post Project

Scenario

AAQ1 Plant Site - - <0.05 99 99

AAQ2 Handiaya NE 2.8 <0.05 96 96

AAQ3 Near

Dhanaula E 6.8 <0.05 94 94

AAQ4 Chhanna SE 2 2.3 98 100

AAQ5 Kaleke SE 7.2 2.3 88 90

AAQ6 Kahneke S 4.3 <0.05 99 99

AAQ7 Dhaula SW 2 <0.05 93 93

AAQ8 Khuddi Khurd NW 3.3 <0.05 86 86

Figure 5.1 Predicted 24-Hrs GLC’s of Particulate matter within 10 km

Radius of the Study Area

Sulphur Dioxide (SO2)- The 2nd highest predicted 24 hrs Ground Level

Concentration (GLC) of sulphur dioxide will be in the order of 10 µg/m3

concentration may occur at a distance of 4 Km from the stack. Based on the

prevailing meteorological data during the study period, the probability

occurrence of GLCs above 10 µg/m3 will be less than 2% of the time, whereas


DEMO



Prepared by & C5-9

majority of the predicted concentrations 2nd lowest predicted 24 hrs GLC were

found to be below 7.4 µg/m3.

The predicted concentrations were found to get diluted rapidly and the GLC will

reach less than 10µg/m3, within a distance of 10km from the Mill site. The

envisaged resultant post project concentrations in the down-wind villages will be

in the range of 17 to 19 µg/m3, during the post project scenario which will be

below the prescribed NAAQ standards in Predicted 24 hrs GLC’s of SO2 within

10 km radius of the Study area is given in Figure 5.2.

Table 5.5 Estimated Post Project Scenario of GLCs Resultant Sulphur Dioxide Concentration

Sulphur Dioxide (µg/m³)

Indian coal Code Station

Distance from Stack

(in km )

Baseline (average values)

GLCs Post Project

Scenario

AAQ1 Plant Site - 10 <0.05 10

AAQ2 Handiaya 2.8 7 <0.05 7

AAQ3 Near Dhanaula

6.8 9 <0.05 9

AAQ4 Chhanna 2 9 10 19

AAQ5 Kaleke 7.2 7 10 17

AAQ6 Kahneke 4.3 9 <0.05 9

AAQ7 Dhaula 2 7 <0.05 7

AAQ8 Khuddi Khurd 3.3 8 <0.05 8

Figure 5.2 Predicted 24 hrs GLC’s of SO2 within 10 km radius of the Study area


DEMO



Prepared by & C5-10

Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx)-The 2nd highest predicted 24 hrs’ GLC of Oxides of

Nitrogen will be in the order of 1.6 µg/m3 such concentrations may occur at a

distance of 8Km from the stack. The concentrations were found to get diluted

rapidly and the GLC will reach less than 2µg/m3 within a distance of 10 km from

the Project site. The envisaged result concentrations in the down-wind villages

will be in the range 26.7 to 30.7 µg/m3 during the post project scenario, which will

be far below the prescribed NAAQ standards in Table 5.6. Figure 5.3 gives the

Predicted 24-Hrs’ GLC’s of NOx within 10 km Radius of the Study Area

Table 5.6 Estimated Post Project Scenario of Resultant Oxides Of Nitrogen Concentration GLCs

Oxides of Nitrogen (µg/m³)

Indian Coal Code Station

Distance from

Stack (in km)

Baseline (average values)

GLCs Post Project

Scenario

AAQ1 Plant Site - 31 <0.05 31

AAQ2 Handiaya 2.8 27 <0.05 27

AAQ3 Near Dhanaula

6.8 31 <0.05 31

AAQ4 Chhanna 2 29 1.7 30.7

AAQ5 Kaleke 7.2 25 1.7 26.7

AAQ6 Kahneke 4.3 29 <0.05 29

AAQ7 Dhaula 2 27 <0.05 27

AAQ8 Khuddi Khurd 3.3 21 <0.05 21

Figure 5.3 Predicted 24-Hrs’ GLC’s of NOx within 10 km Radius of the Study Area


DEMO



Prepared by & C5-11

5.3.5.2. Summary of the Air Quality Modeling Results

Based on the findings of the detailed air quality modelling exercise, it has been

inferred that the resultant cumulative concentration at the nearby villages will

comply with the NAAQ Standards. Since there are no ecologically sensitive

locations present in the down-wind direction of the Project site, environmental

risks due to release of emissions from the proposed process units will be

insignificant. The summary of the predicted GLCs is predicted in Table 5.7

Table 5.7 Summary of the predicted GLCs

Parameter Baseline (average) (µg/m³)

Predicted GLCs

(µg/m³)

Resultant Post Project scenario

(µg/m³)

PM10 88 to 98 2.3 90 to 100

SO2 7 to 9 10 17 to 19

NOx 25 to 29 1.7 26.7 to 30.2

5.3.6. Fugitive Emissions and Associated Environmental Impacts

Fugitive emissions are defined as irregular and non point source emissions

that would be generated either from process operations or bulk material

handling facilities. In the current scenario, the proposed facility fugitive

emissions may be released due to handling of imported coal at the coal stock-

yard. Fugitive emissions depend on three parameters of the condition of a

particular storage pile: age of the pile, moisture content, and proportion of

coal fines. When freshly processed aggregate is loaded onto a storage pile,

the potential for dust emissions is at a maximum.

Fines are easily disaggregated and released to the atmosphere upon

exposure to air currents, either from aggregate transfer itself or from high

winds. As the aggregate pile weathers, however, potential for dust emissions

is greatly reduced. Moisture causes aggregation and cementation of fines to

the surfaces of larger particles.

Coal lumps with a size of 6 mm will be received at the Mill site; hence the

possibility of dust emissions from the coal handling will be less due to larger

lump size that will be handled at site. In order to control the fugitive emissions

from coal handling operations, water sprinkling operations will be adopted at

the coal yard to maintain desired moisture content to avoid fugitive dust

emissions due to wind-borne dust. In addition to this, wind barricades will be

provided, coal will be transported through covered belt conveyers from stock

yard to boiler rooms. Suitably designed dust collection systems will be

installed at all coal transfer points in the captive co-generation power plant.


DEMO



Prepared by & C5-12

As part of this EIA study, an attempt was made to estimate the wind-borne

dust emissions due to storage and handling coal at the stock yard within the

plant site. Published emission factor guidelines were adopted for estimating

coal dust emissions (USEPA1).

The following assumptions were made while estimating the coal dust

emissions:

1. About 946 TPD of coal will be stored in an area of 16200 m2

2. Coal contains a maximum silt content of 5% as per USEPA published

documents for imported and graded coals

3. Average wind speed in the study will be in the order of 1.05 m/sec

4. The coal handling operations are spread across the day uniformly and no

idling periods were considered to represent the worst case and peak 24 hrs

average ground level concentrations

5. Moisture content in the coal will be in the order of 5% without water

sprinkling for dust suppression.

The most likely possible hourly fugitive emissions were estimated using

USEPA emission factor document guidelines (USEPA)2 and the estimated

uncontrolled dust emissions from the coal stock yard will be in the order of 6.5

kg/ha/hr during the windy conditions with a minimum velocity of 1.05m/sec.

ISCST3 model with particle deposition and non-buoyant and non-plume option

was considered for modelling the dispersion of the uncontrolled fugitive dust

emissions from coal stock yard.

Watering and the use of chemical wetting agents are the principal means for

control of aggregate and coal storage pile emissions. Enclosure or covering of

inactive piles to reduce wind erosion can also reduce emissions. Watering is

useful mainly to reduce emissions from vehicle traffic in the storage pile area.

By effective water sprinkling and other widely practiced measures particulate

emissions from aggregate storage operations can be reduced by 90 percent

(USEPA)3.

1. G. A. Jutze, et al., Investigation Of Fugitive Dust Sources Emissions And Control, EPA-450/3-74-

036a, U. S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC, June 1974

2 USEPA Emission Factor Document, Chapter 11

3 G. A. Jutze, et al., Investigation Of Fugitive Dust Sources Emissions And Control, EPA-450/3-74-036a, U. S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC, June 1974.


DEMO



Prepared by & C5-13

By adopting the above mentioned fugitive dust control measures, the

predicted GLCs of particulate matter due to controlled fugitive dust emission

from coal yard at the facility will be less than 169µg/m3.

It can be also inferred that the predicted ground level concentrations near the

villages, and settlements will be less than 2 µg/m3. Isopleths of 2nd highest 24

hrs average GLC of particulate matter due to controlled emissions are

presented in Figure 5.4. Hence, the overall impacts due to fugitive dust

emissions from handling coal will be significantly minimised. The summary of

the predicted GLCs is predicted in Table 5.8

Figure 5.4 Predicted GLCs of Particulate Matter due to controlled Fugitive Dust Emissions from Coal Stock Yard

Table 5.8 Summary of the Predicted GLCs for Fugitive Emission

Baseline at plant

site- average (µg/m³)

Predicted GLCs (µg/m³)

Resultant Post Project scenario (µg/m³)

PM10 99 5-150 104-242


DEMO



Prepared by & C5-14

5.3.7. Vehicular Traffic and Impacts

As stated in chapter 3 of this report, raw-materials, finished products and coal

will be transported by road in trucks. In order to assess the impacts from

increase in traffic, volumes and vehicular emissions were studied as a part of

this EIA study and also as per terms of reference issued for the project. The

carrying capacity for the proposed traffic movement is calculated in terms of

Passenger Car Units (PCU equivalent units)4 of the proposed vehicular traffic

at the Mill site.

Passenger car units were estimated based on the conception of directly

proportional to the ratio of clearing speed, and inversely proportional to the

space occupancy. The total contribution on the incremental rise in the PCUs

by the plant activities like transportation of raw materials, finished products,

coal, ash and other solid waste materials is shown in Table 5.9.

As per the Indian Road Congress (IRC) Standard the design service volume

for both rural and urban roads are presented in Table 5.10.The incremental

rise due to proposed vehicular movement is 9 PCUs/hr through Gate: 2 and

30 PCUs/hr through Gate: 3, which is very insignificant.

Table 5.9 Proposed Vehicular Traffic Volumes in PCUs Per Day

Type of Vehicles

Number of

Vehicles per day

(one way)

Number of Vehicles per day (Round

Trip)

PCU – Conversion Factor (ref)

(considering the road with 0% gradient)

Total Volume in PCU’s/day

(PCUs/ hr)

Gate No.1

Trucks carrying straw

158 316 3.0 949 40

Trucks carrying wood

56 111 3.0 334 14

Trucks carrying chemical and other

53 105 3.0 316 13

Trucks carrying coal

129 259 3.0 776 32

Trucks carrying total ash

19 38 3.0 114 5

Trucks carrying wastewater treatment sludge

30 60 3.0 179 7

Trucks carrying Lime sludge

8 17 3.0 50 2

Trucks carrying finished products

49 98 3.0 294 12

Passenger vehicles 46 92 3.0 275 11

Total 144

4 Satish Chandra, “Capacity Estimation Procedure for two-lane roads under mixed traffic conditions”, Journal

of Indian Roads Congress, 65(1), September 2004, pp. 139 – 171


DEMO



Prepared by & C5-15

Table 5.10 Recommended Design Service Volume For Different Type of Roads

Type of Road IRC standard Terrain Design service

volume in PCUs/hr

Four lane road and an arterial urban highway

IRC 106/1990 Plain 3600

Single lane road in rural area IRC 64/1990 Plain 2000

Intermediate lane road in rural area IRC 64/1990 Plain 6000

Two lane road in rural area IRC 64/1990 Plain 15000

5.3.7.1. Vehicular Emissions and Impacts

The emission factors published by CPCB/ARAI (The Automotive Research

Association of India)5 were adopted for the estimation of emissions from the

vehicular movement from the main gate to inside the facility and also idling

emissions at parking areas. The pollutant emission factors that were referred

from CPCB/ARAI manual include Nitrogen Oxides (NOx) and PM (Particulate

Matter). Since the emission factor of SO2 is not prescribed by CPCB or ARAI,

the same is estimated based on the sulphur content in diesel (max. 50 mg/kg)

considering Bharat Stage IV fuel norms (ref)6. Summary of the estimated

vehicular emissions at the Mill site is presented in Table 5.11

Most likely possible ground level concentrations of SO2 and NOx due to

release of emissions from the vehicular emissions at the Project site were

modelled using ISCST 3 without buoyancy option. Photochemical reactions of

NOx were not considered due to absence of significant quantities of ozone

pre-cursor pollutant (Non-methane hydrocarbons) in the background

environment. It can be inferred from the modelled 2nd highest ground level

concentrations of SO2 NOx and CO presented in Figure 5.5 to Figure 5.7 that

the overall increase in the back ground pollutant concentrations due to release

of vehicular emissions will be insignificant. Hence, no additional impacts at the

nearby villages are envisaged due to emissions from vehicles.The summary of

the predicted GLCs is predicted in Table 5.12

Table 5.11 Emission Factors Considered for the Estimation of Vehicular Emissions

Emission factors Type of source

Make considered

Emission norms

Emission factor compilation

Units NOx SO2* PM

Trucks (HCV Diesel driven)

Post 2000 BS-II CPCB/ ARAI (Automotive Research Association of India) - Emission Factor development for Indian Vehicles – 2008

g/km 9.30 0.03 1.24

5 Manual “Emission Factor Development for Indian Vehicles” March 2008, as a part of Ambient Air Quality

Monitoring and Emission source Appointment Studies sponsored by CPVB/MoEF 6 High Speed Diesel Oil Specifications, BPCL and Indian Diesel Specifications and Fuel Economy Data by

Society of Indian Automobile Manufacturers (SIAM) January 2010.


DEMO



Prepared by & C5-16

Note: Emission Factor of SO2 is calculated based on Sulphur content calculations considering Bharat Stage IV fuel norms

Figure 5.5 Predicted 24-Hrs GLCs of SO2 due to Vehicular Emissions

Dis

tan

ce

(m

)

Figure 5.6 Predicted 24-Hrs GLCs of NOx Due to Vehicular Emissions


DEMO



Prepared by & C5-17

Figure 5.7 Predicted 24-Hrs GLCs of CO Due to Vehicular Emissions

Table 5.12 The summary of the predicted GLCs (µg/m³)

Parameter Baseline at plant

site

Predicted GLCs at Facility Boundary

Resultant Post Project scenario

SO2 16.9 0.1-0.5 17-17.5

NOx 40.2 5 to 10 45.2 to 50.2

CO - 5-100 -

5.3.8. Noise Emissions and Compliance Status

The major noise emitting sources at the proposed Project site are presented in

Table 5.13. TLPD has considered installing low noise generating equipment

wherever applicable as per the recommended standards and guidelines.

Some of the major noise generating equipment will be housed inside the room

with an average wall thickness of 230 mm to attenuate noise emissions.

According to the Noise Control Handbook (ref)7, a 230 mm brick wall will

provide a noise reduction level of about 20 dB(A) to 25 dB(A) across the wall.

Considering such a reduction, the overall noise levels outside the power Boiler

and Cooling tower will be less than 65 dB(A), which will comply with work-

zone and industrial noise level standards.

7 7: Acoustics and Noise Control Handbook for Architects and Builders, Leland K. Irvine Roy L. Richards


DEMO



Prepared by & C5-18

Table 5.13 Envisaged Equipment Noise Levels (Sound Pressure Levels)

Parameter 1m from the Source

dB(A) Outside the Room

dB(A)

Power boiler 97 72

Cooling Tower 80 80

According to the environmental regulations, industrial facilities should adopt

sound noise abatement and control programme to meet the following criteria.

Sound pressure levels at the property boundary should be less than 55 dBA

during daytime hours and 45 dBA during night time hours. Noise levels near

the work-zone areas should comply with a maximum permissible level of 85

dBA. As a part of this EIA study, a detailed noise propagation modeling was

undertaken to establish the abated noise levels at the facility boundary. Noise

propagation from various equipment and process units have been modeled

based on the international outdoor noise propagation standards.

ISO 9613-1:1996 Acoustics- attenuation of sound during propagation

outdoors- Part 1: Calculation of the absorption of sound by the

atmosphere

ISO 9613-2:1996 Acoustics- attenuation of sound during propagation

outdoors- Part 2: General method of calculation

Noise propagation software model, NoiseSim Version 2.1 has been used for

estimating the sound pressure levels due to cumulative dispersion of noise

emissions from all the designated sources. The primary inputs required for the

noise propagation modelling are equipment noise Power Levels (Lw-dB),

coordinates of the noise emitting sources, acoustical characteristics of the

walls and barriers etc, if any, and environmental parameters such as relative

humidity, wind speed, ambient temperature and typical terrain characteristics.

In order to represent the worst case scenario (maximum likely possible noise

impacts), dry and hot weather conditions (summer season) have been

considered.

Paved concrete surface has been considered in the present scenario to

represent maximum ground reflection. Noise source radiates power P and

this result in a sound pressure p. Sound power is the cause – Sound pressure

is the effect. Sound Power is a measure of total energy per unit time emitted

by the source in all directions. Sound pressure is a measure of the pressure at

the receiver’s location. Sound Pressure is dependent on the acoustic

environment, which is generally referred to as acoustic impendence (c).

The factors involved include the effects of nearby reflecting surfaces, receiver

distance, type of space, the amount and location of absorption in the space,

the location in the space, the presence of barriers, and the intrusion of


DEMO



Prepared by & C5-19

ambient sounds. The relationship between Sound Pressure Level (Lp) and

Equipment Sound Power Level (Lw) can express in the following equation.

Both Lp and Lw are expressed as dB.

-------- Eq. 1

Lp : Sound Pressure Level Lw : Sound Power Level r : Distance from the equipment at which the Lp is measured (generally 1m) Wref : Reference power level (10-12 watts) Pref : Reference pressure level (2x10-5 N/m2)

c : Acoustic impedance (rays)

Predicted sound pressure levels in around the proposed Mill site due to

operation of the facility are presented in Figure 5.8. It can be inferred from the

modelled data that the sound pressure levels at the facility boundary will below

50 dBA, which is well within the stipulated threshold noise level of 75 dBA for

industrial areas. Noise levels outside the facility boundary will be further

attenuated due to the proposed green belt all along the plant boundary. Based

on this noise modelling analysis, it has been concluded that the noise

abatement and control measures considered by TLPD in the design phases of

the facility will be adequate to meet the ambient noise criteria suggested by

MOEF.

Figure 5.8 Predicted Noise Levels

4

102021010

ref

ref

P

cWLogrLogLwLp

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

105

Dis

tan

ce

(m

)


DEMO



Prepared by & C5-20

5.3.9. Impacts on the Water Environment

The source of water for the project is from the Uppli canal and ground water.

The mill has obtained the permission for drawl of of 25,000 m³/day water from

Uppli canal and necessary permission from the Central Ground Water Board

for the abstraction of 14,040 m³/day of ground water was obtained.

The water consumption after MEP will be around 31,500 m3/day. It is expected

that recycled wastewater from internal process will be reused to the extent of

1,200 m3/day and recycled from other unit is about 2,700 m³/day. Hence, the

net fresh water requirement for post MEP will be 27,600 m3/day. In ordered to

reduce the fresh water consumption, the mill has installed and adopted

various water conservation measures to bring down the water consumption

from 60 to 55 m³/t of paper and this will be achieved by adopting various

internal water and wastewater recycling programmes within the plant.

The central ground water board test reports and site specific bore well yield

test data indicated that the average yield from the existing 7 number of bore

wells will be adequate to meet the water demand in the existing facility. The

Total measured ground water yield from existing seven tube wells mill site is

14430 m3/day and the pumping test results revels that the drawdown in only

2.1 m at the pumping rate of 3500 lpm. The estimated radius of influence is

360 m. The radius of influence confines within the project site itself and there

would not be any adverse impact in the surrounding irrigation or drinking water

wells located outside the project site.

Hence no impacts on the neighboring ground water resources are envisaged.

No settlements and ground water extraction facilities for drinking and domestic

applications were located within 2.5km from the existing facility. Hence the

overall impact on the ground water resources will be insignificant. TLPD

intends has already implemented rain water harvesting program and a

detailed discussion on the same is presented in section 6 of this report.

Impact on Water Quality- Details of the existing water balance and

wastewater streams along with the details of the existing Wastewater

Treatment Plant have been described in Chapter 2. The water balance for the

post MEP is given below in Table 5.14 and wastewater balance diagram is

given in Figure 5.9


DEMO



Prepared by & C5-21

Table 5.14 Water Balance for MEP (All values in m3/day)

Source Fresh water Recycled

water Wastewater Generation

Wastewater to ETP

Paper machine #1 2000 - 3200 3200

Paper machine #2 4800 - 7200 7200

SFL & ClO2 Plant 6800 1200 7900 7900

WFL 3700 - 2800 2800

Recovery#1 (Eliminated)

0 - 0 0

Recovery#2 1720 - 220 220

Recovery#3 1720 - 1200 1200

Cogen#1 (Will be eliminated/Standby)

0 - 0 0

Cogen#2 3300 1900 1900

Cogen#3 560 - 200 200

New Cogen #4 & #5 5200 - 2600 2600

Others 500 - 200 200

Total 30300 1200 27420 27420

Note: SFL -Straw Fibre Line ; WFL -Wood Fibre Line


DEMO



Prepared by & C5-22

Figure 5.9 Post MEP Water Balance

SFL- Straw Fibre Line, WFL-Wood Fibre Line


DEMO



Prepared by & C5-23

Total treated waste water from WWTP will be 27,420 m³/day in that only 8,700

m³/day of treated waste water will be discharged into existing Dhanula drain

for which necessary permissions are already obtained and 18,220 m³/day of

treated wastewater will be used for irrigation and greenbelt development

activities. About 100 m3/day will be used in the coal and fly ash handling area.

The Sodium Absosorption ratio of the treated wastewater is reported to be

less than 5 which is less than the maximum permissible level of 10 as per

handbook agricultural published by Indian council of agricultural research,

New Delhi.

The waste water generated after MEP will be treated in the existing waste

water treatment plant with the additional equipment, this will be installed to

handle the additional load. Additional equipment in the existing WWTP will be

installed to handle the additional load. The proposed equipment is as below.




One (1) sludge decanter for primary clarifier sludge

One (1) sludge decanter for secondary clarifier sludge

The existing UASB is designed for 13034 Kg/day of COD, whereas the COD

load from straw washing line (high COD stream) will be 14700 Kg/day, so the

existing system is not adequate to treat the excess load so the additional bio

methanation plant is proposed with the capacity of 6000m3/day. A detailed

discussion on the ETP adequacy is discussed in section 2and 3 of this report.

The WWTP flow diagram with proposed new equipment is given in Figure

5.10. Treated wastewater will comply with the stipulated discharge standards.

Table 5.15 depicts the envisaged raw-wastewater quality at the ETP and the

treated water quality after expansion.


DEMO



Prepared by & C5-24

Table 5.15 Envisaged Wastewater Characteristics

Raw-wastewater Characteristics

S.No Parameter Unit High COD

Low COD

Combined Treated

wastewater Characteristics

Waste water discharge

standard for Pulp & Paper

(CPCB)

1 Flow m3/day 9000 18440 27020 -

2 Total Suspended Solids

mg/l 1800 1200

36 500

3 BOD (3 days at 27°C

mg/l 1100 400

27 30

4 COD mg/l 3500 1100 176 350

5 AOX Grams/Ton of product

- - <1 <1

E: Existing operations data has been obtained from site, AE: After expansion


DEMO



Prepared by & C5-25

Figure 5.10 Process Flow Diagram - Wastewater Treatment Plant Proposed Equipment


DEMO



Prepared by & C5-26

5.3.10. Soil and Groundwater Quality Related Impacts

The facility is utilizing the treated wastewater for the last 10 years and the soil

quality at existing greenbelt area 165Acres was reported to be good and

conducive for irrigation. The organic content, the SAR 0.92, pH 8.13 and

porosity 47% are not changed from the background levels. Hence the impact

on the soil quality due to utilization of treated wastewater is insignificant.

However a detailed ground water quality modeling was undertaken to assess

the cumulative impacts due to application of additional treated wastewater on

the greenbelt. Total treated wastewater proposed to utilized for greenbelt after

MEP will be 18220 m3/day.

Treated wastewater used for green cover and irrigation applications at the Mill

site and nearby areas. The treated wastewater discharged for irrigation

complies with the stipulated discharge standards, impacts on the soil and

ground water quality will be insignificant. However, residual environmental

impacts, if any, due to utilization of treated wastewater for irrigation needs has

been continuously monitored.

5.3.10.1. Ground water quality and Movement of Pollutants

Detailed water quality assessment is necessary in areas where there is

intensive ground water development, Industrialization and urbanization as it is

also subjected to qualitative changes in the environment around. Quality of

water is influenced considerably by the quality of its source and occurrence.

In order to describe water quality of the study area the ground water quality

have been tested for TDS values using TDS Scan (Potable TDS testing

equipment) from wells in core and buffer zones during field investigation.

Total Dissolved Solids in the ground water of the study area - The Total

Dissolved solids concentration in the ground water of the study area reveals

that 74.61% of the area falls in 750-1050 mg/L category which is potable as

per the drinking water standards. The higher concentration of 1650-1800

mg/L occupies very less area which is found in the project site. As per the BIS

Standards the TDS concentration in drinking water is in the following order:

<500 mg/L Potable 500-2000 mg/L can be used in absence of better source,

>2000 Non-Potable. Hence, the water quality with respect to TDS the site is

not in the non-potable zone. It is also observed from the spatial distribution

map of TDS, the relatively high concentration is confined within the project site

itself.

Within 10Km radius of the project site no major industrial pollutant source has

been observed, except agriculture area runoff and domestic wastewater. Few

constituents, which are present more than the desirable limit, are those

common constituents which are naturally present in the groundwater in the


DEMO



Prepared by & C5-27

study area by the contribution of geological formation. It is very likely that

these may have been derived from the nearby cultivated land through surface

drainage.

The pathways of important constituents in groundwater have been studied

and pathways for the constituents like Total dissolved solids, by using Visual

Modflow software. The dispersion pattern of these constituents reveals that

their movement has been in accordance to the groundwater movement, its

direction and hydraulic conductivity.

The pathways for TDS which are found more than permissible limits and its

dispersion maps have also been prepared and are shown below. The ground

water flow of the area is towards the south west direction. As ground water

moves from North West to south west, there may be slight increase in the

salinity of ground water in the western side. However, Total dissolved solids

concentration is comparatively more in ground water in the northern side of

study area. The above is due to heavy pumping in the northern side of the

study area for irrigation activity. There is no possibility of any contamination in

the vicinity of the project site by the project activity as the higher concentration

of TDS is limited within the project site, inspite of heavy pumping in the

northern part of the study area due to irrigation activity.

5.3.10.2. Ground water quality – Dispersion of TDS in Ground water

An attempt was made to estimate the possible impacts due to application of

treated wastewater for irrigation needs. Considering the current wastewater

application of 160m3/acres for irrigation needs of wheat and paddy with a

maximum TDS level of 2000ppm in treated wastewater, the resultant TDS

concentrations of ground water has been predicted.

The borehole lithology of the study area indicates that the Clay mixed sand

(partially impervious formation) extents up to a depth of 15.5 m below which

medium sand encounters. Hence, the single layer is considered for solute

transport model. The depth of the water table aquifer considered is 19 m bgl.

(The ground water is available below the clay mixed sand formation). The

Hydraulic Gradient is estimated from the water table contour. The estimated

pre- monsoon hydraulic gradient of 4.8 m/km is considered. 15.5 m thickness

of the clay mixed sand fromation is considered. The effective porosity of the

formation is considered as 46.82 %. The transmissivity of the shallow aquifer

is around 5.5 sq.m/day. The hydraulic conductivity is estimated as 0.986

m/day. The velocity of the ground water is computed as 0.0115 m/day. While

computing, the worse scenario is considered Low rainfall, natural recharge

and high TDS value (effluent values).


DEMO



Prepared by & C5-28

Summary of the results are presented in Figure 5.11, 5.12 and 5.13. It can be

inferred from the modeled data that there will be insignificant raise in the

background TDS levels in the treated wastewater due to utilization of treated

wastewater for irrigation needs.

Figure 5.11Spatial distribution of TDS in ground water


DEMO



Prepared by & C5-29

Figure 5.12 Model showing the pathways of TDS in Ground water

Figure 5.13 Model showing the predicated Dispersion of TDS in Ground water (10 Years)

5.3.11. Impacts on Ecological and Biological Environment

5.3.11.1. Impacts on Flora

During operational phase, the major pollutants post MEP will be Particulate

Matter (PM) and sulphur dioxide (SO2) from the AFBC Boiler. A high efficiency

ESP will be installed to reduce the particulate matter and the stack will be


DEMO



Prepared by & C5-30

designed suitably to reduce the effect of SO2 and NOx emissions and the

resultant concentration of PM, SO2 and NOx will be kept, well within the

standards prescribed by pollution control board.

5.3.11.2. Impacts on Fauna

The mammalian faunal density in this region is as such very low and no further

impact is expected on mammalian fauna. Avifauna in the close vicinity of project

site may get disturb and locally migrate due to construction activities. However,

during operational phase noise levels will be maintained below 55 dBA. Which

will be further reduced inside greenbelt canopy. Studies conducted by Parris and

Schnieder (2009) showed that birds in urban environment can tolerate noise

levels up to 67 dBA. Hence, no impacts on birds are envisaged. No ecologically

sensitive site is identified in study area, hence no direct or indirect adverse

impacts are expected on ecology due to proposed development.

5.3.11.3. Impacts on Crops

The study area is primarily dominated by agricultural fields. Hence, it is essential

to predict impacts of proposed development on crop yields. Different crop

species and varieties and even individuals of the same species may vary

considerably in their sensitivity to SO2. These variations occur because of the

differences in climate, stage of growth and maturation.

Studies conducted by Murray and Wilson (1989) showed that crops like wheat,

beans, maize and peanuts are tolerant to SO2 levels up to 180 µg/m3.

Concentrations between 80 – 100 µg/m3 were observed to be beneficial for

metabolism of crop plants. However, this condition may vary depending upon

geographical location, temperature and variety of crop.

Horticultural crops like cabbage, celery, corn, onion and potato are resistant to

higher concentrations of SO2 (Griffith, 2003). Hence, no adverse impact of

expansion of paper mill is envisaged on surrounding agricultural activity.

5.3.12. Socioeconomic Impact

5.3.12.1. Land Acquisition

There is no additional land is acquired although the land required for the

proposed expansion project is about 20 Acers is identified within the existing

project site area and the proposed land is in the form of Industrial use only.

There will not be any Rehabilitation and Resettlement issues from the project.

5.3.12.2. Loss of Public properties

As the proposed project site is within the existing plant premises there is no

loss to any public properties like roads, canals or public infrastructures. The

existing infrastructure such as roads and water sources developed for the


DEMO



Prepared by & C5-31

project will be used for the expansion too. Hence there is no loss of any public

properties were envisaged.

5.3.12.3. Rehabilitation and Resettlement

According to NRRP 2007, Rehabilitation and Resettlement policy doesn’t

attract for this project as the proposed project is within the existing plant area

and project doesn’t displace any human settlement.

5.3.12.4. Summary of the Socioeconomic Impact

Due to the proposed project there is no significant direct adverse impact to the

socio-economy of the area as the project doesn’t displace nor acquire new

land. The rate of working group population in the district had increased by

10% in the past decade due to the increased job opportunities and industrial

growth in the region (Census 2001-2011).

Due to the existing plant there are number of beneficial impacts in the local

area. The local infrastructures have been improved in around the project site

such as roads, communication access, additional income for the farmers, etc.

The CSR programs on women empowerment, local economic development

had considerably had a positive change in the wellbeing of the local people.

The existing project had developed more than 10,000 direct employments and

more than 20,000 indirect employments around the project site. The project

also increased the business opportunities such as transport, small

contractors, etc. considerably increasing the purchasing power of the local

people. In addition due to the expansion project there will be additional

positive impacts such as additional raw material utilization, increased job

opportunities and increase in the economic activity around the study area is

envisaged.


DEMO



Prepared by & C5-32



DEMO


Chapter 6 – Environmental Management Plan

Prepared by & C6-1

6. ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

6.1 General

This chapter presents an overview of Environmental Management Plan and

Environmental Monitoring Program.

The Environmental Management Plan (EMP) is required to ensure sustainable

development in the area of the Mill site. EMP also ensures that the project

implementation is carried out in accordance with the design and the mitigative

measures as recommended in the Environment Impact Assessment study to

reduce the adverse impacts during the project’s life cycle. The plan outlines

existing and potential problems that may adversely impact the environment

and recommends corrective measures where required. The identification and

quantification of impacts based on scientific and mathematical modeling have

been presented in Chapter 5.

Mitigation measures at the source level and an overall EMP for the study area

are planned for implementation, to improve the supportive capacity of the

study area and also to preserve the assimilative capacity of the receiving

bodies.

6.2 Environmental Management during Construction Phase

During construction phase, the construction activities like leveling, grading,

transportation of the construction material cause various impacts on the

surroundings. However, the constructional phase impacts are temporary and

localised phenomena except the permanent change in local landscape and

land use pattern of the project site.

6.2.1. Site Preparation

Since the project site terrain is flat and already levelled during the construction

of the existing plant, there will not be any requirement for major levelling.

There is no vegetation on the land identified for MEP. During dry weather

conditions, dust may be generated by activities like excavation and

transportation through unmetalled roads. The dust will be suppressed using

water sprinkling and may continue after completion of construction. The mill

shall make provision for water sprinklers.

6.2.2. Air Quality Management

The activities like site development, grading and vehicular traffic contribute to

increase in PM, SO2 and NOx concentrations. The mitigation measures

recommended to minimize the impacts are:


DEMO



Prepared by & C6-2

Water sprinkling in construction area;

Asphalting the approach road to the project facilities;

Proper maintenance of vehicles and construction equipment; and

Tree plantation in the area earmarked for greenbelt development.

6.2.3. Noise Level Management

The noise impact on the surrounding population during the construction phase

will be confined to the project site and within the existing plant area. High

noise generating equipment, if used, shall be sparingly operated during the

daytime to minimise any discomfort to the nearby residents. Community noise

levels are not likely to be affected because of the vegetation and likely

attenuation due to the physical barriers already present in the existing mill

area. Earmuffs shall continue to be provided to the workers and their use by

workers shall be enforced.

6.2.4. Water Quality

During construction period, the groundwater quality may be affected due to the

construction activities and loosening of topsoil. The chemicals (paints, oils etc)

shall be stored in designated areas. There is no likelihood of groundwater

contamination as there will not be any process wastewaters discharge on to

the ground during construction.

6.2.5. Solid & Hazardous Waste Management

The hazardous materials used during the construction may include petrol,

diesel, welding gas and paints. Construction sites handle small quantities of

lube oils and diesel for running the construction equipment. In order to avoid

soil contamination due to accidental spills, it has been recommended to

provide spill absorbing material at the construction site and the contaminated

soil should be excavated and these materials shall be stored, and disposed of

to hazardous waste disposal sites according to the guidelines specified.

6.2.6. Ecological Management

As the new equipment for MEP is proposed to be located within the existing

mill premises, no effect on vegetation is anticipated. Similarly, there will not be

any impact on the aquatic ecology as there are no aquatic bodies in the plant

site. A comprehensive greenbelt programme, which is already in place, shall

improve the ecological condition.


DEMO



Prepared by & C6-3

6.2.7. Socio-Economic Aspects

The existing land will be used for the proposed project. There will not be any

resettlement and rehabilitation. Thus, there will not be any adverse socio

economic implications. The economic status of the area is likely to improve, as

there will be direct/indirect employment generation during construction and

operational phase.

6.3 Environmental Management Plan during Operation Phase

During the operation phase, the impacts on various environmental attributes

should be mitigated using appropriate pollution control equipment. The

Environmental Management Plan prepared for the proposed project aims at

minimising the pollution at source.

6.3.1 Air Quality Management Plan

The main sources of air pollution from the proposed project have been

discussed in Chapter 3 and the impacts on air environment due to the

operation of the plant have been discussed in Chapter 5

It may be seen that the ambient air quality are well within the ambient air

quality limits prescribed by the CPCB. It may also be noted that the predicted

concentrations reflect the worst-case scenario and were reported to be within

the stipulated limits of NAAQs. The actual GLCs during the real time operation

will be much lower that the predicted scenario, because of the usage of mixed

fuels such as imported coal and bio-mass, thereby the overall SO2 emissions

will be far below the predicted levels. In addition, adequately designed ESPs

will be installed to maintain PM levels below the stipulated emission norms of

150mg/Nm3. the efficient ESP. It is, therefore, expected that the actual GLCs

will be much lower than those predicted in the worst-case scenario. The

following management plan will be adopted in the plant during the operational

phase of the facility.

6.3.1.1 Reduction of Emission at Source

Due to utilisation of high calorific value imported coal with sulphur content less

than 0.7%, the specific SO2 emission rate from the proposed facility will be two

to three times lower than that of the conventional co-generation power plants

that are operated on high ash content Indian coal

Dedicated Electrostatic Precipitators will be installed for control of Particulate

Matter (PM) emissions from Power boilers, chemical recovery boilers and lime

kiln. ESPs will be designed to achieve efficiency more than 99.9% to limit the

PM concentrations below 50 mg/Nm3 as against the stipulated standards of

150 mg/Nm3.


DEMO



Prepared by & C6-4

The details of the stack (At full load operation with Electrostatic precipitator)

showing the dust load on ESP, collection efficiency and outlet dust

concentration is given below in Table 6.1

Table 6.1 - Details of the ESP stack

Stack attached to (after MEP)

S.No. Parameters Units New

Power Boiler

(100 tph)

New Power Boiler

(100 tph)

Recovery Boiler #2

New Recovery

boiler

Lime kiln

1 Stack height proposed

90 90 65 70 60

2 Stack diameter m 3.2 3.2 2.09 2.2 1.36

3 Flue gas velocity

m/sec 7.8 7.8 16 18 15

4 Flue gas temperature

°C 150 150 160 160 220

5 Combustion air volume

Nm3/hr 225718 225718 135929 169441 47393

6 ESP outlet concentration

mg/Nm³ <150 <150 <150 <150 <150

Sufficient stack height will be provided as per the stack height norms

stipulated by CPCB for wider dispersal of pollutants. A continuous online stack

emission monitoring unit will be installed to monitor Particulate Matter, SO2

and NOx emissions. Provision of water sprinkling system at raw material

storage yard and there will be the provision of dust extraction systems at dust

generating source.

TLPD is not using kraft pulping hence there is no odor gas emission and no

such emission are envisaged.

6.3.1.2 Fugitive Emissions Control Management

Existing Closed belt conveyors will be used to transport coal from stock

yard to boiler house.

The ash will be transported by closed bulkers to potential users

Adequate numbers of water sprinkling system at coal storage yard has

been installed (Figure 6.1)

Unloading of coal trucks will be carried out with proper care, avoiding

dropping of the materials from height. It is advisable to moisten the

material by sprinkling water while unloading, handling and during storage

Mobile road dust cleaning machines shall be employed to collect coal

fines if any


DEMO



Prepared by & C6-5

The sprinkling of water will be done along the internal roads in the plant in

order to control the dust arising due to the movement of vehicular traffic

High efficiency bag filters is installed at the coal yard, coal transfer points,

straw storage and preparation yards for the control of dust.

In order to avoid the dust from straw handling, a 5 meters height

galvanized metal sheet wall is fenced in the straw handling area.

Developing of greenbelt around the plant boundary will further control the

fugitive emissions

Figure 6.1 Existing Water Sprinklers at Coal Yard


DEMO



Prepared by & C6-6

6.3.2 Noise Management Plan

The impact of noise generated due to plant operations has been

estimated in Chapter 5. Sound pressure levels at the facility boundary will

below 50 dBA, which is well within the stipulated threshold noise level of

75 dBA for industrial area. The ambient noise levels in the region are

within permissible limits and are envisaged to be within the permissible

limits even after commissioning of the proposed facilities.

The specifications for procuring major noise generating machines/

equipment shall include built-in design requirements to have minimum

noise levels meeting Occupational Safety and Health Association (OSHA)

requirement.

Steam turbine and turbo-generator in the co-generation plants will be

provided with acoustic insulation and, also, will be placed in a closed room

Appropriate noise barriers/shields, silencers etc will be provided in the

equipment, wherever feasible. As far as possible, noise emanating from

noisy equipment shall be adequately attenuated by enclosures,

insulations etc.

Ear plugs will be provided to workmen working near high noise generating

sources

The existing wide greenbelt around the plant will further attenuate noise

levels

6.3.3 Water and Wastewater Management

6.3.3.1 Water Conservation Measures

The mill has adopted water conservation measures to bring down the water

consumption from 60 to 55 m³/t of paper as against the CREP guidelines of

90m3/t.. During the Post MEP about 1200m3/day of water will be internally

recycled wastewater and 2,700 m3/day of water will be recycled from the other

units in order to reduce the fresh water consumption. Some of the water

conservation measures taken during last two years are as below and they will

be adopted the same in post MEP.

Metering of all the water streams supplying water to recovery plants

Recirculation of HP pump rejects water to the HP pump suction tank in

recovery area.


DEMO



Prepared by & C6-7

Installation of world class Disc Filter Technology for reuse of water at the

Paper Machine leading to significant reduction in water consumption per

ton of paper produced

Highly advanced pulping technology using Elemental Cholorine Free

(ECF) bleaching and oxygen Delignification (ODL) are already in place,

which reduced the water consumption through counter current washing in

ClO2 bleaching stage.

Use of condensers from Recovery evaporator in causticizing section and

wet washing to minimize the fresh water consumption for wheat straw

washing.

S/R condensate water is used for straw washing

Using of PM # 2 back water in the following areas:

For wood log washing replacing fresh water

Replacing all hose pipe water

Floor cleaning

For PM #1 machine back water tank make up level

Continuous efforts should be made to reduce the water consumption and

thereby to reduce the wastewater generation. Periodic water audits should be

conducted to explore the possibilities for minimization of water consumption.

6.3.3.2 Wastewater Treatment

Wastewater quantity will be increased from existing level of 21,440 m3/day to

27420 m3/day after expansion program. Additional effluent generated from the

plant will be treated in the existing Effluent Treatment Plant by installing

additional equipment to handle the additional load. Modification of existing

primary clarifier, addition of one more UASB reactor of capacity 6,000 m³/day

and installation of primary and secondary sludge decanters have been

considered as a part of the Mill Expansion Plan.

The WWTP shall be adequate to treat the wastewater generated with

additional facilities. The Adequacy of WWTP has been verified and the

adequacy is discussed below and the detailed mass balance of effluent

treatment scheme of the existing and expansion scenario is enclosed as

Annexure 26.


DEMO



Prepared by & C6-8

6.3.3.3 ETP Adequacy Report – Expansion Scenario

Basic Inputs:

The envisaged wastewater parameters after expansion program are as

follows:

High COD Effluent

Flow m3/day 9000

Total suspended Solids mg/l 1800

BOD mg/l 1100

COD mg/l 3500

Low COD Effluent:

Flow m3/day 27420

Total suspended Solids mg/l 1200

BOD mg/l 400

COD mg/l 1100

High COD Treatment Unit

Equalization tank

The size of the tank is found to be 45x22.5x3.5 metres. The retention time at

the equalization tank is 8 hrs and is found to be adequate.

Existing Bio-Clarifier

The existing bio-clarifier with a diameter of 12m is proposed to handle the

wastewater from both existing and expansion facilities. The estimated

retention time of 1.1 hrs is less than the desired value of 2.5 – 4hrs and thus is

not adequate for the expansion wastewater load. The estimated hydraulic

loading rate of 80m3/m2/day is also higher than the optimal design value of

50m3/m2/day. However the solids loading rate of 143Kg/m2/day is lesser than

the optimal peak design value of 150 Kg/m2/day. Hence the existing unit can

handle the additional loads.

Existing Buffer Tank

The existing buffer tank with a volume of 380m3 has a total retention time of

1.14hrs for the expansion load. The same is not adequate since at least 4 hrs

retention time is required at the buffer tank. The flow will be distributed on the

basis of available volume in the buffer tank. Thus the total retention time in the

existing buffer tanks will be in the order of 1.14hrs


DEMO



Prepared by & C6-9

Existing Up-flow Anaerobic Sludge Blanket Reactor (UASB):

To estimate the volume of UASB, the following design considerations have

been made:

Flow 9000 m3/day

Average Organic load 3.5 kg/m3.d

Effectiveness factor 0.85*1

Effluent COD: 3.5 kg/m3

The existing UASB having a volume of 4253m3 which is adequate to handle

the current load of 3724 Kg/day from Bio-Clarifier overflow. The same is not

adequate since the additional COD will be increased from 1100 mg/l to

3500mg/l. Thus it is been proposed to install another UASB of capacity

6000m3 to handle the additional COD load envisaged from the high COD

steam.

Existing Gas Holder

The existing gas holder with a volume of 198m3 is adequate to handle the

generated methane of 1433kg/day from existing UASB. Since there is an

increase in Methane generation in the order of 1640kg/day due to increased

COD loads it is proposed to install another gas holder.

Existing Collection pit

The existing collection pit with capacity and flow rate of 22000m3 and

17300m3/day respectively with the retention time of 31hr. whereas, after

expansion the flow rate is increased to 18420m3/day with the retention time of

29 hrs.

Primary Clarifier-1

The existing Primary Clarifier-1 having 24.8m dia and capacity of 1448m3 with

flow of 8650m3/day and retention time of 4 hrs, and will be able to handle

flow of 9210m3/day with retention time of 3.8 hrs after expansion. The

Hydraulic loading rate is 19m3/m2/day which is within the design range of 50

m3/m2/day. The sludge generation will be about 30m3/hr with 1.5%

consistency. Existing sludge pump capacity required is 43m3/hr where as 730

m3/hr sludge pump is provided.

Primary Clarifier-2

1 *value taken from Metcalf and Eddy


DEMO



Prepared by & C6-10

The Hydraulic loading rate will be in the order of 11m3/m2/day which is within

the design range of 50 m3/m2/day. The sludge generation will be about

30m3/hr with 1.5% consistency. Existing sludge pump capacity required is

43m3/hr where as 160m3/hr sludge pump is provided.

Aeration tank

To estimate the tank size required for aeration tank, the following design

considerations have been made:

Peak flow of Low COD m3/day 27420

wastewater

Peak Inlet BOD of Low COD mg/l 400

wastewater

MLVSS in the aeration tank – 1 mg/l 5500

MLVSS in the aeration tank – 2 mg/l 5000

F/M ratio considered 0.5

Sludge recycling capacity required for the secondary clarifier after mill

expansion plant is 426m3/hr whereas the capacity of sludge pump is only

300m3/hr. Thus it is recommended to install higher pump capacity of about

500 m3/hr. The total oxygen requirement is estimated to be 491kg/hr as

against the total current supply capacity of 360kg/hr by the surface aerators.

Pure oxygen system has been installed in the existing aeration tank to

augment the oxygen supply in the aeration tank. Since installing surface

aerators in the existing aeration tank is not feasible, diffused aerator may be

considered as an alternative system to augment the oxygen needs in the

aeration tank.

Existing Secondary Clarifier

Existing capacity of Secondary Clarifier is 4800m3 with retention time of

8.2hrs. Such higher retention time would lead to septic conditions. Hydraulic

loading rate is estimated as 10.2m3/m2/day which is within the design range of

15 m3/m2/day and Solids loading rate will be 12.2 kg/m2/day, which is also

within the design intent.

New Secondary Clarifier

Capacity of proposed new Secondary clarifier is 942m3 with retention time of

8.4 hrs with Hydraulic loading rate of 8.6 m3/m2/day and Solids loading rate at

23.1 kg/m2/day respectively.

The summary of the adequacy of the High COD stream and low COD stream

is given in Table 6.2 and Table 6.3


DEMO



Prepared by & C6-11

Table 6.2 : Adequacy and Augmentation of High COD Effluent Treatment

Stream

S No Unit Dimensions Volume

(m3)

Existing Adequacy Adequacy after

expansion

1 Equalization Tank

45x22x3.5 3566.6 Retention time: 8 hrs Retention time: Adequate

400 Retention time: Adequate 2.3 hrs is within the optimal design value of 2.5 to 4 hrs.

Retention time: Not Adequate 1.1 hrs is within the optimal design value design value of 2.5 to 4 hrs.

Hydraulic loading rate Adequate:37m

3/m

2/d

ay which is within the optimal design value of 50m

3/m

2/day

Hydraulic loading rate Not Adequate: 80m

3/m

2/day

2 Bio-Clarifier 12 m dia x 3.5 SWD

Solids loading rate Adequate: 66.9 kg/m

2/day

Solids loading rate Adequate:143.3kg/m

2/d

ay and can handle peak loads upto 150 kg/m

2/day

3 Buffer tank Existing

3(4x8x4) m SWD

380 2.4 hrs retention time

NA

4 Buffer tank Proposed

-- -- NA --

5 USAB Existing 26 m dia x 8 SWD

4253 Adequate: Methane generated:1433kg/d

NA

COD load:13034 kg/d

NA

6 USAB Proposed 31mx8 SWD 6000 NA Adequate: Methane generated:1644kg/d

NA COD load:14952 kg/d

6 Gas holder Existing

198 2.2 hrs retention time

NA

7 Gas holder Proposed

-- NA --

Table 6.3 : Adequacy and Augmentation Low COD Effluent Stream

S.No. Unit Dimensions Volume

m3

Existing Adequacy

Adequacy after Expansion

1 Collection pit 70 x70 x 4.5 22000 Retention time: Oversized: 30.59 hrs Design value: 8 hrs May lead to septic conditions

Retention time: Oversized: 28 hrs isDesign value : 8hrs

Retention time: Adequate 4 hrs is within the optimal design value of 2.5 to 4 hrs

Retention time: Adequate 3.8 hrs is within the optimal design value design value of 2.5 to 4 hrs

Hydraulic loading rate Adequate :22 m

3/ m

2/day optimal

design value: 50m

3/m

2/day

Hydraulic loading rate Not Adequate:28m

3/m

2/day optimal

design value : 50m

3/m

2/day

2 Primary Clarifier-1

24.8 m dia x 3. SWD

1448

Solids loading rate Solids loading rate


DEMO



Prepared by & C6-12

S.No. Unit Dimensions Volume

m3

Existing Adequacy

Adequacy after Expansion

Adequate: 26.7 kg/m

2/day

optimal design value upto: 100kg/m

2/day

Adequate:34.1 kg/m

2/day

optimal design value upto: 100kg/m

2/day

Sludge pump capacity required : 49m

3/hr

Existing Sludge pump capacity : 730m

3/hr

Sludge pump capacity required : 62m

3/hr

Existing Sludge pump capacity : 730 m

3/hr

Retention time: Oversized 5.4 hrs is above the optimal design value of 2.5 to 4 hrs and may lead to septic conditions

Retention time: Oversized 4.2 hrs is above the optimaldesign value of 2.5 to 4 hrsand may lead to septic conditions

Hydraulic loading rate Oversized :13m

3/m

2/day

Hydraulic loading rate Not Oversized : 17m

3/m

2/day

3 Primary Clarifier-2

31.92 m dia x 3m SWD

2412

Solids loading rate: 16 kg/m

2/day

Solids loading rate 20.5 kg/m

2/day

4 Aeration tank-1 &2

40 x15.8 x5 60x40x4.5

14400 Adequate: For the flow of 5666m

3/day

the total tank volume required is 9191m

3

Pure oxygen system has been installed in the existing aeration tank and additional diffused aeration systems will be installed, if required

Retention time: 7.4 hrs, design value of 2.5 to 4 hrs


Hydraulic loading rate Adequate : 11.2 m

3/m

2/day

optimal design value: 50m

3/m

2/day

Hydraulic loading rate Not Adequate:16.1 m

3/m

2/day

optimal design value : 50m

3/m

2/day

5 Secondary Clarifier Existing

42 m Dia x 3.5 mSWD

Solids loading rate : 12.3 kg/m

2/day

Solids loading rate : 19.4 kg/m

2/day


Hydraulic loading rate Not Oversized: 8.6 m

3/ m

2/day

6 Secondary Clarifier Proposed

942 NA

Solids loading rate 13.7 kg/m

2/day

6.3.3.4 Treated Wastewater Management

At present, the wastewater quality meets the Discharge standards. About

8700m3/day (within the permitted limit) of the waste water is being discharged

into the Dhanula drain and similar practices will be adopted after Mill

Expansion Plan.


DEMO



Prepared by & C6-13

The treated wastewater utilization plan after Mill Expansion Plan is presented

hereunder. It can be inferred from Table 6.4 that about 7000m3/day of excess

treated wastewater shall be utilized for irrigation. It has been estimated that

about 46 acres irrigated land (Paddy or wheat) shall be required to utilize the

excess treated wastewater. TLPD has acquired additional 30 acres of land

adjacent to the existing mill. In addition, TLPD has signed MoUs with local

farmers to utilize the treated wastewater in an area of 87 Acres.

Table 6.4: Treated Wastewater utilization Plan After Mill Expansion Plan

Plantation/greenbelt within lease area Ha 69

Treated wastewater after expansion m3/day 27420

Permitted discharge in drain m3/day 8700

ETP loss m3/day 400

Coal yard dust suppression usage m3/day 80

Conditioning of fly ash m3/day 21

Wastewater utilized in the existing 165 Acres of greenbelt and plantation within the existing mill area

m3/day 11332

Balance treated wastewater to be subjected to irrigation

m3/day 6888

Additional area required for utilizing the treated wastewater (irrigation needs @150m3/Acres/day)

Acres 46

Based on the treated wastewater quality data of the existing plant that the

maximum TDS levels in the treated wastewater didn’t exceed 1500mg/l and

the estimated Sodium Absorption Ratio (SAR) will be less than 5, which is well

within the safe SAR levels of “10” as suggested by Indian Council for

Agriculture Research Council. Hence the overall impacts due to disposal of

treated wastewater will be less significant.

6.3.4 Solid Waste Management

No major solid wastes are generated in the process. All the solid wastes

generated in the mill are from the auxiliary plants. They include lime sludge

from the recausticising section, ash from the boilers, sludge from the

wastewater treatment plant and straw dust from the pulp mill.

Based on the utilization of 100% Indian coal (40% ash coals), the total ash

generation from the facility after mill expansion plan has been estimated as

625T/day, whereas the actual ash generation from the boilers will be far less

than that of the above estimated levels due to utilization of blended coals

(imported and Indian coal) and bio-mass. Detailed ash generation calculations

are presented in Table 6.5. Dry ash handling facilities will be installed thereby

avoiding usage of water. Suitably designed fly ash silos will be installed.

TLPD has been disposing the fly ash to brick manufacturing and cement mills

through Tanya Enterprises. MOU for the supply of fly ash is presented in

Annexure 15.


DEMO



Prepared by & C6-14

Table 6.4 - Quantity of Ash generation after Mill Expansion

Fuels MEP Requirement,

TPA

MEP Consumpt

ion, tpd

Ash %

Ash generation

(tpd)

Bed ash %

Bed ash ,tpd

Fly ash %

Fly ash, tpd

Husk / Bio mass

2,21,000 605 12.5 34 10 3 90 31

Coal (imported)

1,09,000 299 12 16 20 3 80 13

Coal (local)

3,10,000 849 40 155 20 31 80 124

Pet coke 52,000 142 0.3 0.189 - - - -

Total 6,92,000 1896 38 205 38 168

The WWTP sludge will be given to small units to board manufacturing

facilities. The wood and straw dust generated will be used as fuel in boilers.

About 245 T/day of lime sludge will be processed in the existing lime-kiln after

mill expansion plan and about 185 T/day of burnt lime from the kiln will be

reused in the process and rejects from the Lime Kiln to the tune of 60T/day will

be disposed to cement manufacturing and brick kiln manufacturing units.

Except used oils from the mechanical and rotating equipment, no other

hazardous wastes will be generated from the facility. Used oil is being stored

in drums and sold to authorized used oil recycling vendors.

The quantity of the solid waste generated and the disposal method for the

existing and MEP is given below in Table 6.6.

Table 6.5 - MEP Solid Waste Generation and Disposal

Quantity (as per plant record), T/day S.No Source

Existing/ Pre MEP

Post MEP

Incremental Current Disposal

Method Post MEP disposal

method

1 Straw dry dust

20 26 6 Used as a fuel for boilers

Used as a fuel for boilers

2 Straw wet dust



3 Wood saw dust

5 6.5 1.5 Used as a fuel for boilers



25 32.4 6.9

Sold to board manufacturing units and also fired in the boilers in the existing Mill

Will be sold to Board manufacture and also fired in the boilers in the existing Mill


0.8

1.1 0.3

Being used as manure in the existing greencover area of the Mill

Will be used as Manure for greenbelt

6 Lime sludge 45 60 15

Sold to cement manufacturing

will be sold to cement


DEMO



Prepared by & C6-15

units through Tanya Enterprises.

manufacturing units

7 Fly ash

220

625 (estimate based on 40% ash

coals)

405

Sold to brick/cement manufacturing units through Tanya Enterprises.

Will be disposed to cement plants through Tanya Enterprises.

6.3.5 Storm Water Management

Runoff is one of the most important hydrologic parameter used in most of the

water resources applications. The predication of quantity and rate of runoff

from the land to the streams is very difficult and it requires more time for un

gauged watershed.

Rainfall, if it is not intercepted by vegetation of by artificial surfaces such as

roofs or pavements, falls on the earth and either evaporates, infiltrates or lies

in depression storage. When the loss arising in these ways is all provided for,

there may remain a surplus that, obeying the gravitation laws, flows over the

surface to the nearest stream channel. The streams coalesce into rivers and

the rivers find their way down to sea.

Runoff may consist of surface runoff, subsurface runoff and groundwater

runoff. Surface runoff is that part of runoff which travels over the ground

surface and through channels into the basin outlet. Groundwater runoff is a

portion of groundwater discharged into the streams.

Subsurface runoff (Interflow) is that part of precipitation which infiltrates the

surface soil and moves laterally through the upper soil horizons towards the

streams.

The surface runoff assessment is very essential to quantify the water that

flows out of the watershed. A portion of the surplus flow can be used for

conservation within the watershed. The runoff for the watersheds covering the

10km radius has been estimated based on rational method and presented

below.

The table showing the watershed wise runoff. The total runoff from the

watersheds of the study area is 35.839 MCM/year (Table 6.7).

Table 6.6 Watershed wise runoff

Micro watershed code Area in Sq.m Catchment yield in MCM

1 11.357 1.239

2 11.033 1.204

3 7.014 0.765

4 9.859 1.076

5 10.112 1.104

6 14.534 1.586

7 14.734 1.608

8 13.250 1.446

9 14.420 1.574

10 12.330 1.346


DEMO



Prepared by & C6-16

Micro watershed code Area in Sq.m Catchment yield in MCM

11 3.775 0.412

12 5.961 0.651

13 9.170 1.001

14 7.140 0.779

15 8.723 0.952

16 17.572 1.918

17 18.524 2.022

18 13.188 1.439

19 26.526 2.895

20 28.065 3.063

21 24.135 2.634

22 22.106 2.413

23 24.853 2.712

MCM: Million Cubic Meters

Figure 6.2 Watershed and the Catchment Yield of the Study area


DEMO



Prepared by & C6-17

The post project water shed management system will be designed to minimize

the potential for storm water contamination occurring at the site. This will be

achieved by incorporating the following features into the storm water

management system:

Run-off from upstream areas will be diverted around the plant site;


DEMO



Prepared by & C6-18

The quantity of contaminated run-off generated will be minimized by

diverting run-off from areas external to the plant to storm water

discharge points;

Run-off from area external to process areas of the plant will be contained

within a storage system.

For the rainwater harvesting within the project site, 10 years monthly normal

rainfall has been considered. The pre and post project runoff from the project

site is estimated based on Rational method. The Co-efficient used to estimate

the runoff from the different surfaces is as follows. The co-efficient are

considered are as per the MoEF and CGWA Guidelines.

Roof Area : 0.95

Asphalt and Paved Area : 0.85

Green Belt Area : 0.20

Open and Vacant Area : 0.30

Volume of rainwater that can be collected from the project site has been

estimated for the monthly normal rainfall. Vacant & Green belt area, Roof top

area and paved area of the project site have been separated for the run off

estimation and conservation measures have been suggested. The details of

various areas are presented in Table 6.8.

Table 6.7 Details of Plant Area

Description Plant Area in Sq.m

Roof Area including ETP 14900

Asphalt / Paved area 2000

Green belt, Lawn and Vacant area 20000

Open area including Storage Yard 40000

Total Area 76900

6.3.5.1. Pre-construction Runoff

Rational method has been used to estimate the runoff for the project site. The

theoretical estimates of runoff from undisturbed land, the volume of water that

is being generated after natural recharge could be about 8392 Cum/Year. The

calculation is presented in the form of Table 6.9

Table 6.8 Pre Project Runoff (Theoretical Estimate)


DEMO



Prepared by & C6-19

Month Rainfall

(mm) Area in Sq.m

Runoff Coefficient

Monthly Pre Project Runoff in Cum

January 7.75 76900 0.3 179

February 21.18 76900 0.3 489

March 11.42 76900 0.3 263

April 10.94 76900 0.3 252

May 6.78 76900 0.3 156

June 51.72 76900 0.3 1193

July 112.95 76900 0.3 2606

August 64.53 76900 0.3 1489

September 68.75 76900 0.3 1586

October 3.59 76900 0.3 83

November 0.05 76900 0.3 1

December 4.11 76900 0.3 95

Total Annual Pre Project Runoff in Cum 8392

6.3.5.2. Post-construction Run off

The same rainfall and the land area have been taken up for the estimation of

runoff for the prediction from the Mill Site. As the existing Mill Site is a build up

land, the natural recharge that had taken place during the pre-construction

period would not occur and hence there would be meager infiltration. The

losses such as, Percolation, evaporation and other unforeseen loses has been

considered. Runoff from different surfaces for a fully developed Mill Site is

given in Table 6.10

Table 6.9 Post Project Runoff (Existing Scenario)

Month Rainfall in mm

Runoff Roof area

Cum

Runoff Asphalt /

Paved area Cum

Runoff Green belt area Cum

Runoff Open area

Cum

Total Monthly Runoff, Cum

January 7.75 109.70 13 31 93 247

February 21.18 299.80 36 85 254 675

March 11.42 161.65 19 46 137 364

April 10.94 154.86 19 44 131 348

May 6.78 95.97 12 27 81 216

June 51.72 732.10 88 207 621 1648

July 112.95 1598.81 192 452 1355 3598

August 64.53 913.42 110 258 774 2056

September 68.75 973.16 117 275 825 2190

October 3.59 50.82 6 14 43 114

November 0.05 0.71 0 0 1 2

December 4.11 58.18 7 16 49 131TOTAL 363.77 5149 618 1455 4365 11588

Total Predicted Annual Runoff from Different Surfaces in Cum 11588

Total Predicted Post project runoff from the project site – 11588 Cum/Year

6.3.5.3. Rain Water Harvesting System

There is lot of surface and subsurface recharging measures available

depending upon the site conditions. The specific recharge measures should

be selected depending on the soil characteristics, lithology and nature of the

aquifer material, pre and post monsoon ground water level and so on. The


DEMO



Prepared by & C6-20

average ground water level in the Study area various between 22.4 m (Pre-

monsoon) and 19.6 m (Post monsoon), which clearly indicates that the ground

water level in the study area is deep. As the ground water level is deep,

proposal for roof top collection. Storage cum percolation pond with recharge

shaft with bore well has been contemplated.

According to the slope of the roof the sump location has been identified. The

roof area and the normal monthly rainfall have been considered for designing

the capacity of the sump.

The estimation of runoff from the project site has been assessed. Based on

vacant, roof top area and the monthly rainfall and runoff, the storage

structures and percolation pond with recharge tube well have been

contemplated.

6.3.5.4. Rain water Conservation Measures

Roof top collection:

The roof water collection is estimated as 4364 CUM/Year

3 sumps with a total capacity of 900 CUM have been suggested to capture

the roof water. Each sump size is 10m X 10m X 3m

The rainwater that is been generated from the roof is proposed to pass

through a filter media. The proposed filter media is multiplayer vertical filters.

The size of the filter media is as follows:

The size of the multiplayer vertical filter is 2m X 2m X 0.9m

The outlet pipes from the roof area are connected with 115 mm dia PVC

pipe allowing the water to pass through the filter media before storing in the

sump

Run off coefficient for Rainwater Harvesting scheme for the proposed site is

given Table 6.11 and quantity of rain water to be harvested is given in Table

6.12

Table 6.10 Run Off Coefficients for Rainwater Harvesting Scheme

Location Area (sq m) Runoff Coefficient

Total Roof Area 14900 0.95Description Units Quantity

Actual Sump Capacity CUM 900

Harvestable water CUM 5149

Water harvested CUM 4364


DEMO



Prepared by & C6-21

Surplus outflow from Sump CUM 785

Table 6.11 Quantity of Rain Water to Be Harvested

Month Rain fall (mm) Harvestable Water (CUM)

Sump Storage (CUM)

Surplus out flow from Sump

(CUM)

January 7.75 110 110 0

February 21.18 300 300 0

March 11.42 162 162 0

April 10.94 155 155 0

May 6.78 96 96 0

June 51.72 732 732 0

July 112.95 1599 900 699

August 64.53 913 900 13

September 68.75 973 900 73

October 3.59 51 51 0

November 0.05 1 1 0

December 4.11 58 58 0

Total 363.77 5149 4364 785

Storage cum Percolation Pond:

The surplus runoff after roof top collection and from the green belt, asphalt

area has been estimated for Plant area

Surplus runoff after roof top collection – 785 CUM/Year

Runoff from Asphalt area - 618 CUM/Year

Runoff from Green belt area - 1455 CUM/Year

Runoff from Open area - 4365 CUM/Year

Total runoff - 7323 CUM/Year

Rainwater harvesting can be effected by way of Storage cum percolation pond

with recharge shaft with bore well

2 ponds are proposed within the project site to capture the runoff and the

details of the pond is given below in Table 6.13


DEMO



Prepared by & C6-22

Table 6.12 Dimensions and Capacity of Pond

S.No Description Size in m Capacity in CUM

1 Pond 1 40mX30mX2.5m 3000

2 Pond 2 40mX30mX2.5m 3000

Total Capacity 6000

The total capacity of the pond is 6000 CUM/Year

The rainwater from the above area is proposed to take to the storage pond

through unlined open channel with a width of 0.5 m

The storage cum Percolation pond collection is estimated as 7224 CUM /

Year

Evaporation losses (monthly evaporation has been considered – 20-40%)

are estimated as 2073 CUM/Year.

Quantity of water added to the ground water reservoir (20% of the stored

quantity) from the storage / percolation with recharge bore well is

estimated as 1030 CUM/Year.

The surplus from the storage pond is proposed to let out through the

natural stream

Recharge shaft with bore well to a depth of 100 m is recommended in the

Storage cum percolation pond. The size of the recharge shaft may 5m

length X 5width and 3m depth.

In the center of the recharge shaft a bore well with a dia of 6 inches may

to drilled and perforated pipes are inserted to facilitate the vertical and

horizontal movement of ground water. The Recharge shaft with bore well

not only recharges the shallow water table aquifer but also the deeper

aquifer.

The summary of the rain water harvesting system is given in Table 6.14

Table 6.13 Summary of Rain Water Harvesting

Predicted Total Pre Project Runoff CUM/Year 8392

Predicted Total Post Project Runoff CUM/Year 11588

Predicted excess runoff during Post Project Period CUM/Year 3196

Roof Water Harvesting

Capacity of the Sump (10mX10mX3m) 3 Sumps (900 Cum) Cum 900

Rainwater harvested through Roof Top collection (Estimated) CUM/Year 4364Storage cum Percolation Pond

Pond size (40mX30mX2.5m) 42 Ponds (6000 CUM) CUM 6000

Water stored in the Pond (Estimated) CUM/Year 7224

Evaporation Losses (Estimated) CUM/Year 2073

Quantity of water added to the ground water reservoir (Estimated) 20 % CUM/Year 1030

Water available in the pond after evaporation and infiltration (Estimated) CUM/Year 4121

Total Harvested Quantity of Rainwater (Storage Pond) CUM/Year 5151

Total Rainwater harvested in the Project Site (Roof Top + Storage cum Percolation Pond (Estimated)

CUM/Year 9515

Percentage water harvested from the Predicted Post Project Runoff %age 82


DEMO



Prepared by & C6-23

6.3.4 Ecology and Biodiversity Management Plan

Extensive plantation has been done under green cover development for the

existing plant. Green cover has been developed and well maintained along the

internal roads and mill area. The mill has made elaborate arrangement in

developing green cover inside the mill.

The mill has sound management practices, in harmony with nature, by

greening of wastelands, which helps in mitigating green house gases and

sequestration of carbon, expanding the plantations for improving the soil

moisture conservation measures and checking soil erosion and planting

species of Subabul and Casuarina contributing to the improvement of soil

nutrient status of marginal lands.

TLPD have already developed thick greenbelt of nearly 165 Acres. Wide

variety of native as well as exotic species was observed in greenbelt. Flora

was dominated by Casuarina equisetifolia, Terminalia arjuna, Lagerstomia

parviflora, Azadiracta indica, Bignonia spp, Delonix regia and Alstonia

scholaris. These species are suitable to attenuate impacts arising due to

emissions. In entire study area, maximum diversity of flora was observed

inside plant due to extensive greenbelt development. Diversity indices of plant

site are given in following Table 6.15 and the photos of the existing green

cover in mill is given in Figure 6.3 to Figure 6.6.

Table 6.14 Diversity Indices of Plant Site

Region Margalef Index

Shannon Index

Simpson Index

Project Site 3.22 2.77 0.93

Agriculture area within 5 km 2.52 2.28 0.87

Agriculture area within 10 km 2.49 2.25 0.87


DEMO



Prepared by & C6-24

Figure 6.3 Existing Green Cover in Mill


DEMO



Prepared by & C6-25



DEMO



Prepared by & C6-26



DEMO



Prepared by & C6-27



DEMO



Prepared by & C6-28


DEMO



Prepared by & C6-29

6.3.4.1 Action plan for Enhancement of Ecology through CSR activities

Present greenbelt was found to be adequate to mitigate impacts of additional

SO2 emissions. However, it is recommended that the greenbelt cover shall be

made denser using indigenous species like Peltophorum pterocarpum,

Alestonia scholaris, Ficus religiosa, Samania saman and Azardirachta indica.

Increased canopy cover will not only act as pollution sink but also will provide

suitable nesting and rousting sites for avifauna.

A plant nursery shall be developed within plant premises to raise the saplings

of these trees. Saplings grown in nursery shall be provided to local villagers to

plant on field banks and along the roads. This activity will significantly increase

the green cover in villages like Dhaula, Channa, Dhurkot, Pakhho, Dhanaula

and Handiya. Maximum care should be taken to avoid species like Delonix

and Eucalyptus, since these trees depletes ground water level rapidly.

Planting trees on field banks will further prevent impacts of emissions and

particulate matter on crops.

6.3.4.2 Action Plan for Wetland Management

It was observed that all water bodies in study area were affected by high

degree of eutrophication. This could be attributed to domestic and agricultural

runoff in water bodies. The quality of aquatic ecology can be enhanced by

restricting entry of excess nutrients in water. Under CSR activities, adequate

sanitation facilities should be provided to villagers so as to prevent the runoff.

Aquatic weeds shall be removed from lakes before flowering season. This will

help to increase dissolved oxygen in lakes and gradually enhance the ecology.

6.3.4.3 Action plan for Ecology Enhancement through Social Forestry

The Forest Department of Punjab has been implementing forestry programs in

accordance with the National Forest Policies of 1952 and 1988, Joint Forest

Management (JFM) notification, 1990, and National Forestry Action

Programme (NFAP). To create synergy among local, regional and national

efforts to protect, conserve and manage forest resources on a sustainable

basis Forest Dept has formulated forest policy. As per policy, Village and

community lands should be taken up for the development of arboriculture and

fodder resources. Technical assistance and other incentives necessary for

initiating such programs shall be provided under CSR activities. The revenue

generated under such program should be given to concerned Panchayats and

communities `as an incentive to them and solicit their cooperation and

participation.

Awareness on agro-forestry models involving trees, agricultural crops and/or

medicinal herbs, shrubs and climbers should be created among farmers.

Individuals and panchayats should also be motivated to undertake tree


DEMO



Prepared by & C6-30

farming and grow fodder plants, grasses and medicinal plants on their own

land.

6.3.4.4 Ecological Monitoring

A separate horticulture division should be formed to develop nursery and

monitor plantation activity in study area. Activities such as distribution of

saplings to farmers, arranging awareness drives about agro-forestry,

monitoring of lakes’ ecology shall be undertaken on regular basis.

6.3.5 Occupational Health Facility

The existing OHC facilities should be made available round the clock for

attending to emergency arising out of accidents, if any. TLPD is equipped

with a full fledged Occupational Health Centre within the factory premises.

OHC is manned by a qualified Medical Officer supported with four para

medical staff. Detailed occupational helath facilities in the plant is given in

chapter 2 of the report.

6.3.6 Corporate Social Responsibility initiatives at TLPD

TLPD has always lived up to its commitment to the community with focus not

just on commercial aspect but also on the society they live in. Every social

initiative undertaken by TLPD was started with a profound sense of

responsibility and thought behind it.

The key objective behind introducing environment friendly initiatives is to

ensure safer, healthier and pleasant environment in their working area as well

as in the society they operate in.

TLPD has pioneered, Community Development by establishing Takshashila –

a centre of excellence where skills are imparted to the youth in order to

enhance their employability. TLPD believes that as and organisation, the best

way to contribute to the community is through quality education and

with its Takshashila venture in collaboration with IL&FS, they aim to

accomplish that.

TLPD has time and again conducted walk-ins for Class 10th/ ITI/ Diploma

Holders for both men and women and is the largest employment generator in

and around Barnala, Punjab. These initiatives serve the dual purpose of

placement of qualified candidates and the organisation’s skill requirement.

TLPD also believes in sharing generous monetary contributions with various

agencies such as Red Cross Society and educational institutions for men and

women in Barnala which directly impact the services provided to the people in

this area of Punjab. With many more such initiatives, it is TLPD’s constant

endeavour to develop a culture of giving back to the society and help

create a better future for all Stakeholders.


DEMO



Prepared by & C6-31

At TLPD, all current social Initiatives have emerged as a result of an identified

need for economic growth and community development in and around

Barnala, Punjab and now in Budni, Madhya Pradesh too. As one of the largest

employment generators in these areas, TLPD recognised the dearth of:

Female empowerment

Green manufacturing ideas

Skill development

Educational infrastructure

Medical facilities

Environment awareness

To address the above mentioned concerns, TLPD has started and sustained

various initiatives such as female employment through walk-ins, tie-ups with

IL&FS for skill development and employability enhancement, active

participation in development of Sacred Heart Convent School in Barnala,

education allowance for children of operatives, free medical camps for eye,

skin, vaccination, leprosy etc in Barnala. Besides these, regular environment

awareness and tree plantation drives are conducted each year. On the social

awareness front, all new recruits in TLPD engage themselves in CSR activities

as part of their induction process. They visit the nearby villages and educate

the village folk about prevalent social issues such as female feticide and old

age care. The detailed Social impacts assessment report is enclosed as

Annexure 27 and the list of NGO’s around the study area and the government

schemes is enclosed in Annexure 27.

6.3.5.1 Existing CSR Activities Carried out by Trident Group.

Education & Training through Takshashila

Skill School SHVTI - Skill development and employment of surrounding

villages. On-the-job training, stipend and part time job opportunities during

schooling. Employment opportunity is given after the successful completion of

the course. Current training programs are SMO (Sewing Machine Operators),

Electricians, Computer Operators.

Skill School IL&FS

Skill development and employment opportunities are given for surrounding

villages and States. On the job training, part time job opportunities during

schooling and reimbursement of fees after employment. Currently running


DEMO



Prepared by & C6-32

trades are - SMO, GC (Garment Checker). Conducted half day workshop (5

hours) at Sacred Heart School for staff members on 5S and Kaizen at School

Employee Welfare

The organization pays special attention to ensure the families of the

employees get together and interact socially. TLPD believes that the feeling of

pride/ownership within the family is imperative for the employee's stability.

Further, in a non-metro location like Hoshangabad, where sources of

entertainment are minimal, it is more so important that the families bond

together. A Ladies Club has been formed which is chaired by the First Lady

Mrs. Seema Dinesh Mittal. The club meets on the second Saturday of every

month.

Woman Empowerment

TLPD believes in empowering and encouraging its female members. It is the

first organization in Madhya Pradesh to have acquired a legal sanction to carry

on night shift for females. Special recruitment drives are conducted for female

members only.

1. Empowering our Women – ASMITA

2. Employment for 3000+ Female Members

3. Within Campus Accommodation for 1200+ Female Members

4. First Plant in North India to start Night Shift for Female Members

5. 30% of workforce comprises women

6. Hostels within the factory premises for female workers

7. To provide computer education, home science, health care food

reservation and other vocational courses to women

8. Free Stitching classes for the wives of the employees

Rural Development

80% of our shop floor operators belong to the local and adjacent rural areas.

The existing textile factory along with the upcoming towel and sheeting plants

are a great source of employment and upliftment for the people of this region.

The company makes special efforts to conduct as well as visit job fairs in the

remotest areas in order to source the really needy people.

Others

1. Installed a water cooler in ITI Barnala Boy’s & Girl’s hostels

2. 10 hearing impaired persons have been selected from Deaf school

Barnala for job at TLPD Yarn SNG.


DEMO



Prepared by & C6-33

3. 35 poorest people (under Punjab Govt. scheme) are selected for

employment at TLPD

4. Organizing Blood Donation Camps and Health Camps

5. Rain Water Harvesting

6. Village Cluster Adoption With 200 villages and more than 71000 acres

of land and 2000 farmers in Punjab

7. Technical guidance to farmers in better management crop practices &

techniques

8. Generation of Direct employment – 10,000 families

9. Indirect Employment – 20,000 families

10. Sourcing raw material locally, within the radius of 250 km

Green Initiative at TLPD-

1. Started working on paperless office

2. Reducing specific water, power & steam consumption by 2% on YOY

basis

3. More than 5000 plantations in nearby villages and within the plant

6.3.5.2 Felt Needs and Existing Social Issues

Women empowerment is the necessary as a social initiative to increase the

sex ratio in the study area.

Generating Employment generation activity to increase the rate of working

group population.

Economic development programs to decrease the rate of BPL Population

as the rate of BPL Population ranges as low as 3.9% to high as 51.2% in

the study area

Pollution Controlling measures to be taken on parameters especially on Air,

Water and Wastewater discharged for irrigation, ensuring the health and

safety of the locals

Health Awareness programs on Instructional Birth and Vaccinations


DEMO



Prepared by & C6-34

Improvement of Sanitation facilities by constructing and mainitaing the

facilities by providing sustenance funds regularly.

Education development programs especially on encouraging the women

education.

6.3.5.3 Proposed Programs under CSR

The proposed CSR programs are based on the felt needs and study area

socioeconomic indicators along with the specific development other CSR

programs can be included by studying the output of the implementation of the

CSR programs and based on the needs of the villagers. The proposed CSR

Programs can be grouped into the following subheadings.

Health Promotions Programs

Health Camps and Health Awareness programs

Health Awareness programs

Mobile Clinic

Mobile Veterinary Clinic

Awareness programs on Cancer

Education Promotion Programs

Developing School Infrastructure like Drinking water Facilities,

Sanitation facilities and providing supplies etc.

Providing scholarship programs

Sport Coaching centre

Girl Children Education promotion drive

Economic Development Programs

Knowledge centre regarding various government schemes and

latest technology

Skill Development Training Programs

Women Empowerment

Animal Husbandry

Sanitation Promotion Programs

Construction and Maintenance of Sanitation complex

Infrastructure development Programs


DEMO



Prepared by & C6-35

Developing internal roads of villages

Developing drainage systems

Construction / Maintenance of Community Halls

Renovating Community ponds/lakes

6.3.5.4 Village Specific CSR Implementation Matrix

Village specific suggested community development plan is presented in Table

6.16 and the CSR Budget is given in Table 617. CSR Implementation trend for

the year 2010 to 2012 is given in Figure 6.7

Figure 6.7 CSR Implementation trend for the year 2010 to 2012

Table 6.15 Proposed Village Specific CSR Implementation Matrix

S No Programs Channa Dhaula Handiya Dhanaula

Khurd Khuddi Khurd

1 Health Promotions Programs HI RE HI RE HI RE HI RE HI RE 2 Education Promotion

Programs HI RE HI RE HI RE RE RE

3 Economic development Programs

RE RE RE HI RE RE

4 Sanitation Promotion Programs

RE RE OP RE RE

5 Infrastructure development Programs

HI RE HI RE HI RE OP OP

Note: HI RE- Highly Recommended, RE- Recommended, OP- Optional


DEMO



Prepared by & C6-36

Table.6.16 Proposed CSR Budget

Budget (Rs. in Lakhs) S No CSR Programs Year 1 Year 2 Year 3 Year 4 Year 5 Total

1 Health Promotions Programs

26.4 39.6 52.8 79.2 66 264

2 Education Promotion Programs

17.6 26.4 35.2 52.8 44 176

3 Economic Development Programs

13.2 19.8 26.4 39.6 33 132


8.8 13.2 17.6 26.4 22 88


22 33 44 66 55 220

Total 88 132 176 264 220 880

Note: 2% of the Project cost is allocated for CSR development plan.

6.3.5.5 Village Specific Infrastructure Development Programs

The below mentioned (Table 6.18) infrastructure development programs are

proposed based on the observations during the study and based on the study

indicators. In this scheme priority is given to the villages nearby the project site

only. The CSR implementation can be expanded to the other villages in the

study area in the later stage.

Table.6.17 – Proposed Village Specific Infrastructure Development

Programs

..S.No Village Facilitates Programs

1 Channa

Irrigation facilities can be renovated and maintained regularly.


DEMO



Prepared by & C6-37


2 Channa

Internal Village roads can be renovated and Drainage Systems can be developed wherever necessary.

3 Channa, Dhaula, Handiya, Dhanaula , Khuddi Khurd

Mobile Clinic can be introduced to the villages conducting frequent medical checkups and camps.


Safe Drinking water Facility and Maintenance at Schools

5 Channa Handiya Dhaula

Erecting Solar Street lights in village internal roads


DEMO



Prepared by & C6-38



Community Plantation along the banks of the road and Canals.

7 Handiya

Internal Village roads can be renovated and Drainage Systems can be developed wherever necessary.

8 Handiya

Maintenance of Drinking water Facility structures

9 Handiya

Irrigation facilities can be renovated and maintained regularly.


DEMO



Prepared by & C6-39


10 Handiya

Renovation of Community ponds and Water Bodies

11 Khudi Kalan

Renovation of Community ponds and Water Bodies

6.4 Environmental Monitoring Plan

Regular monitoring of environmental parameters is of immense importance to

assess the status of environment during plant operation. With the knowledge

of baseline conditions, the monitoring program will serve as an indicator for

any deterioration in environmental conditions due to operation of the project,

to enable taking up suitable mitigatory steps in time to safeguard the

environment. Monitoring is as important as that of control of pollution since

the efficiency of control measures can be determined only by monitoring.

In order to demonstrate compliance to conditions stipulated by MoEF/PPCB,

monitoring of parameters in the treated effluent discharge, emissions from

stack, periodical Ambient Air Quality and Noise level monitoring are also being

carried out by the TLPD and analysis results are also submitted regularly to

the Punjab Pollution Control Board and the Regional Office of MoEF.

6.4.1 Environmental Monitoring and Reporting Procedure

Monitoring shall ensure that commitments are being met. This may take the

form of direct measurement and recording of quantitative information, such as

amounts and concentrations of discharges, emissions and wastes, for

measurement against corporate or statutory standards, consent limits or

targets. It may also require measurement of ambient environmental quality in


DEMO



Prepared by & C6-40

the vicinity of a site using ecological/biological, physical and chemical

indicators. Monitoring may include socio-economic interaction, through local

liaison activities or even assessment of complaints.

6.4.1.1 Objectives of Monitoring

The objectives of environmental post-project monitoring are to:

Verify the effectiveness of planning decisions

Measure the effectiveness of operational procedures

Ensure statutory and corporate compliance

Identify unexpected changes.

6.4.1.2 Monitoring Schedule

Environmental monitoring schedules are prepared covering various phases of

project advancement, such as construction phase and regular operational

phase.

Monitoring Schedule during Constructional Phase

The construction activities require mobilisation of construction material and

equipment. The environmental monitoring that needs to be undertaken during

project construction stage are given in Table 6.19

Table 6.18 - Environmental Monitoring During Project Construction Stage

Environmental Component

Monitoring Type Monitoring Location

Monitoring Frequency

Internal Reporting Frequency

Air Environment AAQ monitoring – 4 parameters viz. PM10, PM2.5, NO2 and SO2

2 locations; upstream and downstream

24 hrs sampling, twice a month

Quarterly

Noise Environment Equivalent Noise levels dB(A)

Site boundaries

Monthly Incident Reporting when necessary

Flora and Fauna Status of green belt Site Monthly Monthly

Monitoring Schedule during Operational Phase

The following monitoring program will be implemented for the proposed MEP

based on baseline data compliances for environmental clearance conditions

and regular permits from PPCB/MoEF are given in Table 6.20


DEMO



Prepared by & C6-41

Table 6.19 Environmental Monitoring Programmes during Operation

Phase

Environmental Component

Monitoring Type Monitoring Location

Monitoring/recording Frequency

On-line Measurement of particulates, SO2 and NOx

Final stack Continuous

Emission testing by external MOEF approved testing agency

Final stack Half yearly basis

AAQ 5 km radius from the site

24 hrs sampling Twice a week on half yearly basis

Meteorological station At site Hourly basis

Air Environment

Personal dust sampling near coal handling areas

At site Periodical sampling

Noise Level Measurement At site Monthly

Noise Level Measurement At equipment location

Half-yearly

Noise Environment

Noise Level measurement At plant boundary

Monthly

Influent and treated wastewater for pH, TSS, TDS, BOD, COD and residual chlorine

At site lab Daily

Log book At treated waste recycling areas including green-cover

Daily

Water Environment

Water Audit At ETP/STP Annually

Monitoring of green cover development

Treated wastewater reuse areas

Quarterly Flora and Fauna

Monitoring of test wells near the ash storage area

Near ETP and treated wastewater utilisation areas

Half yearly

Solid & Hazardous Waste

Inventory Plant Monthly

6.5 Environmental Management Cell

The existing facilities and organization for environmental management cell

shall be utilized for the proposed facilities also. Environmental Management

Cell is headed by MD of the TLPD supported by Chief Sustainability Officer,

EHS, Risk Audit and EHS, Compliance) A dedicated team of qualified

personnel and suitable is supporting the official in implementing and

monitoring the environmental management programmes. Typical structure of

the environmental cell is detailed given in Chapter 2.

6.6 Budgetary Cost Estimates for Environmental Management

The estimated total cost of the proposed project is Rs.440 Crores. Under the

project, about Rs.81 Crores is allocated towards pollution control equipment,

implementation of environmental pollution control measures and

environmental management programmes. Break-up of the budget for the


DEMO



Prepared by & C6-42

proposed MEP environmental management programmes are presented in

Table 6.21

Table 6.20 Budget for Environmental Management Plan

Description Budget Capital (Rs. Cr)

Additional Operating Cost

Rs. Cr.

Augmentation of Chemical recovery section

64 -

New power boiler – ESP, stack, online emission monitoring systems, Dust collection systems and water sprinkler systems at coal yard

8 0.5

Augmentation of ETP 3 0.9

Upgrading safety systems 0.2 0.1

Environmental monitoring programs including Operating cost of pollution control systems

3 0.1

Greenbelt-irrigation 3 0.5

Total 81.2 2.1


DEMO


Chapter 7– Risk Assessment Study

Prepared by & C7‐1

7. RISK ASSESSMENT STUDY AND RISK MITIGATION MEASURES

7.1. Introduction

According to the specific items 65 and 66 of the Terms of Reference (ToR)

issued for the project, preliminary hazard identification and risk assessment

was undertaken to quantify the possible fire and occupational health risks

associated with the operation of the project at the designated location. The

good engineering practices suggested by the Central Pollution Control Board

for risk assessment in industries (CPCB document Probes/133/2009-10) and

CPR-18E risk assessment procedures' guidelines which are widely accepted

by the Ministry of Environment and Forests (MoEF) India, have been adopted

while assessing the residual risks associated with the operations of the project

with specific reference to fire hazards, chemical exposure hazards,

occupational hazards and natural hazards.

As part of the risk assessment, a preliminary review on the hazardous

materials and chemicals proposed to be handled at the site were reviewed

and the storage capacities and design features of such hazardous materials

were also reviewed while assessing the residual risks. Occupational health

hazards such as exposure to dust emissions, thermal stress and work-zone

levels were also studied. Qualitative analysis of risks associated with natural

hazards such as earth quakes, floods and cyclones were also undertaken.

Based on the findings of the risk assessment study, a preliminary risk

management plan has been developed as per the applicable rules and

guidelines; wherever possible, good engineering and management practices

are suggested to minimise any intolerable risks.

7.2. Risk Assessment Methodology

Hazard identification and risk assessment involves a series of steps as

follows:

Step 1: Identification of the Hazard

Hazard Identification is a critical step in Risk Analysis. Many aids are

available, including experience, engineering codes, checklists, detailed

process knowledge, equipment failure experience, hazard index techniques,

What-if Analysis, Hazard and Operability (HAZOP) Studies, Failure Mode and

Effects Analysis (FMEA), and Preliminary Hazard Analysis (PHA). In this

phase all potential incidents are identified and tabulated. Site visit and study of

operations and documents like drawings, process write-up etc are used for

hazard identification.


DEMO




Step 2: Assessment of the Risk

Consequence Estimation is the methodology used to determine the potential

for damage or injury from specific incidents. A single incident (e.g. rupture of a

pressurized flammable liquid tank) can have many distinct incident outcomes,

(e.g. Thermal radiation due to Pool fire). Likelihood assessment is the

methodology used to estimate the frequency or probability of occurrence of an

incident. Estimates may be obtained from historical incident data on failure

frequencies or from failure sequence models, such as fault trees and event

trees. In this study the historical data developed by software models and those

collected by CPR18E – Committee for Prevention of Disasters, Netherlands

(Edition: PGS 3, 2005) are used. Risks arising from the hazards are evaluated

for its tolerability to personnel, the facility and the environment. The

acceptability of the estimated risk must then be judged based upon criteria

appropriate to the particular situation.

Step 3: Elimination or Reduction of the Risk

This involves identifying opportunities to reduce the likelihood and/or

consequence of an accident Where deemed to be necessary. Risk

Assessment combines the consequences and likelihood of all incident

outcomes from all selected incidents to provide a measure of risk. The risk of

all selected incidents are individually estimated and summed to give an overall

measure of risk. Risk-reduction measures include those to prevent incidents

(i.e. reduce the likelihood of occurrence) to control incidents (i.e. limit the

extent and duration of a hazardous event) and to mitigate the effects (i.e.

reduce the consequences). Preventive measures, such as using inherently

safer designs and ensuring asset integrity, should be used wherever

practicable. In many cases, the measures to control and mitigate hazards and

risks are simple and obvious and involve modifications to conform to standard

practice. The general hierarchy of risk reducing measures is:

Prevention (by distance or design)

Detection (e.g. fire and gas, Leak detection)

Control (e.g. emergency shutdown and controlled depressurization)

Mitigation (e.g. fire fighting and passive fire protection)

Emergency response (in case safety barriers fail)

The current study is limited to evaluation of risk associated with the

Flammable inventory in the furnace oil tank farm area.


DEMO




7.2.1. Fire Risk Assessment of Fuel oil Storage Facilities

Unlike other process industries, the proposed project does not handle any

major flammable materials except small quantities of furnace oil for the

operation of the stand-by diesel generator and boiler start up conditions. The

raw materials such as ready pulp and waste paper do not fall under fire hazard

goods classification. The project will be handling significant quantities of coal

which is a combustible material. Apart from the above, small quantities of

combustible materials such as lube oils and latex and synthetic thickeners will

be used in the Mill, which will be received in sealed drums and will be stored

at dedicated locations in the stores as per the National Building Codes.

Based on the preliminary analysis, the major fire hazards envisaged are from

storage and handling of furnace oil at the Mill site. A preliminary risk

assessment study was undertaken to establish the possible heat radiation

effects due to accidental fires at the furnace oil storage tanks.

Small quantities of Diesel, to the tune of 200 ltrs, will be stored in drums at a

secured location. A 280 kl and 50 kl furnace oil storage tank is installed to

store the existing quantity of 9100 kla and after MEP about 4600 kla of furnace will

be used and it will be stored in the existing tank with dedicated dyke as per the

factories rules and acts and National Building Safety Codes. Dykes will be

designed to hold at least 110% quantity of the storage tank to retain any

accidental spills and full-bore rupture of the tanks.

Diesel and furnace oil fall under Class 3b and Class 3c combustible material

as per NFPA (National Fire Protection Agency, USA) and Occupational Safety

and Health Administration (OSHA, USA). Hence, these fuels will undergo only

pool fire scenario in the presence of any ignition source. Since the quantity of

diesel proposed to be stored will be very small the associated risks with

storage of diesel will be insignificant. Hence no further risk assessment study

of diesel storage is considered under this study.

In order to assess the heat radiation from the pool fire scenario of accidental

spills from furnace oil (full bore rupture of the storage tank), consequence

modeling was undertaken using SAFETI software, which is recommended by

Ministry of Environment and Forests, India. For the purpose of the

consequence modeling, it has been assumed that due to mechanical failure of

the tank, entire inventory of the furnace will be retained in the dyke. In the

presence of external fire such as electrical fire or vehicular exhaust sparks etc,

the contents in the dyke will catch fire and release thermal energy.


DEMO




Figure 7.1 Overview of Risk Assessment Methodology

7.2.1.1. Consequence Assessment:

Accidental release of flammable liquids can result in severe consequences.

Delayed ignition of flammable liquid results in pool Fire. Furnace Oil having

very less vapour pressure i.e. less tendency to evaporate. Considering this

Flash fire and Explosion are not envisaged in case of release of furnace oil.

The effect of fire on a human being is in the form of burns. There are three

categories of burn such as first degree, second degree and third degree

burns. The consequences caused by exposure to heat radiation are a function

of:

The radiation energy onto the human body [kW/m2];

The exposure duration [sec];

The protection of the skin tissue (clothed or naked body).


DEMO




The lethality of a pool fire is assumed to be 100% for the people who are

caught in the flame. Outside the flame area, the lethality depends on the

heat radiation distances.

The limits for 1% of the exposed people to be killed due to heat radiation, and

for second-degree burns are given in the table below (Reference from

Guidelines for Hazard Evaluation Procedures, Centre for Chemical Process

Safety, American Institute of Chemical Engineers)

Table 7.1 Damages to Human Life Due to Heat Radiation

Exposure Duration

Radiation energy (1%

lethality, kW/m2

Radiation energy for 2

nd degree

burns, kW/m2

Radiation energy for first degree burns, kW/m

2

10 Sec 21.2 16 12.5

30 Sec 9.3 7.0 4.0

Table 7.2 Effects Due To Incident Radiation Intensity

Incident Radiation (kW/m2)

Type of Damage

0.25-0.7 Equivalent to Solar Radiation

1.6 No discomfort for long exposure

4.0 Sufficient to cause pain within 20 sec. Blistering of skin (first degree burns are likely)

9.5 Pain threshold reached after 8 sec. second degree burns after 20 sec.

12.5 Minimum energy required for piloted ignition of wood, melting plastic tubing etc.

37.5 Heavy Damage to process equipments

7.2.1.2. Meteorological Data

The consequence of released flammable material is largely dependent on the

prevailing weather conditions. For the risk analysis of major scenarios the

most important meteorological parameters are wind speed, atmospheric

stability, relative humidity, surface roughness and temperature as they directly

affect the atmospheric dispersion of the released material. Risk analysis,

modelling is based on the following weather categories as derived from

metrological data (Table 7.3).

Table 7.3 Wind Speed and Stability Class

Wind Speed (m/s)

Stability Class

Description

1.5 F This is typical of during night time with low wind speed.

5 D This is typical of day time situation, with moderate wind


DEMO




fluctuations

Atmospheric Temperature : 30⁰C

Surface Roughness : 0.3m Average Relative Humidity : 50%


DEMO




7.2.1.3. Scenarios Considered for the Risk Estimations

The following scenarios have been considered for the consequence-distance

calculations, which have been computed for the accidental release and fire

scenarios considered.

Leak of furnace oil from tank

Pool fire at furnace oil storage tank

7.2.1.4. Summary of assumptions considered in the modeling

Leak of tank containing solvent is for 10 minutes

1.5 F and 5D Weather condition is considered

All furnace oil storage tanks are at 1atm pressure and temperature of

30degC

Bund area considered for furnace oil storage tank is 984m2

Bund height considered for the study 1.5m

Population details inside Trident Facility: 150

Population details outside Trident Facility: 500

7.2.1.5. Hazards Identification

As per CPR 18E - Guidelines for Quantitative Risk Assessment, developed by

the Committee for the Prevention of Disasters, Netherlands, for each of

scenario two leak sizes i.e., hole sizes are considered for analysis,

Leak – Leak size 10 mm

Rupture – Catastrophic rupture of storage tanks

The following table (Table 7.4) present the potential initiating events and

credible accident scenarios identified and quantitatively analysed:

Table 7.4 The potential initiating events and credible accident scenarios

S.No. Scenario Description Inventory (Kl)

Pressure (Bar)

Temperature ( C)

1 Leak of furnace oil storage tank (280 Kl)

280 Atmospheric 30

2 Rupture of furnace oil storage tank (280 Kl)

280 Atmospheric 30


50 Atmospheric 30


DEMO





50 Atmospheric 30

Frequency Assessment

For this study the failure data is taken from CPR 18E – Guidelines for

Quantitative Risk Assessment, developed by the Committee for the

Prevention of Disasters, Netherlands.

Internal domino effects are not explicitly covered in QRA. An internal domino

needs to be considered only in case of a situation in which the failure of one

component clearly leads to the failure of another component. In Such cases

contents of the biggest vessel / tank needs to be taken for Instantaneous

failure.

The failure frequencies, as per CPR 18E, are provided below in Table 7.5

Table 7.5 Failure Frequencies (as per CPR 18E)

S. No Scenario Description Frequency

(per annum)

1 Leak of furnace oil storage tank (280 Kl) 4.16E-06

2 Rupture of furnace oil storage tank (280 Kl) 2.08E-06

3 Leak of furnace oil storage tank (50 Kl) 4.16E-06

4 Rupture of furnace oil storage tank (50 Kl) 2.08E-06

7.2.1.6. Event Tree:

A release can result in several possible outcomes or scenarios (fire,

explosions, unignited release etc.). This is because the actual outcome

depends on other events that may or may not occur following the initial

release. Event tree analysis is used to identify potential outcomes of a release

and to quantify the risk associated with each of these outcomes.

The sample event tree is shown below

Initiating Event

Frequency

Probability of Immediate

Ignition

Probability of Delayed

Ignition

Explosion Probability

Outcome Frequency

Event Outcome

Yes

0.01 FF Immediate Pool Fire

Explosion

FF 0.4 FF Explosion

Yes

0.7

No

0.99 0.6 FF Flash Fire/ Late Pool Fire

No


DEMO




0.3 FF No Ignition

7.2.1.7. Consequence Results for Pool Fire

The consequence result for pool fire is given below in Table 7.6

Table 7.6 Consequence Result for Pool Fire

Consequence Modelling Results : Pool Fire

Weather Condition : 1.5F Weather Condition : 5D S.No.

Scenario Description 4

kW/m2 12.5

kW/m2 37.5

kW/m2 4

kW/m2 12.5

kW/m237.5

kW/m2


72 41 17 79 53 26


99 57 25 107 70 37


46 26 10 51 34 15


57 32 13 63 42 19

Analysis of the results

Maximum damage due to pool fire radiations will be caused by Rupture of

furnace oil storage tank (280 Kl), at a weather condition of 1.5F. The pool fire

radiation of 37.5 Kw/m2 (corresponding to 100% fatality) will reach up to a

distance of 25 m at 1.5F weather condition. The pool fire radiation of 12.5

kw/m2 will reach up to a distance of 57 m at 1.5F weather condition. The

equipments within a distance of 57 m will be subjected to major damage or

piloted ignition of wood, melting of plastics tubings etc is possible within this

distance. The pool fire radiation of 4 kw/m2 will reach up to a distance of 97 m

at 1.5F weather condition. First degree burns may be caused for persons who

are within 97 m distance. The analysis result is given below in Table

Table 7.7 Analysis of the results- Pool fire damage

S.No. Facilities

Approximate distance for

the facilities (m) from furnace oil storage tank

as per the layout

Pool Fire Damage

Distance (m) for 12.5 kW/ m

2

1 Proposed cooling tower

16 57

2 DM plant 37 57

3 Proposed TG 29 57

4 Co Gen 2 53 57

In case of pool fire effect in the furnace oil storage tank, heat radiation level of

12.5 KW/m2 will prevail up to a distance of 57m at 1.5F weather condition.


DEMO




From the above pool fire consequence values all the nearby existing and

proposed facilities like proposed cooling tower, DM plant, Proposed TG and

Co Gen 2 near to Furnace oil storage tank are falling under 12.5Kw/m2 heat

radiation level region.

Hence it is recommended to provide minimum safe clearance distance

between the facilities and proper control measures to bring down the

consequence values.

Estimated Heat Radiation Levels due to Furnace oil Accidental Fires is given

in Table 7.8 and the pool fire contours for leak and rupture are given in

Figure

Table 7.8 Estimated Heat Radiation Levels due to Furnace oil Accidental Fires

Heat Radiation Distance for Furnace oil storage tank Fire (Pool Fire Scenario) (meters) Heat Radiation

Level (KW/m2) Leak 250

kl Rupture 250 kl Leak 50 kl Rupture 50 kl

37.5 17 25 10 13

25.0 25 36 15 19

12.5 41 57 26 32

9.5 48 66 31 38

4 72 99 46 57

1.6 107 147 68 84

Pool fire contours

1. Leak of furnace oil storage tank (280 Kl)

A) 1.5F Weather Condition


DEMO




B) 5D Weather Condition

2. Rupture of furnace oil storage tank (280 Kl)



DEMO






DEMO





7.2.1.8. Population Data

It is necessary to know the population exposure in order to estimate the

consequences and the risk resulting from an incident. The exposed population

is often defined using a population density. Population densities are an

important part of a QRA for several reasons. The most notable is that the

density is typically used to determine the number of people affected by a

given incident with a specific hazard area. Sometimes, population data are

available in sketchy forms. In the absence of specific population data default

categories can be used.

The population density can be averaged over the whole area that may be

affected or the area can be subdivided into any number of segments with a

separate population density for each individual segment.

Inside Trident Facility: 150

Outside Trident Facility: 500

Individual Risk and Societal Risk- The Individual Risk per annum (IRPA)

measure expresses the risk exposure to any Individual who is continuously

present in a particular area for the whole year. The risk exposure is calculated


DEMO




for all relevant hazards and summed to give the overall risks for area of the

installation.

Risk Summary

S. No. Scenarios Individual Risk(Avg. per Year)

Societal Risk (Avg. per Year)


8.33E-07 5.89E-07


6.67E-08 6.51E-08


1.88E-07 1.82E-07


2.32E-08 1.61E-08

Individual Risk and Societal Risk Presentation:



DEMO




Individual Risk: 8.33E‐07 per avg year

Societal Risk: 5.89E-07 per avg year



DEMO




Individual Risk: 6.67E-08 per avg year




DEMO








DEMO





Societal Risk: 1.61E‐08 per avg year

7.2.1.9. Risk Acceptance Criteria:

The IS 15656 HSE criteria have been proposed for application to average

individual risk as follows:

Table 7.9 – Risk Criteria

Authority and Application Maximum Tolerable

Risk (Per Year) Negligible Risk

(Per Year)

VROM, The Netherlands (New) 1.0E-06 1.0E-08

VROM, The Netherlands (existing) 1.0E-05 1.0E-08

HSE, UK (existing hazardous industry)

1.0E-04 1.0E-06

HSE, UK (New nuclear power station)

1.0E-05 1.0E-06

HSE, UK (Substance transport) 1.0E-04 1.0E-06

HSE, UK (New housing near plants)

3 x 1.0E-06 3 x 1.0E-07

Hong Kong Government (New plants)

1.0E-05 Not used


DEMO




UK HSE Criteria for existing hazardous industry, highlighted in the above

table is used for the study.

Plant workers are working in the Industry on 10 times higher Risk than Social

people.

7.2.1.10. Conclusion:

It is concluded from the above study that Individual Risk and Societal risk

curve (F-N Curve) were falls within the tolerable and acceptable region.

In case of pool fire effect in the furnace oil storage tank, heat radiation level of

12.5 KW/m2 will prevail up to a distance of 57m at 1.5F weather condition.

From the pool fire consequence values all the nearby existing and proposed

facilities like proposed cooling tower, DM plant, Proposed TG and Co Gen 2

near to Furnace oil storage tank are falling under 12.5Kw/m2 heat radiation

level region.

7.2.1.11. Risk Control Measures

Mitigation measures should also aim at minimizing the quantity of release that

may get released during major releases, detection of such leaks and

minimizing the consequences due to such incidents.


DEMO




Proposed Facilities to be provided

Extension of the existing plant hydrant network (with augmentation of

pumps, if required) for power plant area from terminal point (TP) will be

done.

Further, it will consist of fire alarm systems for control room, MCC room

and cable alleys.

Portable extinguishers at strategic locations in the plant will be provided.

7.2.1.12. Risk Control Measures Suggested

As per OISD 129, ensure that regular internal inspection along with

ultrasonic thickness survey for storage tanks to be done in intervals of

every ten years and external inspection for storage tanks to be done in

intervals of every three years.

Onsite and offsite Emergency Response & Disaster Management Plan

should be developed for the proposed facility.

Ensure that bunds provided at the tank farm have proper drainage system.

Ensure that all the storage tanks are to be earthed separately as per IS

3043-1966.

Ensure that fire extinguisher and its components are inspected at regular

intervals.

Ensure that fire alarms are tested at least once in a week.

Ensure that spill Management Kits are available and it should be

maintained properly.

To carry out adequacy check of fire water system for the upgraded facility.

7.3. Risks due to Storage and Handling of Coal and Risk Control Measures

Although coal fires are infrequent, there is a possibility of coal fires at the coal

stock yards during the summer conditions due to burning of volatile

compounds. Coal stock yard fires can be avoided by providing proper stacking

design to prevent air movement inside the coal lumps, minimising the duration

of coal storage at the site and water sprinkling operations to maintain

adequate moisture.

Captive co-generation power plants store, transfer, and use coal; therefore,

careful handling is necessary to mitigate fire and explosion risks.


DEMO




Recommended measures to prevent minimise, and control fire hazards at

captive co-generation power plants include:

Use of automated combustion and safety controls

Proper maintenance of boiler safety controls

Implementation of startup and shutdown procedures to minimise the risk of

suspending hot coal particles (e.g., in the crusher) during startup

Regular cleaning of the facility to prevent accumulation of coal dust

(e.g., on floors, ledges, beams, and equipment)

Removal of hot spots from the coal stockpile (caused by spontaneous

combustion) and spread until cooled, avoid loading of hot coal into the

pulverised fuel system

Use of automated systems such as temperature gauges or carbon

monoxide sensors to survey solid fuel storage areas to detect fires caused

by self-ignition and to identify risk points

For planned outages, operators should take every precaution to ensure

that all idle bunkers and silos are completely empty and also verify by

visual checks. Bunkers and silos should be thoroughly leaned by washing

down their interior walls and any interior structural members but not their

horizontal surfaces. Idle bunkers and silos that contain coal should be

monitored frequently for signs of spontaneous combustion by using CO

monitors, infrared scanning, or temperature scanning.

Fire fighting systems and fire hydrant systems shall be installed at all

hazard prone areas such as coal stock yards, bunkers and silos as per the

applicable fire safety standards.

7.4. Electrical Hazards and Safety Measures

Energised equipment and power lines can pose electrical hazards for workers.

recommended measures to prevent, minimise, and control electrical hazards

include

Consider installation of hazard warning lights inside electrical equipment

enclosures to warn inadvertent energisation

Use of voltage sensors prior to and during personnel's entrance into

enclosures containing electrical components


DEMO




Deactivation and proper grounding of live power equipment and

distribution lines according to applicable legislation and guidelines

whenever possible before work is performed on, or proximal to them

Provision of specialised electrical safety training to those personnel

working with or around exposed components of electric circuits. This

training should include, but not be limited to, training in basic electrical

theory, proper safe work procedures, hazard awareness and identification,

proper use of PPE, proper lockout/tagout procedures, first aid and proper

rescue procedures

7.5. Occupational Health and Noise Management Plan

Based on the noise mapping data presented in Chapter 5 of this report, the

major noise generating sources are Power boiler and cooling tower. TLPD will

be procuring the equipment with guaranteed noise levels less than 85 dBA at

one (1) metre distance from the respective machines/equipment. Noise levels

outside the facility boundary will be further attenuated due to the proposed

green belt all along the plant boundary. In addition to the noise control

programme proposed to be adopted by TLPD as stated in Chapter 6 of this

report, the following occupational noise management plan shall be adopted:

1. Noise abatement measures inside the Mill site shall be undertaken, if

noise levels are above 75 dB(A); measurements must be taken and

assessed by a competent person. Such measurements should be

repeated at appropriate intervals.

2. If noise level is above 75 dB(A) then the following procedures shall be

adopted:

Inform employees of the noise levels present and measures taken

to reduce exposure

Make ear protection available and provide training in its use

Hearing checks must be made available to employees exposed to

noise levels in excess of 85 dB(A) over an 8 hour period

Although ear-plugs and ear-muff will be provided to the persons

working in the Mill area, as a part of the good management practices,

work rotation scheme will be adopted for the persons working in the high

noise generating areas.

3. If noise levels near the machinery exceed 90 dB(A), then the following

corrective procedure shall be adopted:


DEMO




Identify reasons for excess noise and draw up a plan in place to

reduce

Identify and clearly designate hearing conservation zones

Ear protection must be worn and its use supervised

Employees must be trained in the hazards of noise and the

correct use of hearing protection.

7.6. Occupational Safety Management and Surveillance Programme

The Ministry of Labour and Employment, Government of India has a nodal

organisation, viz. Directorate General Factory Advice Service and Labour

Institutes (DGFASLI), in dealing with Occupational Safety and Health issues in

Industries. The DGFASLI is the technical arm of the Ministry on matters

connected with Occupational Health in the manufacturing and port sectors.

The Factories Act, 1948, provides for appointment of qualified Medical

Practitioners and Certified Surgeons to examine young persons engaged in

dangerous manufacturing processes and to ensure medical supervision in

case of illness due to the nature of manufacturing processes. The Factories

Act, 1948, also provides for notification of certain occupational diseases as

listed in the Third Schedule of the Act. As per Section 90 of the Factories Act,

1948, the State Government is vested with the powers to appoint a Competent

Person to conduct inquiry into the causes of any accident or notifiable

diseases.

The following measures will be implemented in the work places during MEP to

enhance occupational health:

Identify and involve personnel in assessing workplace risks

Assess and consider employees' needs when planning and organising work

Provide advice, information and training to employees, as well as mechanisms for employee feedback such as a suggestion scheme

Occupational health surveillance and Occupational health audit

To develop a system of creating uptodate data base on mortality, and morbidity due to occupational diseases and use it for performance monitoring of the same

Extending support to the state government for effective enforcement of the health provisions stipulated under section 41F of the Factory Act by equipping them with work environment monitoring technologies.


DEMO




The occupational health safety system is headed by a competent and qualified

safety office that will be supported by a team of safety volunteers from each

plant and department within the Mill site. The safety team will take up a

detailed task based risk assessment studies and will develop task based

safety procedures and work permit systems. The safety team should record

the near misses in the Mill and take necessary corrective action to minimise

the occupational risks.

The existing hospital facilities should be made available round the clock for

attending to emergency arising out of accidents, if any. All working personnel

should be medically examined at least once every year and at the end of the

term of their employment. This is in addition to the pre-employment medical

examination.

As a part of the surveillance programme, the following minimum medical

examination may be undertaken during the pre-employment phase:

General physical examination and blood pressure, X-Ray of chest & ECG

Sputum examination, Detailed routine blood & urine examination

Audiometry

Spirometry

Eye tests for the workers and drivers

As part of the routine and annual medical examinations on the persons working in the high noise generating areas, stress areas and dust exposure areas, a comprehensive surveillance programme may be adopted. Some of the good management practices are suggested in Tables 6.2 and 6.3.

Table 7.10 Suggested Frequency of Medical Examination under Occupational Health Surveillance Programme

Age (yrs) Periodicity Duration of exposure

Periodicity

< 30 yrs Once in five years < 10 yrs Once in five years

31-40 Once in four years 10 to 20 Once in four years

41-50 Once in three years 21-30 Once in three years

> 51 Once a year > 31 Once a year

Table 7.11 Suggested Medical Tests under Occupational Health Surveillance Programme

S No. Disorder Tests to be conducted

1 Heart Diseases ECG, Blood for Lipid Profile, Stress Test, 2D-Echo and other required Tests

2 Anemia Hb%, TC,DC, ESR & Stool for Occult Blood, Ova and Cyst

3 Lung Diseases Sputum, X-Ray Chest, Spirometery

4 Diabetes Random Blood sugar, Urine sugar, if positive, BSL-Fasting/PPBS diabetic profile

5 Hypertension Blood pressure reading; If required, renal profile + ECG and


DEMO




stress test.

6 Urine Examination Routine and Microscopic

Medical records - A record-keeping system for holding the results of medical

examinations and reports of symptoms is maintained as part of the health

surveillance scheme. These are confidential medical records relating to

individuals. As part of the health surveillance programme, employees should

be informed of the confidential results of each assessment and of any

implications of the findings, such as the likely effects of their continuing to

work .

7.7. Fire Protection and Fire Fighting Systems

The plant has adequate fire fighting facilities. Fire watch is done continuously,

by a crew of persons who keep vigil of fire situations. The existing fire fighting

arrangements will be suitable augmented during the expansion program of the

existing plant

Fire fighting systems shall be designed based on the National Building Codes.

Since the project falls under low-hazard category, the fire fighting system shall

be designed according to chapter 5 in the National Building Codes and

summary of the minimum fire fighting systems’ requirements are presented in

Table 6.4. It is proposed to install jockey pump, diesel pump and electrically

operated centrifugal pump for fire water net-work arrangements. Ring-main

pipeline systems will be provided to cater to the fire hydrant requirements

across the Mill site. Fire hose reels, fire buckets and fire extinguishers will be

provided as per the National Building Code requirements. The Disaster

Management Plan is enclosed as Annexure 28.


DEMO

Mill E

xpa

nsio

n P

lan

(ME

P) E

IA R

epo

rt D

ha

ula

Villa

ge Ba

rna

la D

istrict, Pu

nja

b

Ch

ap

ter 7– Risk

Assessm

ent S

tud

y

Prepared b

y &

C7‐2

8

Ta

ble

7.1

2 M

inim

um

Re

qu

ired

Fire

Pro

tec

tion

Sys

tem

s A

s P

er

Natio

nal B

uild

ing

Co

de

R : Required NR : Not required Note 2 : Required to be installed in basement if area of basement exceeds 200 m2

Note 3 : Required to be provided if basement area exceeds 200 m2.

Note 4 : Additional value given in parenthesis shall be added if basement area exceeds 200 m2.

Note 7 : Required to be provided for buildings with height more than 15 m. Note 20 : one electric and one diesel pump of capacity 280 ltrs/minute each and one electric pump of 180 lpm

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO






DEMO


Chapter 8 – Project Benefits


8 PROJECT BENEFITS

8.1 Improvement in the Physical Infrastructure

8.1.1 Existing Infrastructure

TRIDENT has already established a manufacturing unit at Barnala in Punjab

during 1993, for the production of wide range of printing and writing paper

including copier from wheat straw; an agricultural residue and wood. The

location of th plant site is declared as an industrial area and surroundings of

the mill site are mostly agricultural land. The nearest village, Dhaula, is about

5 km from the mill and the nearest bus route, viz. the State Highway SH-13,

will be reachable at 0.5 km and the railway network about 12 km. There is no

stream crossing the plant site. Uppli canal is about 30 km away from the plant.

There are no hospitals, schools, temples and community halls within one (1)

km area.

The plant is well developed with necessary infrastructure facilities such as

motorable road up to plant site, nearness to rail head, telephone and telefax

facilities.

Nearest town - Barnala - 10 km

National Highway - 7 km

Nearest railway station - Barnala - 12 km

Nearest airport - Chandigarh - 175 km

The population is negligible around the mill. However, the population is likely

to go up in the region due to direct and indirect employment with their family

members.

8.1.2 Improvement in Physical Infrastructure

The mill has been expanding in stages from 75 tpd to 550 tpd. The total

industrial unit is well planned including infrastructure facilities, roads and

drains, drinking water and sewerage system, green cover, etc.

The proposed project is for upgrading and augmenting the production

capacities and increasing captive power generation to meet the additional

demand to the paper mill and the other TRIDENT group units. The present

infrastructure already in place will meet the requirements of the project.

However, TRIDENT will be taking initiative to identify infrastructural needs

including the local community needs such as educational facilities, health

care, roads, street light, drinking water, etc., and take suitable remedial action

to improve the infrastructural facilities at the mill site, by allocating funds on its

CSR activities.


DEMO




8.2 Improvement in Social Infrastructure

It would be some what difficult to quantify all the benefits of a project of this

type and nature to the state and national economy, because there are too

many “spin off” of indirect benefits in additions to the direct benefits.

Some of the specific indirect benefits are presented below:

8.2.1 Establishment of Ancillary Business

The implementation of the project will undoubtedly provide stimulation for

added growth to a number of other industries some of which are given bellow;

The project also envisages additional movement of input material (wood,

straw, chemicals, and coal and other fuels required by captive power plant

and steam for the process) and finished goods. The haulage requirement

for operations would be around 0.7 million tonnes per annum comprising

the inputs (0.6 million tonne per annum), outputs (0.1 million tonne per

annum) as raw material for the cement mill. This additional movement of

material will provide growth to transportation sector in this area.

Establishment of ancillary industries such as core for paper reels, core

plugs and welding units, etc.

Indigenous machinery suppliers / manufacturers

Establishment of indirect small scale industries and shops near the mill

site such as small scale workshops, hard ware shops, restaurants, petty

civil and electrical contractors, grocery and provision shops, etc.

Construction industry during erection and construction period.

The above businesses will create addit ional em ployment and livelihood to

local people in this area and will raise their liv ing standards.

8.2.2 Non Dependence of Grid Power

At present, TLPD draws about 5.0 MW (maximum) from the grid for the entire

group manufacturing activities. The paper mill as well as the other units is

expanding their activities and the power requirement during post MEP

operation for the group will be 31 MW for the paper unit and 50 MW for the

other group factories. By upgrading the captive co-generation plant with power

generation capacity of 41.5 MW, the power generation will go up and

TRIDENT will be able to meet the entire demand of 81 MW for its group from

the captive power plant, thus help the state government by not drawing power

from the grid.


DEMO




8.2.3 Contribution to State Exchequer

The project is likely to create income to State by way of Central Sales Tax of

Rs. 9 crore per annum and Central Excise and Service Tax to the tune of

about Rs. 45 crore per annum. In addition by way of Corporate and Income

tax, the Centra Government will receive approximately Rs. 20 to 25 crore.

The Exchequer is likely to receive additional income from ancillary businesses

established based on this project.

8.3 Employment Potential

During the operational phase, the proposed project will create direct

employment of about 100 persons. In addition to the direct employment, the

project would generate additional employment to about 500 persons in the

service organizations for material unloading and material feeding to the plant,

etc. In addition about 1000 to 1200 people may get benefited in ancillary

business such raw material procurement and additional transport due to

increased material movement, etc.

Construction phase of the project, mill provides temporary employment for

about 500 unskilled and semi skilled labour for erection and movement of

material during the implementation period for about 12 to 14 months.

8.4 Social Benefits


just on commercial aspect but also on the society they live in.

Every social initiative undertaken by TLPD was started with a profound sense

of responsibility and thought behind it.







way to contribute to the community is through quality education and with its

Takshashila venture in collaboration with IL&FS, they aim to accomplish that.






DEMO







this area of Punjab.

With many more such initiatives, it is TLPD’s constant endeavour to develop a

culture of giving back to the society and help create a better future for all

Stakeholders.





Female empowerment


Skill development


Medical facilities












age care.

Such efforts are an integral part of TLPD as an organisation and are a way of

expressing its gratitude and concern for the society.

A detailed account of initiatives that TLPD has recognised as the ‘need of the

hour’ is given below.

Environment friendly product developments - Paper from agri-residue and

ECF Technology


DEMO




Practicing 3 Rs. (reduce, reuse and recycle) and waste management in

industrial plants

Energy conservation drives by installing power saving technology on the

machines in the industrial plants and procurement of energy efficient

machines

Enhanced recycle & reuse of treated effluent for purposes of plantation,

maintenance activities in various sections of the industrial plants

Commissioning of a Water Treatment Plant (WTP) resulting in use of

surface water by industrial plants in place of ground water and thereby

saving ground water of the area

Proper treatment of sewerage water through STP (Sewerage Treatment

Plant) and use of treated water for plantation to reduce waste and also

reduce water consumption

Producing organic yarn, which is totally environmental friendly with zero

pesticide

Accreditation of Manufacturing Facilities of the Company to ISO 14001

Setting up Takshashila – centre of excellence, equipped with modern

training facilities (technical & behavioural), where students from various

parts of the state as well as from outside undergo special courses and are

provided with suitable employment. There has been initiation of skill

development institutes like SHVTI, IL&FS within the premises of TLPD,

where students undergo special courses. Opportunity is provided to the

members to undergo technical trainings who are latter offered

employment opportunities at TLPD.

Donation to educational institutions in Barnala such as Boys ITI and Girls

ITI to enable them to provide good infrastructure and facilities to the

students in this area.

Employment to Deaf and Dumb personnel as part of Diversity

Management

Free medical camps for eye, skin, hepatitis –B vaccination, leprosy and

blood donation camps

Considering the vast talent pool of women and the need for mentoring &

empowering women in TLPD and the society, “Asmita” a women

empowerment forum, was launched on 3rd October 2008. By means of

Asmita, special emphasis is being laid on entrepreneurship development


DEMO




of female employees, providing them with avenues of growth, working on

Environmental & Behavioural

The forum aspires to focus on enhancement of earning capacity, health,

hygiene, welfare, education, facilitating basic amenities at work place and

above all, rewarding & recognising the best of talent amongst female

members.

Issues, management practices for women in the workplace,

understanding their contribution towards the success of business and, in

turn, rewarding them and providing a platform for partaking of leadership

positions Trident group.

Conducting recruitment of candidates through Takshashila Walk-Ins. The

young members (fresher) are hired based on aptitude tests and given skill

enhancement trainings to develop into skilled professionals at all levels

and cadres.

Due to increased activity in the area, TLPD will be spending more on CSR

activities in this region and thus benefiting local people.

In view of the foregoing, it is obvious that the potential contribution from this

project to the State of Punjab and National Economy would be significant to

say the least.


DEMO





DEMO


Chapter 9 – Summary & conclusions


9. SUMMARY & CONCLUSIONS

9.1. Overview of the Project

TLPD proposed Mill Expansion Plan to increase the paper production capacity

from 375 tpd to 550 tpd by upgrading existing paper machines, fibre lines and

increasing captive generation capacity from 49.4 to 90.9 MW Dhaula village,

Barnala Taluk, Barnala District in Punjab state.

The proposed expansion project was appraised by the Reconstituted Expert

Appraisal Committee (Industry), Ministry of Ministry of Environment and Forest

(MoEF) during the 6th Expert Appraisal Committee meeting held on 7th March

2013 and the project was accorded Terms of Reference (ToR) vide File no.J-

11011/1/2013-IA-II, dated, 25th April 2013. This EIA study was undertaken

covering special studies (in accordance with ToR), during October, December,

January 2013.

9.2. Environmental Setting of the Site

The proposed expansion activities will be located in the vacant spaces in the

existing mill area and the site is located at the intersection of latitude

30°17''57’N and longitude 75° 29''32’E and falls in the Survey of India

Topography Map number H43J7. The surroundings of the project site are

mostly agricultural land. The nearest village, Dhaula, is about 5 km from the

mill and the nearest bus route, viz. the State Highway SH-13, will be reachable

at 0.5 km and the railway network about 12 km. There is no stream crossing

the plant site. Uppli canal is about 30 km away from the plant. This area is not

falling into the forest land and there is no eco-sensitive zone. No protected

areas/national parks/wildlife sanctuaries/ ecologically sensitive zones exist in

15 km radius.

9.3. Base Line Environmental Status

The primary baseline data monitored covered three (3) months i.e., from 13th

October 2013 to 14thJanuary 2014 for all the designated physicochemical,

ecological, biological and socioeconomic components as per the ToR issued

for the project. The regional meteorological data indicates that the wind

predominantly blow from Northwest direction during January and February.

During summer (March to May), the winds blow from NW, SE and western

direction. Ambient air quality was measured at eight (8) locations as per the

Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB) guidelines and the concentrations of

all the criteria pollutants are well within the standards specified under National

Ambient Air Quality (NAAQ) Standards. The measured noise levels in the

study area were found to be below the CPCB prescribed noise levels

standards for Industrial Areas Category. Except for Total Dissolved Solids


DEMO




(TDS), all parameters of the groundwater samples were found to comply with

drinking water quality standards.

The hydrogeological study indicates that the ground water flow of the area is

towards the south west direction. As ground water moves from North West to

south west, there may be slight increase in the salinity of ground water in the

western side. Total dissolved solids concentration is comparatively more in

ground water in the south west of the study area. There is no possibility of any

contamination in the vicinity of the project site by the project activity as the

flow is towards south west near the project area.

For studying soil quality in the region, sampling locations were selected to

assess the existing soil conditions in and around the existing plant area

representing various land use conditions. The physical, chemical and heavy

metal concentrations were determined. In the study area more specifically,

Coarse loamy over sandy soils, Moderate flooding sandy soils are observed.

The pH of the soil varied from 7.94 to 8.33. Based on soil pH the soils can be

classified into moderately alkaline type. Majority of study area is agricultural

land and plantation area. No vegetation area with high diversity and with rare

or endangered faunal species was observed. Similarly no breeding grounds

and migration routes of birds or animals were observed.

Based on Census 2011 data, the District has a population of 5,95,527, of

which 32% is urbanized. The District has the highest rate of Sikh population.

The average population density of the District is about 402 inhabitants per

square kilometer as against the State population density of around 551. The

average household size is 5. The District has a sex ratio of 876 females for

1000 males. The children sex ratio was found to be about 843. Vulnerable

population such as SC and ST were found to be about 32.24% and 0.0%

respectively. The District has a literacy rate of about 67.82% which is lesser

than the state's average (75.84%). In terms of education facilities, the District

has 182 primary schools, 27 middle schools, 54 High School and 32 senior

secondary schools and 5 colleges1.

9.4. Environmental Impacts and Management Plan

9.4.1. Construction Phase

Construction phase include only the levelling of site, construction and erection

of plant components. The construction activities will not require any cutting of

vegetation, as the site chosen for construction is mainly a barren land. There

are no significant flora and fauna species located on site. TLPD has

developed thick green belt on North direction of project site which will act as

buffer zone and will help in mitigating impacts on ecology in vicinity.

1 District Education Office (SE) Barnala


DEMO




Construction work will provide employment to about 500 people on an

average peak day will be employed for a period of about 10 to 12 months

which will benefit the local people. Apart from localized construction impacts

at the plant site, no significant adverse impact on soil in the surrounding area

is anticipated.

9.4.2. Operation Phase

Air Environment

Due to the utilisation of high calorific value imported coal with sulphur content

less than 1%, the specific SO2 emission rate from the proposed facility will be

two to three times lower than that of the captive co-generation power plants

that are operated on high ash content Indian coal. Individual electrostatic

precipitators will be installed in each boiler flue gas line to maintain particulate

matter below the stipulated 150 mg/Nm3 in the flue gas. Adequate stack height

will be provided to disperse the controlled boiler emissions into the

atmosphere. The predicted ground level concentrations of particulate matter,

sulphur dioxide and oxides of nitrogen due to emissions from the proposed

captive co-generation power plant stack were reported to be below the NAAQ

Standards. Overall increase in the background pollutant concentrations due to

release of vehicular emissions will be insignificant. Hence, no significant

impacts due to emissions from vehicles and the Mill operations to the nearby

villages are envisaged.

Noise Environment

Noise abatement and control measures will be considered at the design phase

of the facility. Some of the major noise generating equipment will be housed

inside the room with an average wall thickness of 230mm to attenuate noise

emissions. The predicted noise levels due to emissions from the proposed

project are found to be well within the stipulated standards.

Water Environment

The source of water is from Uppli canal and ground water. The mill has

obtained the permission for drawl of 25,000 m³/day water from Uppli canal and

necessary permission from the Central Ground Water Board for the

abstraction of 14,040 m³/day of ground water.

Effluent generated after MEP will be treated in the existing Effluent Treatment

Plant. About 2700 m3/day of wastewater will be reused within the Mill. 18,320

m³/day of treated waster will be used for irrigation, greenbelt and green cover

development within the Mill site, and also will be supplied to local farmers for

irrigation purpose, benefiting the local farmers. About 8,700 m³/day will be


DEMO




discharged in to the Dhanula Drain for which necessary permissions from

Punjab Government was obtained.

Solid Waste Management

Straw dust and wood dust will be fired in the boiler. Fly ash generated from the

boilers will be stored in silos and sold to brick manufacturing and cement

manufacturing units through Tania Enterprises. Onsite wet ash ponds and

storage facilities are not envisaged. Sludge from the Primary Clarifier of the

ETP will be sold to the board manufacturing units. Dewatered secondary

sludge from ETP which is nutrient-rich will be used as manure for green cover

development. Used oil generated from the Mill and captive co-generation

power plant will be stored in drums and will be disposed of to authorised

recyclers.

Ecological Aspects

According to the revised survey of forest types in India, the vegetation of this

region falls under “Tropical Dry Deciduous” with sub-type: Northern Dry Mixed

Deciduous type. However, no forest division is present in study area. Nearly

165 Acres of thick greenbelt and green cover area have been developed by

Trident Industries at the existing Mill area. The flora of greenbelt exhibited

wide variety of native as well as exotic species. Natural flora in the study area

was observed to be sparse and highly disturbed. No ecologically sensitive site

is identified in study area, hence no direct or indirect adverse impacts are

expected on ecology due to proposed development.

Socio- Economics

The major economic benefits, to the region, during the construction phase and

operation of project, will be an increased availability of direct and indirect

employment. Approximately 500 people on an average peak day will be

employed for a period of about 10 to 12 months during constructional phase.



project would generate additionally employment to about 500 persons in the

service organisations for material unloading and material feeding to the plant.

Significant quantity of treated wastewater will be supplied to the local farmers

for irrigation needs.

9.5. Project Benefits


employment of about 100 persons. In addition to the direct employment,

the project would generate additional employment to about 500 persons


DEMO




in the service organizations for material unloading and material feeding

to the plant, etc. In addition about 1000 to 1200 people may get

benefited in ancillary business such raw material procurement and

additional transport due to increased material movement, etc.

The project is likely to create income to State by way of Central Sales

Tax of Rs. 5 crore per annum and Central Excise and Service Tax to

the tune of about Rs. 25 crore per annum. In addition by way of

Corporate and Income tax, the Centra Government will receive

approximately Rs. 20 to 25 crore.

The project also envisages additional movement of input material (wood,

straw, chemicals, and coal and other fuels required by captive power

plant and steam for the process) and finished goods. The haulage

requirement for operations would be around 0.8 million tonnes per

annum comprising the inputs (0.6 million tonne per annum), outputs (0.1

million tonne per annum) and solid waste generated from the operations

(0.1 million tonne per annum) as raw material for the cement mill. This

additional movement of material will provide growth to transportation

sector in this area

9.6. Conclusions

This project will have beneficial effects in terms of growth and

development of the regional economy.

This project will also generate direct and indirect employment to a

considerable number of families, who will render their services for the

employees of the project.

The project will also pave way for ancillary industries in the region, which

will not only increase the employment potential but also further

strengthen the economic base of the region.

Growth and development, in harmony with the environment, has always

been the approach of TLPD and this will be ensured.

The proposed project is structured to be in line with the requirements of

MoEF/CPCB/ PPCB.

Wastewater treatment facilities and high efficiency Electrostatic

Precipitator and other pollution abatement measures will result in

minimising the adverse impacts on the environment.


DEMO




Thus, it can be concluded that with the judicious and proper implementation of

the pollution control and mitigation measures, the proposed project can

proceed without any significant negative impact on the environment.


DEMO

Mill Expansion Plan (MEP) EIA RepoDhaula Village Barnala District, Punjab

Chapter 10 – Disclosure of Consultants

Prepared by & C10-1

10 DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANTS

10.1 Introduction

The Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) and Environment Management

Plan (EMP) report has been prepared by carrying out various scientific studies.

The studies have been carried out by Cholamandalam MS Risk Services

Limited, Chennai, India, with technical report from SPB Projects and Consultancy

Limited

The profiles of the Consultants are given below

10.2 Cholamandalam MS Risk Services Limited – EIA Consultant

Cholamandalam MS Risk Services Ltd (CMSRSL) is a joint venture between the

Murugappa group, India and Mitsui Sumitomo Insurance Group, Japan.

CMSRSL is an ISO 9001:2008 certified company. CMSRSL offers safety and

environmental consulting services across Indian, Middle East and East Asian

countries. CMSRL consists of six consulting domains such as environmental

engineering and management, process safety, fire safety, electrical safety,

construction safety and logistics risk assessment. CMSRS is a NABET

accredited EIA consulting organization for undertaking EIA studies in the

following sectors: paper and pulp, thermal power plants, petroleum refineries,

petrochemical complex, chemical fertilizers, synthetic organic chemical

industries, ports and harbours and area development projects. CMSRSL has

offered environmental and safety related consulting services for more than 5000

clients during last decade

10.2.1 Details of Experts/Consultants Engaged for this EIA Study

Details of Experts/Consultants Engaged for this EIA Study

S.No. Name Role in the EIA Study

1 Mr V S Bhaskar EIA Coordinator – Pulp & paper industry and Thermal Power Plants. Functional Area Expert(FAE) - Meteorology, Air Quality Modelling and Prediction Functional Area Expert (FAE) - Water Pollution Prevention, Control & Prediction of Impacts Functional Area Expert (FAE) - Noise / Vibration Functional Area Expert (FAE) – Risk & Hazards Management

2 Mr. D. Ravishankar Associate EIA Coordinator Functional Area Expert (FAE) - Air Pollution Prevention, Monitoring and Control Functional Area Expert FAE –Solid & Hazardous Waste Management

3 Mr. Rajendra Prasad J Functional Area Expert (FAE) – Land Use

4 Dr. Sriman Narayan Functional Area Expert (FAE) – Hydrology, Ground


DEMO



Prepared by & C10-2

S.No. Name Role in the EIA Study

Water & Water Conservation

5 Dr.Mangalam Balasubramaniam

Functional Area Expert (FAE) – Socio-Economics

7 Mr. Vikrant Kulkarni Functional Area Expert (FAE) – Ecology and Biodiversity

9 Mr. C S Karthick Associate Functional Area Expert (FAE) – Socio-Economics

10 Mr P. Ramesh Associate Functional Area Expert (FAE)

11 Mr. Mugundan R Associate Functional Area Expert (FAE)

Other Technical Team Members

S.No. Technical members

1 Sathya.S

2 Mr. S Kamesh

External Labs/Agencies involved in EIA Study

1 Base line Environmental data - Ambient air Quality, Water, Soil and Noise sampling & analysis.

M/s. Spectro Analytical Labs

Limited

2. Raw Material analysis – Fuel analysis Heavy metal analysis, Grain Size analysis

M/s. Bhagavathi Ana Labs Pvt Ltd,

Hyderabad

3 Petrography Studies for coal and soil M/s. CSIR-National Metallurgical

Laboratory Jamshedpur 831 007

4 Sodar Studies Dr.B.Gera

Retired Scientist from M/s National

Physical Laboratory, New Delhi

10.3 SPB Projects and Consultancy Limited –Technical Consultant

SPB Projects and Consultancy Limited (SPB-PC) specialises in providing a

wide range of Consultancy Services in the field of Pulp and Paper, Sugar,

Ceramics, Power etc. Pulp and paper sector, however, represents the main

thrust areas of specialisation, with extensive experience with pulping processes

practically for all grades of pulp qualities and for almost all possible

paper/newsprint grades from a wide spectrum of fibrous raw materials including


DEMO



Prepared by & C10-3

a variety of non-wood fibres. Among the non-wood fibres, SPB-PC’s exposure to

bagasse pulping is unique, having been associated in the development of the

bagasse based newsprint mill that is in successful operation in Tamil Nadu.


DEMO



Prepared by & C10-4

10.3.1 Work-Place Facilities

SPB-PC, located at Chennai, India, operates from its modern, fully air-

conditioned office (floor area: 25,000 ft2) with three full-fledged conference halls

equipped with digital projection facilities for multimedia presentations, latest

telecommunication facilities, video conferencing, high speed photocopier

machines with reversible automatic document feeders, besides binding facilities.

The Company has state-of-the-art computer-aided facilities, fully networked, for

engineering, analysis, design and documentation and communication facilities

like e-mail and telefax. The Company has a 380 kVA Diesel Generator, as

insulation against power outages.

10.3.2 Structure

The SPB-PC Organisation is structured broadly into three distinct groups viz. a

Consultancy Services Group, a Project Services Group and an Operations

Management Group. The Consultancy Services Group, which forms the core of

the Organisation, is manned by engineers, planners, specialists, financial

experts, economic analysts and design specialists with extensive experience in

the related industries. SPB-PC, being the engineering base of a multi-sector

Group of Companies, the Project Services Group and the Operations

Management Group are augmented by Consulting Technologists and Specialist

manpower seconded from the associate group companies operating in the fields

of pulp and paper, sugar, ceramics and refractories.

10.3.3 Manning

The Company is manned by experienced and capable engineering staff covering

all disciplines like mechanical, process, environment, electrical, instrumentation

and civil. The engineering staff have extensive experience in construction,

operation and maintenance in the fields of pulp and paper, newsprint, sugar,

ceramics, power etc and most of them have over 10/15 years of experience in

the relevant discipline. The Company is also well supported by finance,

marketing, accounting and general administrative staff.

10.3.4 Capability

SPB-PC's expertise includes feasibility studies, preparation of Detailed Project

Reports (DPR), Evaluation of Technology, Rendering Basic Engineering

Services, Detail Engineering and a wide range of Project Management and

Operations Services besides Technical Audits, Mill Development Studies and

Development of Revival/Rehabilitation Proposals for sick units and

Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) Studies.


DEMO



Prepared by & C10-5



DEMO


DEMO



Executive Summary

Prepared by & ES-1

Table of Contents

CHAPTER # ITLE PAGE #

1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................. 2

1.1 Preamble ............................................................................................................... 2

1.2 Proposed Project.................................................................................................... 2

1.3 Need for the EIA Study ........................................................................................... 3

1.4 EIA Study............................................................................................................... 3

1.5 Environmental Setting of the Site .................................................. ..... 4

2. OVER VIEW OF THE ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT ASPECTS IN THE EXISTING

FACILITY ............................................................................................................................ 6

3. DETAILS OF THE PROPOSED EXPANSION ....................................................................... 6

3.1 Land for the Project ................................................................................................ 7

3.2 Materials and Resources Requirement.................................................................... 8

4 DESCRIPTION OF THE BASELINE ENVIRONMENT ......................................................... 11

4.1. Site Specific Meteorology Conditions .................................................................... 11

4.2. Ambient Air Quality Monitoring .............................................................................. 11

4.3. Water Environment............................................................................................... 12

4.4. Noise Level Survey .............................................................................................. 12

4.5. Soil Environment .................................................................................................. 12

4.6. Flora and Fauna Studies ...................................................................................... 12

4.7. Socio-Economic Environment ............................................................................... 13

5. ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES ................... 14

5.1. Impact during Construction Phase ........................................................................ 14

5.2. Impact during Operation Phase............................................................................. 14

5.3. Predicted Ground Level Concentration .................................................................. 15

5.4. Fugitive Emissions and Associated Environmental Impacts ................................... 15

5.5. Noise Emissions and Control ................................................................................ 15

5.6. Impacts on the Water Environment ....................................................................... 16

5.7. Environmental Risks due to Storage and Handling of Solid and Hazardous Wastes 16

5.8. Soil and Groundwater Quality Related Impacts ...................................................... 17

5.9. Impacts on Ecological and Biological Environment ................................................ 17

6. ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN ......................................................................... 18

6.1. Air Quality Management................................................... .............18

6.2. Water Pollution Management .................................................. ........18

6.3. Solid Waste Management .................................................. ............19

6.4. Green Cover Development .................................................. ...........19

6.5. Community Development Plan under CSR Programs ................................20

6.6. Budget for Environmental Measures ..................................................22

7. RISK ASSESSMENT & MITIGATION MEASURES ............................................22

8. PROJECT BENEFITS .................................................. ..........................22

9 CONCLUSIONS .................................................. ................................23


DEMO



Executive Summary

Prepared by & ES-2

1 INTRODUCTION 1.1 Preamble



global terry towel giants, agro/wood paper manufacturing unit, Trident Ltd.,

Paper Division (TLPD) and Colour Textile Limited (CTL) one of the largest

producers of yarn in India. In addition, Trident Group has a Sulphuric Acid

Plant (SAP). Trident group today is a USD 1 billion enterprise with an

employee head account of more than 10,000 and providing indirect




printing and writing grade paper, based on wheat straw as basic raw material

and later PM #1 has been upgraded to produce upto 110 tpd. In the Mill

Development Plan (MDP) in 2005, TLPD has installed a new paper machine

(PM #2) of capacity 265 tpd, a new Elemental Chlorine Free (ECF) based 225

tpd wheat straw fibre line and 65 tpd hard wood fibre line.

1.2 Proposed Project





Ü Up-gradation of paper machines #1 & #2 to increase production of paper

from 375 tpd to 550 tpd

Ü Up-gradation of the exiting ECF straw pulp mill to increase the capacity


Ü Up-gradation of the existing ECF wood pulp mill to increase the capacity


Ü Increase Captive Cogeneration Plant (CCP) from 49.4 MW to 90.9 MW

by adding another 41.5 MW power plant.

Ü Upgrade / augment supporting sections consisting of chemical recovery,

water intake, water treatment and wastewater treatment to match the

above capacities


DEMO



Executive Summary

Prepared by & ES-3

Ü The driving force for the MEP is a combination of a quest for improved

environmental performance and an increasing market demand for paper

and to sustain in the market.

1.3 Need for the EIA Study

According to the Environmental Impact Assessment Notification issued by

Ministry of Environment and Forests MoEF under Environment Protection Act,

1986, Paper and Pulp Industries (excluding manufacture of paper from waste

paper) are required to obtain Environmental Clearance. In addition to this, any

captive co-generation power plant with capacity greater than 5 MW should

also obtain environmental clearance.

Since the proposed facility is involved in the manufacture of additional pulp,

the current subject project falls under category “A” under sector 5(i). In

addition to this, it is proposed to Increase Captive Cogeneration Plant (CCP)

from 49.4 MW to 90.9 MW by adding another 41.5 MW co-generation captive

power plant within the Mill site, which falls under category “B” under sector

1(d) of the EIA Notification 2006. Since the mill is located in industrial area,

public consultation has been exempted.

1.4 EIA Study

The EIA study was undertaken during October 2013 – January 2014 covering

all the aspects of the specific conditions mentioned in the ToR issued by

MoEF.

EIA study was undertaken by M/s Cholamandalam MS Risk Services, a

NABET accredited EIA consulting organization, with specific project related

inputs required for undertaking the EIA studies from SPB Projects and

Consultancy Ltd (SPB-PC), Chennai. The risk assessment and disaster

management plan have also been prepared to meet the eventualities during

operation of the proposed Mill Expansion Plan (MEP) project of TLPD

at Dhaula Village Barnala District, Punjab. The summary of the findings of the

EIA study are presented in the subsections of this document.


DEMO



Executive Summary

Prepared by & ES-4

1.5 Environmental Setting of the Site

The study area constitutes the 10Km radius of the existing TLPD Mill at

Dhaula village. Figure 1 presents the existing TLPD Mill site and the study

area. The TLPD mill area will be located within the coordinates of 30°17''57’N

latitude and 75° 29''32’E longitude and can be identified as per OSM Maps of

H43J7, H43J8, H4311, H43J12 . Details of environmental setting around the

mill site and the study area are given in Table 1.

Table 1 Environmental Setting of the Mill Site and the Study Area


1 Location:

Village Dhaula

District Barnala

State Punjab

2 Latitude 30°17''57’N

3 Longitude 75° 29''32’E

4 Elevation above mean sea level (MSL) 224 M

5 Climatic conditions as per IMD Annual Max. Temp :43.5°C Annual Min. Temp : 7.8°C Annual total rainfall : 686.3mm

6 Present land use at the project site Un cultivable land within the premises of existing plant

7 Nearest Highway/Road State Highway -13 - 600 m

8 Defence installations Nil within 10 km radius

9 Nearest railway station Barnala (12 .0 km)

10 Nearest airport/air strip Chandigarh (175.0 km)

11 Nearest village Dhaula (5 km)

12 Nearest town Barnala(10.0 km)

13 Nearest river Nil in 10 km radius

14 Hills/valleys Nil in 10 km radius

15 Archaeologically important places Nil in 10 km radius

16 Nearest place of Tourist/ Religious importance Nil in 10 km radius

17 Ecologically sensitive areas (National Parks/Wildlife sanctuaries/ bio-sphere reserves)

Nil in 10 km radius

18 Reserved/ Protected forests within 10 km radius

Nil in 10 km radius

19 List of Major Polluting Industries There are no major industries in the study area.

20 Topography of the plant site The area forms a part of Indogangetic alluvial plain and is more or less flat

21 Nature of soil Sandy and sandy loam


DEMO



Executive Summary

Prepared by & ES-5

Figure 1: Study Area Map – 10 Km Radius


DEMO



Executive Summary

Prepared by & ES-6

2. OVER VIEW OF THE ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT ASPECTS IN THE EXISTING FACILITY




and later PM #1 has been upgraded to produce up to 110 tpd. Trident has

obtained the “No Objection Certificate” from the Punjab Pollution control Board

for the expansion of industry for the manufacture of writing and printing paper

to 260 tpd and caustic soda at 45 tpd vide NOC no.3430 dated 21.02.2002.

Again in 2004 NOC from Punjab Pollution control Board is obtained for the

expansion to 265 tpd and the expansion of captive power generation plant

from 9.4MW to 49.4MW vide NOC no.EE (P)/2004/SGR/LM/9/ dated

26.10.2004.

TLPD obtained Environmental Clearance (EC) for Mill Development Plan

(MDP) during 2005 vide File no.J-11011/52/2005 IA-II(I) dated, 07.11.2005 for

Paper production from 265 tpd to 375 tpd by upgrading PM # 1 to 110 tpd and

installing PM # 2 of capacity 265 tpd and Captive generation from 9.4 MW to

49.4 MW. The industry obtained the Consent to Operate under Air (Prevention

and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981, vide No. SEE (ZP-II)/SGR/APC/2012-

13/V-(371) V-413 dated, 23.07.2013 and further got renewed vide no. SEE

(ZP-II/SGR/APC/2012-13/V-(371)V-413 dated 23/7/2012, which is valid up to

22/1/12013 and further extended upto 22/1/2016. Consent to Operate under

Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974, vide no No. SEE (ZP-

II)/SGR/WPC/2012-13/V-(399)V-518 dated, 23.07.2013 and further got

renewed vide no. SEE (ZP-II/SGR/WPC/2012-13/V-(399)V-518 dated

23/7/2012, which is valid up to 22/1/12013 and further extended upto

22/1/2016.

3. DETAILS OF THE PROPOSED EXPANSION


Mill Expansion Plan (MEP). The proposed Mill Expansion Plan (MEP) is to

increase the paper production capacity from 375 tpd to 550 tpd by upgrading

the existing paper machines, fibre lines and increasing the captive generation

capacity from 49.4 to 90.9 MW.

Overview of the proposed expansion project requirements are presented in

Table 2.


DEMO



Executive Summary

Prepared by & ES-7

Table 2 Overview of the Proposed Expansion Project Requirements



Paper Machines

Paper machine #1 tpd 110 170 60 Augmentation

Paper Machine #2 tpd 265 380 115 Augmentation

Pulp Mill

Straw Pulp Mill tpd 225 280 55 Augmentation

Wood Pulp Mill tpd 65 150 85




Recovery Plant


tpd 565 450 (-)115 Recovery boiler #1 retired Augmentation of recovery boiler #2


tpd - 300 300 Addition of new recovery boiler

Evaporation plant tph 235 335 100 Augmentation of evaporator #1 &#2



Lime kiln tpd 140 179 39 Additional burnt lime will be procured from the market

Power Plant


Turbo Generators




3.1 Land for the Project

The existing TLPD Mill has total land of 405 acres, including 210 acres

comprising of vacant spaces, well covered with greenery & plantations using

treated effluent.

The proposed facilities will be located in the vacant spaces in the mill area and

some of the roads and drains will be rerouted. About 20 acres of land is

required for the MEP as per the broad break-up given in the Table 3 The

vacant spaces available in the mill premises, have been identified and found

to be suitable and adequate to accommodate all the new facilities planned

under the project. The figure showing the proposed facilities is given in Figure

2


DEMO



Executive Summary

Prepared by & ES-8

Table 3 Land use breakup of the MEP

S.No Description MEP Area in Sq.m

1 Plants and Building 12,900

2 Effluent Treatment Plant 2,000

3 Storage Yards 40,000

4 Road and Pathways 2,000

5 Greenbelt and Plantation 20,000

6 Open Space -

Total area 76,900

Figure 2 Proposed Project Facilities within the Existing Mill Area

3.2 Materials and Resources Requirement

3.2.1 Raw Materials


average annual requirement of the raw materials is given in Table 4. The raw

materials will be stored in covered sheds at the project site.

Table 1 Raw Materials Requirement


(Pre-MEP) Post MEP Incremental Source

Straw tpa 169,000 269,000 100,000 Purchased from farmers and transported by trucks &Tractors

Wood tpa 1,00,000 2,27,000 1,27,000 80% venieer chips Haryana and Punjab / 20 % wood logs transported by truck


DEMO



Executive Summary

Prepared by & ES-9

3.2.2 Fuels Requirement

Imported coal will be transported by ship and by trucks to mill and the local

coal will be sourced from Central Coal Limited, Madya Pradesh and the coal

will be transported by train upto Barnala and by truck to mill. The fuel

requirement is give in Table 5.

Table 5 Fuel Requirement


(Pre- MEP) Post MEP Incremental

Furnace oil Kla 9,100 4,600 (-)4,500

Coal for PG plant tpa - 25,600 25,600

Husk/Biomass tpa 121,000 221,000 100,000


Coal (Indigenous) tpa 169,000 310,000 141,000

Pet coke tpa 29,000 52,000 23,000

3.2.3 Wastewater Treatment Plant (WWTP)

The wastewater generated after MEP will be around 27,420 m³/day. Post MEP

wastewater generation will be as follows

1 Waste water generation for post MEP : 27,420 m³/day

2 Loss of water in sludge : 400 m³/day

3 Total treated waste water discharge : 27,020 m³/day

4 Treated effluent for irrigation : 18,220 m³/day

5 Recycle for ash & Coal Handling : 100 m3/day

5 Treated effluent to discharge : 8,700 m³/day

3.2.4 Solid Waste Generation and Disposal

The expected solid wastes generation in the proposed MEP is non-hazardous

in nature. The solid waste generation will be ash from AFBC boiler, lime

sludge and straw dust. In addition to this, there will be fiber sludge generation

from the wastewater treatment plant. The details of solid waste generation and

quantities with disposal methods are given in Table 6

Table 6 MEP Solid Waste Generation and Disposal After Expansion

Program

S.No Source Quantity (as per plant

record), T/day Disposal Method

1 Staw dry dust 26 Used as a fuel for boilers

2 Staw wet dust 78 Used as a fuel for boilers

3 Wood saw dust 6.5 Used as a fuel for boilers

4 Primary clarifier sludge 32.4


5 Secondary clarifier 1.1


6 Lime sludge 60

will be sold to cement manufacturing units

7 Fly ash 625 (based on 40% ash

coals)



DEMO



Executive Summary

Prepared by & ES-10

3.2.4 Project cost


break up is given in the following Table 7

Table 7 Project Cost

S.No Description Cost in Crores

1 Civil Works 33

2 Plant & Machinery Cost (including erection and engineering) excluding environmental management cost

286


40

4 Environmental management cost 81

Total 440


DEMO



Executive Summary

Prepared by & ES-11

4 DESCRIPTION OF THE BASELINE ENVIRONMENT

Primary baseline environmental monitoring studies were undertaken during

October 2013 – January 2014 as per the ToR issued by MoEF and various

guidelines suggested by Central Pollution Control Board and Ministry of

Environment and Forests, Govt. of India. Summary of the baseline

environmental study findings are presented in the following subsections.

4.1. Site Specific Meteorology Conditions

The maximum and minimum temperatures recorded during the study period

are 4 and 40oC respectively. The relative humidity found varying from 22.2%

to 97%. The predominant winds are mostly from NNW (18%) and SSE (12 %)

directions. No rainfall was recorded during study period. The sky was

observed to cloud free and clear during most part of the study period.

Site specific SODAR studies indicated that the hourly averaged mixing height

pertaining to unstable Atmospheric Boundary layer during the day time (1000-

1700 hours) is seen to vary from a minimum of 310m to a maximum of 1070m.

The average level is seen to be 638±194. Site specific meteorological data

was adopted in predicting the ground level concentrations of pollutants due to

emissions from co-generation power plant stack.

4.2. Ambient Air Quality Monitoring

Air quality monitoring at eight locations was undertaken during the study

period as per the Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB) guidelines. The

summary of the 2nd highest background concentrations of particulate matter

(PM10), particulate matter (PM2.5), sulphur dioxide (SO2) and Oxides of Nitrogen

(NOx) are presented in Table 8. The results of the monitored data indicate that

the 2nd highest PM10 and PM2.5 concentrations in the entire study area were

found to be higher than that of the NAAQs, whereas the average

concentrations were reported to be within the NAAQs. This could be attributed

to the wind borne dust from the agriculture fields and open areas in the study

area.

Concentration of other stipulated pollutants were reported to be well within the

National Ambient Air Quality standards of CPCB.

TABLE 8 Summary of Ambient Air Quality in the Study Area

Pollutant PM10 PM2.5 SO2 NOx

Concentration range

- og/m3

114 to 144 74 to 87 10.8 to 18.1 24.5 to 42.8


DEMO



Executive Summary

Prepared by & ES-12

4.3. Water Environment

The analysis results of Surface water samples from Uppli Canal indicate that

the pH ranges in between 6.5 and 8.5, TDS found to be about 198mg/l. In the

case of ground water samples in the study area, pH ranges in between 7.2

and 7.9, TDS ranges from 706 mg/l to 1790 mg/l which is higher than the

63qdesirable limits. TDS in the tube well water samples collected from the

existing mill was reported to be 1790 mg/l, whereas the total hardness was

reported to be in the range of 204 mg/l to 628 mg/l. The heavy metal

concentration in the ground water samples was reported to be Below

Detectable Limit. Ground water samples are free from oil and grease and

biological contamination.

4.4. Noise Level Survey

Day time and night time noise levels at residential areas in the study area was

found to be varying from 53.1 to 57.9 dB (A) and 46.3 dB(A) to 49.5 dB(A)

respectively. In general, the noise levels are found to be within the acceptable

levels in residential areas.

4.5. Soil Environment

The soils in the study area are broadly sandy clay loam, sandy loom and loam

type. The pH of the soil extracts varied from 7.94 to 8.33. These soils can be

classified into moderately alkaline type. The available nitrogen in soils ranged

from 1206 to 1695 kg/ha. Thus, the available nitrogen in soils was found

sufficient in terms of standard soil classification by Indian Council for

Agricultural Research (ICAR), New Delhi

Among heavy metals the concentrations of Cadmium found below 0.01mg/kg.

Zinc in the soils was recorded to be in the range of 19.39 mg/kg to 37.25

mg/kg. Iron content was reported to be in the range of 2117.61 to 8940.10

mg/kg which indicates that the soil is rich in iron content. Available

phosphorus levels in soils were found to be less in the soil samples collected

at the existing mill area.

4.6. Flora and Fauna Studies

As confirmed by topo sheet and satellite imagery, Agricultural area is largest

land use in study area. Hectares of fertile land are under cultivation and

agriculture is mainly divided into two season viz. kharif and rabi. The main

Kharif crops are Cotton (Gossypium arboreum) and Rice (Oryza sativa).

Horticulture crops like Ber (Zizhiphus mauritiana), Amrud (Psidium guajava),

Peach (Prunus spp.), Grapes (Vitis vinifera) and Chilly (Capsicum spp.) are

common during kharif season.


DEMO



Executive Summary

Prepared by & ES-13

The Main Rabi crops are wheat (Triticum aestivum) and mustard (Brassica

junctea) and oil seeds. Minor Rabi crops like Potato (Solanum tuberosum)

and other winter vegetables were observed to be planted on banks of paddy

fields. In Barnala district major area is under agriculture crops i.e. 92%.

Horticulture, fodder, forest occupy 1%, 6.19% and 0.9% respectively. The

prominent cropping system is paddy- wheat followed by cotton-wheat. Wheat,

paddy and cotton are major crops which occupy 90%, 80% and 10% of net

sown area. Several human settlements were observed in the area. A major

city Barnala is present in Zone II of study region. Villages like Dhanaula,

Dhurkot, Pakhho, Ghunas, Handiya and Rura Kelan are prominent

settlements.

4.7. Socio-Economic Environment

Since the proposed project is an expansion project within the existing plant

area and the project doesn’t require any additional land. Hence rehabilitation

and resettlement of people is not envisaged. Although the proposed project

does not displace any human settlement, for the purpose of the establishing

the background socioeconomic conditions of the study area, the human

settlements falling within the buffer zone of 10 km radius from the project site

have been considered for mapping socioeconomic aspects. Survey was

undertaken in Nov 2013. The study area consists of 24 human settlements

including one Municipal Corporation. Cumulative population in the study area

is 2,29,806 with 1,23,053 males and 1,06,753 females. The population of

children below 6 years was found to be 25,968 which are of about 11.3% of

the total population. District’s Population density is 1482 per square kilometer.

The Sex Ratio was found at 868 females per thousand males. The Sex ratio of

the children was about 885. The Cumulative of Vulnerable population such as

Scheduled Caste was 67,430 and there is no existence of ST population in the

study area.

Within the study area there is no archaeological important sites located and

the nearest ASI notified place is Bhatinda Fort at Bhatinda at the aerial

distance of 55 Km from the project site.


DEMO



Executive Summary

Prepared by & ES-14

5. ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES

5.1. Impact during Construction Phase

The environmental impacts during the construction stage will be short term,

temporary in nature and will be confined very close to project sites. The

manpower required for these activities should preferably be employed from

nearby villages.

Stone chips, bricks and sand required for construction will be available locally.

Cement and steel will be procured from market. There will be no appreciable

impact on local environment for obtaining these construction materials due to

implementation of Environmental Management Plan.

Construction work will provide employment to a number of people both directly

and indirectly. Approximately 500 people on an average peak day will be

employed for a period of about 10 to 12 months. This will be beneficial to the

local economy. If workers stay within project site premises proper housing

arrangements will be made for construction workers.

5.2. Impact during Operation Phase

5.2.1. Point Source and Associated Environmental Impacts

The major pollutants post MEP will be Particulate Matter (PM) and sulphur

dioxide (SO2) and Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) will be the important air pollutants

from the proposed project. The main source of pollution is due to emissions

from proposed co-generation plant boilers, new recovery boiler and lime kiln

units. A high efficiency ESP will be installed to reduce the particulate matter

and the stack will be designed suitably to reduce the effect of SO2 and NOx

emissions.

In order to assess the likely possible impacts on the background air quality, air

quality modelling exercise was undertaken as per the CPCB guidelines. Site

specific meteorological data collected at the site was adopted while predicting

the 2nd highest 24 hours average ground level concentrations of Particulate

Matter, sulphur dioxide and oxides of nitrogen. ISCST3 air quality modelling

tool, an MOEF approved software, was used for predicting the ground level

concentrations in the study area. The site specific meteorological information

indicated that, predominantly winds were found to blow from North Westerly

direction and hence the impact zone in the down wind direction will located in

the south easterly direction.


DEMO



Executive Summary

Prepared by & ES-15

5.3. Predicted Ground Level Concentration

The predicted cumulative post project scenario of 24hours average GLC of

sulphur dioxide near the villages and settlements located was estimated to be

in the range of 17 to 19µg/m3 which is within the prescribed NAAQ standards.

The predicted 24 hours GLC of Oxides of Nitrogen near the villages and

settlements located in the impact zone will be less than the norms prescribed

by the NAAQ standards. Further, the concentrations were found to get diluted

rapidly and the GLC will reach less than 3µg/m3 within a distance of 3Km from

the project site. The predicted cumulative post project scenario of 24hours

average concentration was estimated to be in the range of 26.7 to 30.2µg/m3

which are within the prescribed NAAQ standards.

The predicted 24 hours GLC of particulate matter was reported to be in range

of 0.05 to 2.3 µg/m3.

5.4. Fugitive Emissions and Associated Environmental Impacts

TLPD proposes to install dust collection systems at all the coal transfer points

and also coal crusher to control dust emissions. In addition adequately

designed water sprinkling systems have been installed at the coal yard to

control the dust emissions. Likely possible controlled fugitive emissions due to

natural wind conditions at the coal yard were estimated using USEPA (U.S.

Environmental Protection Agency) emission factor document guidelines.

ISCST3 model with particle deposition and non-buoyant and non-plume option

was considered for modelling the dispersion of the controlled fugitive dust

emissions from coal stock yard. Site specific hourly meteorological data was

used for predicting the GLCs. The 24-hours average GLCs at the facility at

nearby villages will be below 1 µg/m3 due to the implementation of dust control

measures.

5.5. Noise Emissions and Control

TLPD proposes to install low noise generating equipment wherever applicable

as per the recommended standards and guidelines. Major noise generating

equipment will be housed inside the room to attenuate noise emissions.

Predicted sound pressure levels in around the proposed project site due to

operation of the facility was modelled as per ISO 9613 standards and the

modelled sound pressure levels at the facility boundary were found to be

below the stipulated threshold noise level of 75 dB(A) for industrial areas.

Noise levels outside the facility boundary will be further attenuated due to the

proposed green belt all along the plant boundary.


DEMO



Executive Summary

Prepared by & ES-16

5.6. Impacts on the Water Environment

Water is sourced from Uppli canal and ground water for the existing facilities

and the same will be extended for expansion facilities also. The TLPD has

obtained necessary permission for drawl of 25,000 m³/day water from Uppli

canal and necessary permission from the Central Ground Water Board for the

abstraction of 14,040 m³/day of ground water was obtained.

The central ground water board test reports and site specific bore well yield

test data indicated that the average yield from the existing 7 number of bore

wells will be adequate to meet the water demand in the existing facility. The

average of the bore wells was reported to be in the order of 2006 m3/day and

the recharge potential of these bore wells during the pre-monsoon period is

about 2500m3/day from each of the seven bore wells and hence the impact

zone will be limited to plant site only. Hence no impacts on the neighboring

ground water resources are envisaged due to extraction of the ground water.

No settlements and ground water extraction facilities for drinking and domestic

applications were located within 2.5km from the existing facility. Hence the

overall impact on the ground water resources will be insignificant.

5.7. Environmental Risks due to Storage and Handling of Solid and

Hazardous Wastes




wastewater treatment plant and straw dust from the pulp mill.

Based on the utilization of 100% Indian coal (40% ash coals), the total ash

generation from the facility after mill expansion plan has been estimated as

625T/day, whereas the actual ash generation from the boilers will be far less

than that of the above estimated levels due to utilization of blended coals

(imported and Indian coal) and bio-mass. Dry ash handling facilities will be

installed thereby avoiding usage of water. Suitably designed fly ash silos will

be installed. TLPD has been disposing the fly ash to brick manufacturing and

cement mills through Tanya Enterprises.

Sludge generated from the primary clarifier of the wastewater treatment plant

will be sold to board manufacturing facilities. The wood and straw dust

generated from the facility is being used as fuel in boilers and similar practices

will be adopted after Mill expansion program.

About 245 T/day of lime sludge will be processed in the existing lime-kiln after

mill expansion plan and about 185 T/day of burnt lime from the kiln will be


DEMO



Executive Summary

Prepared by & ES-17

reused in the process and rejects from the Lime Kiln to the tune of 60T/day will

be disposed to cement manufacturing and brick kiln manufacturing units.




5.8. Soil and Groundwater Quality Related Impacts

Treated wastewater is being used for green cover and irrigation applications at

existing mill area and similar practices will be developed after expansion

program. The treated wastewater will comply with the stipulated irrigation

discharge standards hence impacts on the soil and ground water quality will

be insignificant. Sodium Absorption Ratio (SAR) is the critical water quality

parameter that will show some impact on the plant growth and crop yield. SAR

levels greater than 10 will have some impact on the yield of the crop as per

guidelines published by Indian Agriculture Research Council. Based on the

assumption that the total dissolved solids of the treated wastewater will not

exceed stipulated standard of 2100 mg/l (envisaged range of 1200 to

1800mg/l), the maximum SAR will not exceed a level of 5, which is well below

the permissible level of “10”. Hence the treated wastewater will be suitable for

irrigation (paddy and other crops).

5.9. Impacts on Ecological and Biological Environment

5.9.1. Impacts on Flora

During operational phase, the major pollutants post MEP will be Particulate

Matter (PM) and sulphur dioxide (SO2) from the AFBC Boiler. A high efficiency

ESP will be installed to reduce the particulate matter and the stack will be

designed suitably to reduce the effect of SO2 and NOx emissions and the

resultant concentration of PM, SO2 and NOx will be kept, well within the

standards prescribed by pollution control board.

5.9.2. Impacts on Fauna

The mammalian faunal density in this region is as such very low and no further

impact is expected on mammalian fauna. Avifauna in the close vicinity of

project site may get disturb and locally migrate due to construction activities.

However, during operational phase noise levels will be maintained below 55

dBA. Which will be further reduced inside greenbelt canopy. Studies conducted

by Parris and Schnieder (2009) showed that birds in urban environment can

tolerate noise levels up to 67 dBA. Hence, no impacts on birds are envisaged.

No ecologically sensitive site is identified in study area, hence no direct or

indirect adverse impacts are expected on ecology due to proposed

development.


DEMO



Executive Summary

Prepared by & ES-18

6. ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

6.1. Air Quality Management

The existing facility has implemented various air quality management

programs and the stack emission test reports of PPCB and external testing

agency confirmed that emissions were found to comply with stipulated

standards. The following environmental management plan will be adopted

under proposed expansion plan:

Due to utilisation of high calorific value imported coal with sulphur content less

than 0.7%, the specific SO2 emission rate from the proposed facility will be two

to three times lower than that of the conventional co-generation power plants

that are operated on high ash content Indian coal

Dedicated Electrostatic Precipitators will be installed for control of Particulate

Matter (PM) emissions from Power boilers, chemical recovery boilers and lime

kiln. ESPs will be designed to achieve efficiency more than 99.9% to limit the

PM concentrations below 50 mg/Nm3 as against the stipulated standards of

150 mg/Nm3.

Sufficient stack height will be provided as per the stack height norms

stipulated by CPCB for wider dispersal of pollutants. A continuous online stack

emission monitoring unit will be installed to monitor Particulate Matter, SO2

and NOx emissions. Provision of water sprinkling system at raw material

storage yard and there will be the provision of dust extraction systems at dust

generating source.

TLPD is not using kraft pulping hence there is no odor gas emission and no

such emission are envisaged

6.2. Water Pollution Management

The water consumption after MEP will be around 30,300 m3/day and the

treated wastewater generation of internal recycling will be in the order of

27,420 m3/day. Wastewater generated from the plant will be treated in the

existing effluent treatment plant. It has been proposed to augment the existing

treatment plant to meet the additional discharge generated from the expansion

program. The existing ETP consists of primary treatment, anaerobic biological

treatment (USAB) and extended aeration biological treatment facilities. Pune

oxygen system has been implemented in addition to the existing fixed surface

aerators in the extended aeration facility. It is proposed to install additional

treatment units such as modification of existing primary clarifier, additional

UASB reactor, sludge decanters and secondary clarifier.


DEMO



Executive Summary

Prepared by & ES-19

The facility is permitted to discharge about 8700m3/day of treated wastewater

into drain and the balance about 12500 m3/day of treated wastewater is being

utilized for greenbelt and horticulture development activities within the existing

facilities. After expansion scheme, the total treated wastewater that needs to

be utilized for irrigation and greenbelt after discharging 8700m3/day into drain

and fly ash conditioning and dust suppression, will be in the order of

18000m3/day. Since 12500m3/day of treated waste water is being utilized in

165 Acres of the existing greenbelt area, the balance additional un-utilized

treated wastewater to the to tune of 5500m3/day will be utilized for irrigation in

the adjoining TLPD area of 30 Acres. Excess un-utilized treated wastewater, if

any, will be further supplied to local farmers for which TLPD had obtained

necessary permission from Government of Punjab and also necessary MoUs

were signed with local farms to irrigate 87 Acres of farm land

6.3. Solid Waste Management




wastewater treatment plant and straw dust from the pulp mill. Based on the

utilization of 100% Indian coal (40% ash coals), the total ash generation from

the facility after mill expansion plan has been estimated as 625T/day, whereas

the actual ash generation from the boilers will be far less than that of the

above estimated levels due to utilization of blended coals (imported and Indian

coal) and bio-mass.

Primary clarifier sludge will be disposed to board manufacturing facilities. The

wood and straw dust generated will be used as fuel in boilers. About 245

T/day of lime sludge will be processed in the existing lime-kiln after mill

expansion plan and about 185 T/day of burnt lime from the kiln will be reused

in the process and rejects from the Lime Kiln to the tune of 60T/day will be

disposed to cement manufacturing and brick kiln manufacturing units.




6.4. Green Cover Development

Extensive plantation has been done under green cover development for the

existing plant. Green cover has been developed and well maintained along the

internal roads and mill area. The mill has made elaborate arrangement in

developing green cover inside the mill.


DEMO



Executive Summary

Prepared by & ES-20







TLPD have already developed thick greenbelt of nearly 165 Acres. Wide

variety of native as well as exotic species was observed in greenbelt. Flora

was dominated by Casuarina equisetifolia, Terminalia arjuna, Lagerstomia

parviflora, Azadiracta indica, Bignonia spp, Delonix regia and Alstonia

scholaris. These species are suitable to attenuate impacts arising due to

emissions. In entire study area, maximum diversity of flora was observed

inside plant due to extensive greenbelt development.

6.5. Community Development Plan under CSR Programs


just on commercial aspect but also on the society they live in. Every social

initiative undertaken by TLPD was started with a profound sense of

responsibility and thought behind it.






enhance their employability. TLPD believes that as an organisation, the best










this area of Punjab. With many more such initiatives, it is TLPD’s constant

endeavour to develop a culture of giving back to the society and help

create a better future for all Stakeholders.




DEMO



Executive Summary

Prepared by & ES-21



Ü Female empowerment

Ü Green manufacturing ideas

Ü Skill development

Ü Educational infrastructure

Ü Medical facilities

Ü Environment awareness











age care.

Based on the need based assessment, community development plan has

been developed and budget for CSR programs is presented in the following

table.

Table 9 Proposed CSR Budget

S No CSR Programs Budget (Rs. in Lakhs) Year 1 Year 2 Year 3 Year 4 Year 5 Total

1 Health Promotions Programs

26.4 39.6 52.8 79.2 66 264

2 Education Promotion Programs

17.6 26.4 35.2 52.8 44 176

3 Economic Development Programs

13.2 19.8 26.4 39.6 33 132


8.8 13.2 17.6 26.4 22 88


22 33 44 66 55 220

Total 88 132 176 264 220 880

Note: 2% of the Project cost is allocated for CSR development plan.


DEMO



Executive Summary

Prepared by & ES-22

6.6. Budget for Environmental Measures

It is proposed to invest about Rs 81 Crores for the implementation of pollution

control systems, environmental management programs, rainwater harvesting

schemes, monitoring systems, greenbelt/green cover development etc during

the construction and operational phase of the proposed facility.

7. RISK ASSESSMENT & MITIGATION MEASURES

Risk assessment study of the proposed operations at the project has identified

no hazardous events, which would project damaging energies outside of the

plant boundary. Events identified for offsite facilities are estimated to occur at

extremely low incident frequencies and/or not to significant levels of

consequence. Management of hazardous event scenarios and risks in general

can be adequately managed to acceptable levels. TLPD proposed to adopt

adequately designed fire fighting systems and fire protection designs at deign

and operational phase as per the applicable rules and regulations. An effective

Disaster Management Plan (DMP) to mitigate the risks involved will be

implemented during to the operational phase of the project.

8. PROJECT BENEFITS

The proposed project will bring the following benefits to the region, state and

nation based on the following merits:

Ü During the operational phase, the proposed project will create direct

employment of about 100 persons. In addition to the direct employment,

the project would generate additional employment to about 500 persons in

the service organizations for material unloading and material feeding to

the plant, etc. In addition about 1000 to 1200 people may get benefited in

ancillary business such raw material procurement and additional transport

due to increased material movement, etc.

Ü The implementation of the project will undoubtedly provide stimulation for

added growth to a number of other industries like trucking industry which

will load and haul waste paper, raw materials, coal, and other supplies to

the mill and also mill outputs. Establishment of ancillary industries such as

core for paper reels, core plugs, waste paper supply organizations,

machining and welding units, etc.

Ü TPLD will spend at least three (2) percent of the annual profit after tax

(PAT) on CSR activities by including in its budget for CSR activities


DEMO



Executive Summary

Prepared by & ES-23

9 CONCLUSIONS

Ü This project will have beneficial impact/effects in terms of growth and

development in regional economy.

Ü This project will also generate direct and indirect employment to a

considerable number of families, who will render their services for the

employees of the project.

Ü Growth and development, in harmony with the environment, has always

been the approach of TPLD.

Ü The proposed project is structured to be inline with the requirements of

MoEF/CPCB/PPCB.

Ü Community impacts will be beneficial, as the project will generate

significant economic benefits for the locality.

Ü Continued improvement in wastewater treatment facilities coupled with

high energy electro static precipitator results in minimising the impacts on

the environment.

Thus, it can be concluded that with the judicious and proper implementation of

the pollution control and mitigation measures, the proposed project can

proceed without creating any significant negative impact on the environment.


DEMO

Mill Expansion Plan (MEP)

Project Proponent

TRIDENT LIMITED PAPER DIVISION

Dhaula – Barnala, Punjab

April 2014

EIA Consultant Project Consultant

Cholamandalam MS Risk Services Limited SPB Projects and Consultancy Limited

Parry Ho use , 4th Flo o r, No .2, NSC Bo se Ro a d Esvin Ho use , Pe rung udi, Che nnai 600 001, Tamil Nadu Che nnai 600096

ISO 9001: 2008 Certified Company mailbo x@spbpc .c o m

QCI Accredited EIA Consultant Organization www.spbpc .c o m


DEMO

Executive Summary


DEMO

Table of Contents


DEMO

Chapter 1

Introduction


DEMO

Chapter 2

Environmental Management Aspects in the

Existing Facilities


DEMO

Chapter 3

Details of the Proposed Expansion


DEMO

Chapter 4

Baseline Environmental Status


DEMO

Chapter 5

Assessment of Environmental Impacts


DEMO

Chapter 6

Environmental Management Plan


DEMO

Chapter 7

Risk Assessment Study and

Risk Mitigation Measures


DEMO

Chapter 8

Project Benefits


DEMO

Chapter 9

Summary and Conclusions


DEMO

Chapter 10

Disclosures of Consultants


DEMO

Mill Expansion Plan (MEP) EIA ReportDhaula Village Barnala District, Punjab

Table of content

Prepared by &

TABLE OF CONTENTS

CHAPTER # TITLE PAGE #

1 INTRODUCTION....................................................................................................... C1-1

1.1 Trident Group................................................................................................ C1-1

1.2 TLPD – Paper Mill .......................................................................................... C1-1

1.3 The Proposed Expansion Project................................................................... C1-3

1.4 Need for the Project...................................................................................... C1-4

1.5 Need for the EIA study .................................................................................. C1-5

1.6 Project Promoters & Environmental Consultant .......................................... C1-6

1.7 Regulatory Context ....................................................................................... C1-6

1.8 Mill site Location (Existing Mill) .................................................................. C1-11

1.9 Overview of the Methodology of the EIA Study ......................................... C1-14

1.10 Structure of the EIA Report......................................................................... C1-19

2 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT ASPECTS IN THE EXISTING

FACILITIES................................................................................................................ C2-1

2.1 Overview of the of the Existing Facilities ...................................................... C2-1

2.2 Process Description of the Existing facilities................................................. C2-2

2.3 Summary of the Environmental Compliance ................................................ C2-8

2.4 Existing Pollution Sources ............................................................................. C2-9

3 DETAILS OF THE PROPOSED EXPANSION................................................................ C3-1

3.1 Overview ....................................................................................................... C3-1

3.2 Salient Features of the Project...................................................................... C3-2

3.3 Land for the Project ...................................................................................... C3-2

3.4 Site Analysis................................................................................................... C3-5

3.5 Proposed Expansion- Paper Mill ................................................................... C3-7

3.6 Proposed Expansion-Captive Co-generation Plant ..................................... C3-10

3.7 Materials and Resources Requirement....................................................... C3-17

3.8 Water Requirement and Water Resources for the

Proposed Expansion ................................................................................... C3-20

3.9 Wastewater Treatment Plant (WWTP) ....................................................... C3-21

3.10 Solid Waste Generation and Disposal......................................................... C3-22

3.11 Power Requirement and Source ................................................................. C3-22

3.12 Fire Fighting System.................................................................................... C3-22

3.13 Project cost estimates and Schedule .......................................................... C3-23


DEMO


Table of content

Prepared by &


4 BASELINE ENVIRONMENTAL STATUS...................................................................... C4-1

4.1 Introduction .................................................................................................. C4-1

4.2 Land Environment ......................................................................................... C4-2

4.3 Geology and Soil Quality ............................................................................. C4-21

4.4 Mineral Resources....................................................................................... C4-24

4.5 Soil Environment ......................................................................................... C4-26

4.6 Seismic zone:............................................................................................... C4-32

4.7 Meteorological Data ................................................................................... C4-34

4.8 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring ................................................................. C4-40

4.9 Noise Environment...................................................................................... C4-47

4.10 Water Environment..................................................................................... C4-48

4.11 Ecological Environment............................................................................... C4-76

5. ASSESSMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS ........................................................ C5-1

5.1 General.......................................................................................................... C5-1

5.2 Impacts during Construction Phase .............................................................. C5-1

5.3 Impacts during Operational Phase................................................................ C5-2

6. ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN ................................................................ C6-1

6.1 General.......................................................................................................... C6-1

6.2 Environmental Management during Construction Phase............................. C6-1

6.3 Environmental Management Plan during Operation Phase ......................... C6-3

6.4 Environmental Monitoring Plan.................................................................. C6-39

6.5 Environmental Management Cell ............................................................... C6-41

6.6 Budgetary Cost Estimates for Environmental Management ...................... C6-41

7. RISK ASSESSMENT STUDY AND RISK MITIGATION MEASURES............................... C7-1

7.1. Introduction .................................................................................................. C7-1

7.2. Risk Assessment Methodology ..................................................................... C7-1

7.3. Risks due to Storage and Handling of Coal and Risk

Control Measures ....................................................................................... C7-22

7.4. Electrical Hazards and Safety Measures ..................................................... C7-23

7.5. Occupational Health and Noise Management Plan.................................... C7-24

7.6. Occupational Safety Management and Surveillance Programme .............. C7-25

7.7. Fire Protection and Fire Fighting Systems................................................... C7-27


DEMO


Table of content

Prepared by &


8 PROJECT BENEFITS .................................................................................................. C8-1

8.1 Improvement in the Physical Infrastructure................................................. C8-1

8.2 Improvement in Social Infrastructure........................................................... C8-2

8.3 Employment Potential .................................................................................. C8-3

8.4 Social Benefits ............................................................................................... C8-3

9. SUMMARY & CONCLUSIONS................................................................................... C9-1

9.1. Overview of the Project ................................................................................ C9-1

9.2. Environmental Setting of the Site ................................................................. C9-1

9.3. Base Line Environmental Status.................................................................... C9-1

9.4. Environmental Impacts and Management Plan............................................ C9-2

9.5. Project Benefits............................................................................................. C9-4

9.6. Conclusions ................................................................................................... C9-5

10 DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANTS............................................................................ C10-1

10.1 Introduction ................................................................................................ C10-1

10.2 Cholamandalam MS Risk Services Limited – EIA Consultant ...................... C10-1

10.3 SPB Projects and Consultancy Limited –Technical Consultant ................... C10-2

Annexure #

1 Existing EC Letter

2 ToR Letter and ToR Compliance

3 Notified Industrial area (Gazette Notification issued by Department of Industries and

Commerce, Government of Punjab)

4 Consultant QCI Accreditation Certificates and Laboratory Accreditation

5 CTO Renewal

6 NOC and Existing CTO letters

7 EC Compliance letter from MoEF

8 PPCB Stack Emission Monitoring Test Reports

9 External Agency Stack Emission Monitoring Test Reports

10 Water allocation letter from Irrigation Department for drawl of water from

Uppli canal

11 Ground Water Drawal Permission from Central Ground Water Board

12 Influent and Treated Wastewater Quality Report by PPCB

13 Consent from Government of Punjab for Discharge of Treated Wastewater into

Drains for Irrigation Applications

14 Hazardous Waste Authorization Letter from PPCB

15 MOU with Transporting Agency for the Disposal of Fly ash to Cement Manufactures


DEMO


Table of content

Prepared by &


Annexure #

16 Peterography Analysis & Elemental Analysis of Raw Materials

17 Existing Coal Linkage from CCL

18 Additional Coal Supply MoU from the Local Market

19 Material Balance

20 Soil Quality Test Reports Plate 1Mill Layout

21 SODAR Report

22 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Test Reports

23 Noise Monitoring Test Report

24 (a) Surface Water Quality Report

24 (b) Groundwater Quality Reports

25 Modelling Input & Output

26 Mass Balance of Effluent Treatment Scheme

27 Detailed Social Impact Assessment Report and List of NGO

28 Disaster Management Plan


DEMO

SFL&Clo2 plant

Paper Machine#1

Recovery#1

Cogen#1

WFL

WWTP

TREATED EFFLUENT

TO DISCHARGE

FRESH WATER

TREATED EFFLUENT

FOR IRRIGATION

m/day)3

Existing Mill -Water & Wastewater balance (in

RecyclewaterFresh Total

Paper Machine#2

Recovery#2

Cogen#2

Cogen#3

WWG To WWTP

Note:

TRIDENT LTD-PAPER DIVISION

SAP-Sulphuric Acid Plant

Consumption

WWG-Waste Water Generation

Others

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO


DEMO

exper ience the excellence

TRIDENT GROUP

NEW LINE PM-2+NFL+COGEN-2&3+CAUST.-2

TO OUT SIDE DRAINFM

OLD LINE PM-1+WFL+REC-1&2+COGEN-1LOW COD

CAPACITY-20000 TO 22000M³

COLLECTION PIT

PRIMARYCLARIFIER-1

MODIFICATION

CLARIFIER-2

O/F

AnaerobicLagoon

V-24000M³

U/F

HIGH CODWET WASHING

WWTP FLOW DIAGRAM

EQUALIZATION PIT(Removal of sand)

BIO CLARIFIER(Removal of sludge)

V - 400M³

O/F BUFFER TANK(Maintaining pH)

V - 380M³ V - 4253M³

(Generation ofUASB

Methane Gas)

O/F

GAS GAS HOLDER

V-198M³

Gas Generation to cogen-;U/F

WATER REJECT

SLUDGE TO CARDBOARDMANUFACTURERS

WIRE PRESSSLUDGE TANK

V-80M³

U/F

TREATED WATERCOLLECTION PIT

U/F

TO PLANTATION

SECONDARYCLARIFIERV-4800M³

AERATION

V-10800M³

AERATIONTANK-2V-3600M³

PREAERATION

TANK

TANK-2

O/F

O/F

(Generation of

BIO METHANISATION

Methane Gas)

PROPOSED

PROPOSED

DECANTER

Proposed new equipments

BUFFER TANK

(Maintaining pH) GAS HOLDER

Gas Generation to cogen-;

Conversion of existing sludge thickener intosecondary clarifier

CLARIFIER942 m3

AERATION TANKSECONDARY

PLANT

PRIMARY

O/F

TO SLUDGE U/F

U/F

COLLECTION PIT

TO TREATED

O/F

U/F

SLUDGE

DECANTER

WATER

DISPOSAL

PRESS

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO

SFL&ClO2

Paper Machine#1

Recovery#1

Cogen#1

WFL

WWTP

TREATED EFFLUENT

TO DISCHARGE

FRESH WATER

TREATED EFFLUENT

FOR IRRIGATION

m/day)3

Post MEP -Water & Wastewater balance (in

RecyclewaterFresh Total

Paper Machine#2

Recovery#2

Cogen#2

Cogen#3

WWG To WWTP

Note:

TRIDENT LTD-PAPER DIVISION

SAP-Sulphuric Acid Plant

Consumption

WWG-Waste Water Generation

(Eliminated)

New Recovery#3

(will be Eliminated / Standby)

New Cogen#4&#5

Others

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO

Annexure-9

Descr ipt ion UnitsEx ist ing ( Pre-

MEP)Post MEP

Product ionAnnual finished Product ion tpa 137,000 201,000

Finished Product ion tpd 375 550Pulp requirem ents - BSP BD tpd 200.0 280.0

- BWP BD tpd 65.0 150.0

- Market Wood Pulp BD tpd 38.2 13.9

Total BD tpd 303.2 443.9

Raw m ater ia l requirem ent

St raw tpa 169,000 269,000

W ood tpa 98,000 227,000

STEAM & POW ERProcess steam consum pt ionLP Steam - Paper Machines tph 35.97 52.77

- BSP tph 8.33 11.67

- BWP tph 3.25 7.50

- Recovery plant tph 26.47 44.06

- Miscellaneous tph 2.00 2.00

Tota l LP Steam consum pt ion tph 7 6 .0 2 1 1 8 .0 0

MP Steam - at Paper Machine tph

- BSP tph 16.67 23.33

- BWP tph 4.88 11.25

- Recovery plant tph 4.41 7.34

- Lim e kiln tph 0.20 0.20

- HP heater tph 20.54 37.69

- Misc and losses tph 1.00 1.00

- Other units tph 35.00 110.00

Tota l MP Steam consum pt ion tph 8 2 .6 9 1 9 0 .8 1

Add deaerater steam - LP tph 19.01 29.50

Tota l LP Steam including De- aerators steam tph 9 5 .0 3 1 4 7 .5 0

Condensat ion steam tph 103.44 178.99

Tota l steam generat ion from Boilers tph 2 7 3 .8 1 5 0 2 .5 0

Steam generated from Rec blrs tph 4 5 .6 4 8 2 .1 9

Tota l Steam generat ion from Pow er Boiler ( s) tph 2 2 8 .1 6 4 2 0 .3 1 Steam generat ion from Enm aas blrs ( 1 0 5 ata) tph 2 2 8 .1 6 2 4 0 .0 0 Steam generat ion from New blr ( 1 0 5 ata) tph - 1 8 0 .3 1

Husk/ Biom ass% of Steam generat ion % 25.00 25.00

tph 57.04 104.58

Husk/ Biom ass requirem ent tph 13.76 25.23 tpa 121,000 221,000

Coal ( im ported)

TRIDENT - PAPER UNITSteam and Power balance

Page 1 of 2


DEMO

Annexure-9

Descr ipt ion UnitsEx ist ing ( Pre-

MEP)Post MEP

TRIDENT - PAPER UNITSteam and Power balance

% of Steam generat ion % 25.00 25.00 tph 57.04 104.58

Coal ( im ported) requirem ent tph 6.76 12.39 tpa 59,000 109,000

Coal ( loca l)% of Steam generat ion % 40.00 40.00

tph 91.27 167.32

Coal ( local) requirem ent tph 19.30 35.38 tpa 169,000 310,000

Pet coke% of Steam generat ion % 10.00 10.00

tph 22.82 41.83

Pet coke requirem ent tph 3.26 5.98 tpa 29,000 52,000

Fuels requirem entHusk/ Biom ass tpa 121,000 221,000

Coal ( im ported) tpa 59,000 109,000

Coal ( local) tpa 169,000 310,000

Pet coke tpa 29,000 52,000

Pow er consum pt ion - Paper m achine including stock preparat ion MW 6.88 10.10

- BSP MW 2.83 3.97

- BWP MW 0.76 1.75

- Chem ical Recovery MW 1.91 3.41

- Power Plant MW 5.48 10.09

- WTP, ETP and others MW 1.41 2.07

- Tota l Pow er consum pt ion MW 1 9 .2 6 3 1 .3 7

- Power for associate m ills MW 26.00 50.00

Tota l pow er requirem ent MW 45.26 81.37

Steam flow through Recovery TAs tph 45.64 82.19

Steam flow through CPP TAs tph 224.36 415.51

Power generated in Recovery (Exist ing) TA 1 MW 4.33 5.60

Power generated in Recovery (New) TA 4 MW 6.04

Power generated in CPP TAs MW 40.44 69.22

Total Power generated in TAs MW 44.91 80.99

Powr from Grid MW 0.35 0.38

Page 2 of 2


DEMO


DEMO

Annexure 1

Existing Mill Water & Wastewater Balance


DEMO

Annexure 2

Block Flow Diagram – Existing Wastewater Treatment

Plant


DEMO

Annexure 3

Process Flow Diagram – Power Boiler �


DEMO

Annexure 4

Process Flow Diagram – Coal Handling System


DEMO

Annexure 5

Process Flow diagram – Bed Ash Handling System


DEMO

Annexure 6

Process Flow Diagram - Fly Ash Handling System


DEMO

Annexure 7

Process Flow Diagram - Wastewater Treatment Plant

Proposed Equipment


DEMO

Annexure 8

Post MEP Water Balance


DEMO

Annexure 9

Mass & Energy Balance


DEMO

Annexure 10

Water Drawal Permission Letters


DEMO

Annexure 11

Overall Mill Layout


DEMO

FEASIBILITY REPORT

for

Mill Expansion Plan (MEP)

April, 2014

Submitted to

TRIDENT LIMITED PAPER DIVISION

Dhaula – Barnala, Punjab

SPB PROJECTS AND CONSULTANCY LIMITED

Che nnai - India


DEMO

Trident Limited – Paper Division Feasibility Report

Dhaula, Barnala Mill Expansion Plan (MEP)

Prepared by 1

Table of Contents

S NO TITLE PAGE #

1 EXECUTIVE SUMMARY ..................................................................................................................... 3

1.1 Project Cost .............................................................................................................................. 5

1.2 Environmental Impact Assessment........................................................................................... 5

1.3 Environmental Management plan ............................................................................................. 7

1.4 Green Cover ............................................................................................................................. 8

1.5 Corporate Social Responsibility initiatives at TLPD ................................................................ 10

2 INTRODUCTION TO PROJECT...................................................................................................... 16

2.1 Back drop ............................................................................................................................... 16

2.2 Nature of the project................................................................................................................ 17

2.3 Need for the Project and its Importance to the Country and/or Region................................. 17

2.4 Employment Generation ......................................................................................................... 18

3 PROJECT DESCRIPTION............................................................................................................... 19

3.1 Existing facilities ..................................................................................................................... 19

3.2 Paper Machine ....................................................................................................................... 19

3.3 Pulp Mill ................................................................................................................................. 20

3.4 Chemical Recovery Plant ....................................................................................................... 22

3.5 Power House .......................................................................................................................... 23

3.6 Electrical ................................................................................................................................. 25

3.7 Water Treatment Plant (WTP) ................................................................................................ 26

3.8 Wastewater Treatment Plant (WWTP).................................................................................... 28

3.9 Project Proposals.................................................................................................................... 30

3.10 Plant Capacities...................................................................................................................... 32

3.11 Salient Features of the Project ............................................................................................... 33

3.12 Project Description.................................................................................................................. 34

3.13 Captive Co-generation Plant................................................................................................... 36

3.14 Fire Fighting System............................................................................................................... 41

3.15 Electrical Power Distribution ................................................................................................... 41

3.16 Water treatment Plant (WTP) ................................................................................................. 41

3.17 Wastewater Treatment Plant (WWTP).................................................................................... 41

3.18 Input Requirements ................................................................................................................ 42

3.19 Resource Optimisation ........................................................................................................... 44

3.20 Water Availability with Source................................................................................................. 45

3.21 Power Requirement and Source............................................................................................. 45

3.22 Environmental Impact Assessment......................................................................................... 46

3.23 Environmental Management plan ........................................................................................... 48

3.24 Green Cover ........................................................................................................................... 49

3.25 Social infrastructure ................................................................................................................ 51

4 SITE ANALYSIS .............................................................................................................................. 52

4.1 Site locational aspects ............................................................................................................ 52

4.2 Connectivity & Transportation................................................................................................. 52

4.3 Land Use, Land Form and Land Ownership ........................................................................... 53

4.4 Project Location Aspects ........................................................................................................ 53

4.5 Environmental Setting of the Site............................................................................................ 53

4.6 Existing Infrastructure ............................................................................................................. 56

4.7 Soil Classification.................................................................................................................... 57

4.8 Climatic Data .......................................................................................................................... 57


DEMO



Prepared by 2

S NO TITLE PAGE #

5 PLANNING BRIEF ........................................................................................................................... 58

5.1 Planning Concept ................................................................................................................... 58

5.2 Population Projection.............................................................................................................. 58

5.3 Land Use Planning ................................................................................................................. 58

5.4 Assessment of Infrastructure Demand (Physical, Social) ....................................................... 58

6 PROPOSED INFRASTRUCTURE................................................................................................... 59

6.1 Industrial Area (Processing Area) ........................................................................................... 59

6.2 Residential Area (Non Processing Area) ................................................................................ 59

6.3 Drinking Water Management .................................................................................................. 59

6.4 Drains and Sewerage System ................................................................................................ 59

6.5 Rain water Harvesting ............................................................................................................ 59

7 REHABILITATION AND RESETTLEMENT (R & R) PLAN .............................................................. 60

8 PROJECT SCHEDULE AND COST ESTIMATES........................................................................... 61

8.1 Implementation Schedule ....................................................................................................... 61

8.2 Project Cost ............................................................................................................................ 61

8.3 Environmental Protection........................................................................................................ 61

8.4 Economic Viability................................................................................................................... 62

9 ANALYSIS OF PROPOSALS (FINAL RECOMMENDATIONS).................................................... 63

9.1 Improvement in the Physical Infrastructure............................................................................. 63

9.2 Improvement in the Social infrastructure ................................................................................ 63

9.3 Corporate Social Responsibility initiatives at TLPD ................................................................ 64

9.4 Corporate Social Responsibility .............................................................................................. 69

Annexes

1 Existing Mill Water Balance

2 Existing WWTP flow Diagram

3. Flow diagram of Boiler

4. Flow diagram of Coal Handling System

5 Flow diagram Bed Ash Handling System

6, Flow diagram fly Ash Handling System

7. Flow diagram of WWTP Proposed Equipment

8. Post MEP Water Balance

9. Mass and Energy, Steam and power balance

10. Water Drawal Permission Letter

11. Overall Mill Layout


DEMO



Prepared by 3

1 EXECUTIVE SUMMARY



global terry towel giants, world largest agro based paper manufacturing unit,

Trident Ltd., Paper Division (TLPD) and Colour Textile Limited (CTL) one of

the largest producers of yarn in India. In addition, Trident Group has a

Sulphuric Acid Plant (SAP). Trident group today is a USD 1 billion enterprise

with an employee head account of more than 10,000 and providing indirect




International supplier award of the year in 2001, 2003, 2005 and 2006

from Wal-Mart USA

Home quality award – Best supplier of the year in 2006 and 2009 from

JC Penney

Innovation award for the year 2010 from JC Penney



Trident Limited-Paper Division (TLPD)– (formerly Abhisekh Industries limited-

AIL) manufactures a wide range of printing and writing papers including copier

paper; the principal raw materials are wheat straw; an agricultural residue and

wood, Trident produces high quality eco friendly and machine friendly paper.

TLPD is an ISO 9001:2008, OHSAS 18001:2007, ISO 14001:2004 and FSC

certified mill with an integrated pulp and paper mill.




and later PM #1 has been upgraded to produce upto 110 tpd.

In the previous expansion, Mill Development Plan (MDP) in 2005, TLPD has

installed a new paper machine (PM #2) of capacity 265 tpd, a new Elemental

Chlorine Free (ECF) based 225 tpd wheat straw fibre line and 65 tpd hard

wood fibre line.


DEMO



Prepared by 4

The proposed Mill Expansion Plan (MEP) is to increase the paper production

capacity from 375 tpd to 550 tpd by upgrading the existing paper machines,

fibre lines and increasing the captive generation capacity from 49.4 to 90.9

MW.

MEP with comprise the following:

Upgradation of paper machines #1 & #2 to increase production of paper


Upgradation of the exiting ECF straw pulp mill to increase the capacity


Upgradation of the existing ECF wood pulp mill to increase the capacity


Increase Captive Cogeneration Plant (CCP) from 49.4 MW to 90.9 MW


Upgrade / augment supporting sections consisting of chemical recovery,


above capacities, as stated below.



Paper Machines


tpd 375 550 175

Augmentation

Pulp Mill


BD tpd 225 280 55

Augmentation


BD tpd 65 150 85

Augmentation




Recovery Plant










Power Plant


Turbo Generators


DEMO



Prepared by 5






1.1 Project Cost

The project cost of MEP is Rs. 440 Crores and about Rs.81 Crores is

allocated towards pollution control equipment and implementation of

environmental pollution control measures.

1.2 Environmental Impact Assessment

Construction Phase

The construction activities of new installations will not necessitate any

displacement of people, as the construction will be carried out in the existing


Operational Phase

Air Environment

The major pollutants post MEP will be Particulate Matter (PM) and sulphur

dioxide (SO2) from the AFBC Boiler. A high efficiency ESP will be installed to

reduce the particulate matter and the stack will be designed suitably to reduce

the effect of SO2 and NOx emissions and the resultant concentration of PM,

SO2 and NOx will be kept, well within the standards prescribed by CPCB /

SPCB.

Wastewater Characteristics and Disposal

The present treated wastewater discharge from the WWTP is 21,140 m³/day.

Only 8,700 m³/day is discharged into drain and 12,440 m³/day is used after

appropriate treatment, for irrigation and losses in etp sludge 200 m³/day.

The post MEP treated wastewater discharge from WWTP will be

26,920 m³/day. Only 8,700 m³/day of treated waste water will be discharged

into drain and 18,220 m³/day of treated wastewater will be used for irrigation

and losses in etp sludge 400 m³/day

The characteristics of post MEP wastewater generated from various sections

of the mill are as given in the following table


DEMO



Prepared by 6

WASTEWATER CHARACTERISTICS (INFLUENT)

Characteristics Sl. No. Parameters Unit

High COD Low COD

1 Flow m³/day 9,000 18,420

2 Total Suspended Solids mg/l 1,800 1,200

3 BOD (3 Days at 270C) mg/l 1,100 400

4 COD mg/l 3,500 1,100

The wastewater will be treated to conform to the statutory standards of

SPCB/CPCB before discharging for irrigation, ash quenching and plantation

TREATED WASTEWATER CHARACTERISTICS (EFFLUENT)

Sl. No

Parameters Unit CPCB Permissible Limit

1 pH -- 7.5-8

2 Total Suspended Solids mg/l <100

3 Total Dissolved Solids mg/l <2100

4 BOD (3 Days at 270C) mg/l <30

5 COD mg/l <250

6 AOX kg/t of product

<1

Solid Waste Generation and Disposal

The expected solid wastes generation in the proposed MEP are non-

hazardous in nature. The solid waste generation will be ash from AFBC boiler,

lime sludge and straw dust. In addition to this, there will be fibre sludge

generation from the wastewater treatment plant. The details of solid waste

generation and quantities with disposal methods are given below

DETAILS OF SOLID WASTE GENERATION & DISPOSAL

Quantity (as per plant record), T/day

S.No Source Existing/ Pre MEP

Post MEP



method

1 Straw dry dust



2 Straw wet dust



3 Wood saw dust




25 32.4 6.9




0.8

1.1 0.3



6 Lime sludge 45 60 15 Sold to cement will be sold to


DEMO



Prepared by 7



Post MEP



method

manufacturing units through Tanya Enterprises.

cement manufacturing units

7 Fly ash

220


coals)

405



Noise environment

The noise level of the all the equipment will be kept within the PCB /

SPCB standard in and around the work zone.

Socio – Economics

The proposed land is located at the existing mill premises. Hence, there

will not be any resettlement and rehabilitation. Thus, there will not be

any adverse socio economic implications.

The economic status of the area is likely to improve, as there will be

direct / indirect employment generation during construction and

operational phases.

Risk Assessment & DMP

No major hazards with potential for any emergency situation exist in the

process plants. On site and off site emergency measures shall mitigate the

effect on any risk.

1.3 Environmental Management plan

1.3.1 Air Pollution Management

Installation of Electro Static Precipitator (ESP) of 99.9% efficiency to limit

the particulate matter concentrations below 50 mg/Nm3

Provision of adequate height stacks for wider dispersion of gaseous

emissions

Dust extraction system will be provided at transfer points of conveyor

system


DEMO



Prepared by 8

Conveyor belt will be closed to prevent dust generation

Provision of water sprinkling system at material handling and storage

yard


Asphalting of the roads within the plant area; and

Development of green cover around the plant to arrest the fugitive

emissions.

1.3.2 Water Pollution Management

Recycling of purged water in cooling tower into ash handling and

disposal system

Utilisation of treated domestic wastewater for green cover development

Provision of separate storm water system to collect and store run-off

water during rainy season and utilisation of the same in the process to

reduce the fresh water requirement.


The expected solid wastes from straw dust (26 tpd) will be used in boiler

as fuel.

The expected solid wastes from wood dust (6.5 tpd) will be used in boiler

as fuel.

The total ash expected post MEP (AFBC Boiler) will be about 625 tpd.

This will be disposed of to fly ash brick manufacturing units. The

expected WWTP waste sludge (fines and fibres) is about 32.4 tpd - sale

to board manufacturer. About 60 tpd lime sludge will be disposed to

cement plants through Tanya Enterprises.

Used oil is the other hazardous waste will be disposed of to

CPCB/SPCB authorised agencies.

1.4 Green Cover

In addition to the existing mitigation measures on environment, it is envisaged

to provide an additional environmental cover from emissions, by expanding

the existing green cover.


DEMO



Prepared by 9

The plantation and green cover development in an industrial area not only

serve as foreground and

background landscape features

resulting in harmonising and

amalgamating the physical

structures of the pulp and

paper mill with surrounding

environment but also act as a

pollutant sink. The plantation

also contributes towards

environmental improvement in

the following areas:

Act as a “pollution sink” and prevent

spreading of particulate and other

atmospheric pollutants to the nearby areas;

Provide vegetative cover;

Increase the aesthetics of the

surroundings; and provide resting, feeding

and breeding site for fauna.

Extensive plantation has been

done under green cover

development for the existing

plant. Green cover has been

developed and well maintained

along the internal roads and mill

area. The mill has made

elaborate arrangement in

developing green cover inside

the mill.



sequestration of carbon, expanding the plantations for improving soil moisture

conservation measures and checking soil erosion, and planting species of

Subabul and Casuarina contributing to the improvement of soil nutrient status

of marginal lands.


DEMO



Prepared by 10

1.5 Corporate Social Responsibility initiatives at TLPD


















DEMO



Prepared by 11







Stakeholders.





Female empowerment


Skill development


Medical facilities












age care.






DEMO



Prepared by 12

Environment friendly product developments - Paper from agri-residue

and ECF Technology


industrial plants



machines










pesticide




parts of the state as well as from outside undergo special courses and

are provided with suitable employment. There has been initiation of skill





Donation to educational institutions in Barnala such as Boys ITI and

Girls ITI to enable them to provide good infrastructure and facilities to

the students in this area.


Management






DEMO



Prepared by 13



of female employees, providing them with avenues of growth, working

on Environmental & Behavioural


hygiene, welfare, education, facilitating basic amenities at work place

and above all, rewarding & recognising the best of talent amongst

female members.





Conducting recruitment of candidates through Takshashila Walk-Ins.

The young members (fresher) are hired based on aptitude tests and

given skill enhancement trainings to develop into skilled professionals at

all levels and cadres.

Through its CSR initiatives, various benefits have accrued STLPP. A detailed

account of the success achieved in all CSR activities is as follows:

1. Asmita

The initiative has helped in increasing the employability for female

workforce in area which has been reflected in the increased numbers of

female employees over the years. Also, the number of female members

opting to use the residential facility provided by the organisation has

increased. Satisfaction survey is being conducted on yearly basis to

assess the engagement level and address the areas of concern.

2. Takshashila

The success of 12 batches which have passed out of Takshashila over

the years and their performance in the work area.

3. Takshashila Walk-In

A number of members enrolling for the recruitments and the

performance of the trainees who develop into skilled operators have

been commendable/not worthy.


DEMO



Prepared by 14

4. Green Technology

Monitoring of the trend of parameters having impact on environment –

COD/BOD, effluent parameters.

5. Health Camps

Increased awareness amongst the members and impact on deployment

6. Improvement in the education facility and employability

Improvement in the education facility and employability of the children

where initiative has been taken to support education of members

In order to take Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) to the next level, TLPD

is constantly striving towards identifying the deepest pain areas which require

immediate attention from a corporate standpoint. TLPD understands that its

actions have a great impact on the Community and so, it is committed towards

this responsibility.

CSR Activity 2011-12


1. Skill School SHVTI - Skill development and employment of surrounding

villages. On-the-job training, stipend and part time job opportunities

during schooling. Employment after the course. Currently running trades

are - SMO (Sewing Machine Operators), Electricians, Computer

Operators.

Skill School IL&FS

1. Skill development and employment of surrounding villages and States.

On the job training, part time job opportunities during schooling.

reimbursement of fees after employment. Currently running trades are -

SMO, GC(Garment Checker).

2. Conducted half day workshop (5 hours) at Sacred Heart School for

staff members on 5S and Kaizen at School

Lecture on “Green Manufacturing “in National Level Conference at SLIET

An alliance between TLPD Budni and ITI Nasrullaganj has been established.

18 students of electrical stream are undergoing an internship for a period of 6

months post successful completion of which of the students will be absorbed

by the group.


DEMO



Prepared by 15

Employee Welfare

The organisation pays special attention to ensure the families of the





together.

A Ladies Club has been formed which is chaired by the First Lady Mrs. Seema

Dinesh Mittal. The club meets on the second Saturday of every month.

Woman Empowerment




members only.

Rural Development






Others

1. Installed a water cooler in ITI Barnala boy’s & girl’s hostels


Barnala for job at TLPD Yarn SNG. They are working satisfactorily in the

packing section


employment at TLPD

Green in TLPD

1. Start working on paper less office

2. Reduce specific water, power & steam consumption by 2% on YOY basis



DEMO



Prepared by 16

2 INTRODUCTION TO PROJECT

2.1 Back drop



global terry towel giants, world largest agro based paper manufacturing unit,

Trident Ltd., Paper Division (TLPD) and Colour Textile Limited (CTL) one of

the largest producers of yarn in India. In addition, Trident Group has a

Sulphuric Acid Plant (SAP). Trident group today is a USD 1 billion enterprise

with an employee head account of more than 10,000 and providing indirect




International supplier award of the year in 2001, 2003, 2005 and 2006

from Wal-Mart USA

Home quality award – Best supplier of the year in 2006 and 2009 from

JC Penney

Innovation award for the year 2010 from JC Pennay



Trident Limited-Paper Division (TLPD)– (formerly Abhisekh Industries limited-

AIL) manufactures a wide range of printing and writing papers including copier

paper; the principal raw materials are wheat straw; an agricultural residue and

wood, Trident produces high quality eco friendly and machine friendly paper.

TLPD is an ISO 9001:2008, OHSAS 18001:2007, ISO 14001:2004 and FSC

certified mill with an integrated pulp and paper mill.




and later PM #1 has been upgraded to produce upto 110 tpd.

In the previous expansion, Mill Development Plan (MDP) in 2005, TLPD has

installed a new paper machine (PM #2) of capacity 265 tpd, a new Elemental

Chlorine Free (ECF) based 225 tpd wheat straw fibre line and 65 tpd hard

wood fibre line.


DEMO



Prepared by 17

The proposed Mill Expansion Plan is to increase the paper production capacity

from 375 tpd to 550 tpd by upgrading existing paper machines, fibre lines and

increasing captive generation capacity from 49.4 to 90.9 MW for (Hereinafter

called MEP).

2.2 Nature of the project





Upgradation of paper machines #1 & #2 to increase production of paper


Upgradation of the exiting ECF straw pulp mill to increase the capacity


Upgradation of the existing ECF wood pulp mill to increase the capacity


Increase Captive Cogeneration Plant (CCP) from 49.4 MW to 90.9 MW


Upgrade / augment supporting sections consisting of chemical recovery,


above capacities

The driving force for the MEP is a combination of a quest for improved

environmental performance and an increasing market demand for paper and

to sustain in the market.

2.3 Need for the Project and its Importance to the Country and/or

Region

With the steady increase in input costs and continuous competition from the

new units with better quality products, apart from dumping by overseas

manufacturers, the mill has to find ways and means to meet these challenges’

and for its continued economically viable operation for sustenance.

The proposed MEP is to debottleneck the imbalances in various sections in

the production facilities and optimise the overall production capacities of the

plant and thus reduce the cost of production.


DEMO



Prepared by 18

A review of the existing facilities of the captive generation plant reveals that

the captive cogeneration capacity is less compared to the existing power

requirement by about 5.0 MW (max) and is met from the state grid. Further,

the group companies are also expanding their activities and the power

requirement is likely to go up from the existing 26 MW to 50 MW in addition to

the MEP requirement of 31.2 MW from the existing 19 MW. The MEP

proposes 100% captive generation of power and steam for its post MEP

operations.

The objectives of the proposed MEP are:

To meet the growing demand for paper in the country

To facilitate manufacture of paper by environmentally friendly processes

To reduce overall cost of production by debottlenecking the production

imbalances

To achieve 100% captive power generation by going in for high pressure

and high efficiency boilers and turbines and reduce dependence on the

state grid

To adopt energy efficient processes, plant and machinery

2.4 Employment Generation

The direct manpower requirement for the performance of the project’s regular

function will be around 100 people. The project will provide scope for indirect

employment of about 500 people during construction stage and about

500 people during operation in the areas of material handling, transport and

ancillary units.


DEMO



Prepared by 19

3 PROJECT DESCRIPTION

3.1 Existing facilities

At present, TLPD is producing printing and writing grade papers with two (2)

paper machines, with a finished paper production capacity of 375 tpd from

wheat straw and wood pulp.

The mill has the following production capacities.

PRODUCTION CAPACITIES

Sections Units Existing

Paper machines

Paper machine #1 tpd 110

Paper machine #2 tpd 265

Pulp mill

Straw pulp mill tpd 225

Wood pulp mill tpd 65

Oxygen plant Nm³/hr 300

Chlorine dioxide plant tpd 6

Recovery

Recovery boiler tpd 565

Evaporation plant tph 235

Recausticising plant (AA production) tpd 110

Lime kiln tpd 140

Power plant

Power boilers tph 310

Turbo generators

Turbo generator MW 49.4

WTP capacity m³/day 25,000

WWTP capacity m³/day 25, 500

A brief description of the existing facilities is given as below.

3.2 Paper Machine

3.2.1 Stock Preparation

Pulp is conditioned in the stock preparation section for bondage to form sheet.

The pulp received from pulp mill is passed through a series of refiners for

fibrillation and then the required additives viz. fillers, dyes, whitening agents,

rosin and alum are added. These are added to impart functional properties to

the final paper such as opacity, reflectance, shade and water resistance. The

final blended stock is pumped to paper machine chest.

3.2.2 Paper Making

The blended stock in very dilute suspension is allowed to flow and spread on a

moving wire where water is drained and fibre binds together to form a wet

web. The wet paper web is then pressed, dried and wound. Papermaking is


DEMO



Prepared by 20

purely mechanical in nature and the variations exist only in the design of the

paper machine.

3.2.3 Paper Machine # 1

Paper Machine #1 (PM #1), installed in 1993, was supplied by MECHANO –

Paper Machine, Kolkata.


type paper machine with bi-nip press with separate III press, followed by

twenty five (25) drying cylinders in the dryer section, three nip four – roll

calender stack and pope type reel. The design production capacity at the time

of installation was 75 tpd of non-surface sized grades.

TLPD periodically upgraded its PM #1, and at present PM #1 is operating at

465 mpm speed and is producing about 110 tpd finished non surface sized

grades.

3.2.4 Paper Machine #2

Paper Machine #2, (PM #2) installed in 2008, was supplied by ALLIMAND,

France.


with top wire forming section, tri nip press section, followed by thirty two (32)

drying cylinders in pre-dryer section, pre-metered size press, twelve (12)

drying cylinders in post-dryer section, single hard nip calender stack, and a

pope type reel. The electrical drive design speed of the PM is 900 mpm. The

design production capacity of paper machine is 325 tpd of surface sized/copier

grades at maximum operating speed of 750 mpm. But, it is possible to

increase the maximum operating speed upto 900 mpm and get a higher

production.

3.3 Pulp Mill

3.3.1 Pulp Making

Pulp is produced from cellulosic raw materials like wood, bamboo, bagasse,

rice straw, wheat straw, cotton linter etc. These raw materials contain, in

addition to cellulose and hemi-cellulose, a significant amount of lignin, which

binds the cellulosic fibres. In pulping, the cellulosic fibre is separated from the

surrounding lignin, either by mechanical or chemical means. Removal of lignin

is further accomplished by oxygen delignification.


DEMO



Prepared by 21

3.3.2 Pulp Bleaching

Conventionally, the cooked unbleached pulp is brown in colour, due to the

presence of residual lignin and chemicals. In order to obtain good brightness

of paper, the pulp is bleached using strong oxidants like oxygen, chlorine

dioxide, NaOH, hydrogen peroxide, etc. The aim is to obtain good brightness

without degradation or loss of cellulosic fibre.

The utilisation of elemental chlorine is dispensed with, in recent new

installations, by way of a change over to chlorine dioxide/ozone.

3.3.3 Straw Pulp Mill

The new wheat straw pulping plant was supplied by METSO.

The plant’s rated capacity is 225 BD tpd bleached pulp.

The raw material, wheat straw, after de-dusting and sand removal, is sent to

cooking section, consisting of two (2) continuous digesters, each of 125 tpd

capacity. After cooking, the pulp is blown to the blow tank.

From the blow tank, the pulp is pumped through a Delta Knotter (K4) to

remove larger impurities and uncooked material to protect the washing

equipment. The reject is passed through a junk trap before it is washed in the

Johnson screen. In the Johnson screen, fibres are recovered and pumped

back to the blow tank. The reject is then collected in a suitable vessel and

dumped.

The accept from the Delta Knotter is washed in the first vacuum filter and then

pumped to the first twin roll press. After this, the pulp is passed to the second

vacuum filter and the second press, via screening plant.

The pulp leaving the final twin roll press is diluted to ~ 12% (alkali is added in

the stand pipe) and pumped through a mixer to the oxygen reactor.

From the reactor, the pulp is blown to the MC storage tower. The MC storage

tower has a residence time of approximately 6 hours (390 min at 12% pulp

consistency). The oxygen delignified pulp is then discharged evenly with a

tower scraper (SA-D450), diluted in the bottom of the tower and washed on

one twin roll press. The filtrate is used as wash liquor on the press prior to the

oxygen stage. The discharge consistency from the press is 30%. The pulp is

diluted with hot water of > 75°C.


DEMO



Prepared by 22

3.3.4 Bleaching Sequence of Wheat Straw

In the bleach plant, most of the coloured residual lignin is removed by

bleaching to give the pulp brightness high enough for its final use. This is

done in three stages (ECF sequence):

D0 Chlorine dioxide 100% in the first stage

EOP Oxygen reinforced alkaline extraction; there is an option to add

peroxide in this stage

D1 Chlorine dioxide

The D0 and D1 stages are upflow towers with a tower scraper at the top

(discharge). The Eo stage consists of one pressurised reactor and blow down

tank.

3.3.5 Hard Wood Pulp Mill

The hardwood pulping plant has a chipper house, three (3) stationary

digesters, each of capacity 120 m³ including ODL stage at the end of washing

stage and D0, EOP, D1 stage bleaching sequence with one (1) additional D-

stage filter and a new screening plant.

The production capacity of this plant is 65 tpd.

3.4 Chemical Recovery Plant



outputs.

3.4.1 Evaporation Plant

TLPD has two (2) streets of multiple effect evaporators, supplied by PAS and

ENMAS Andritz. The designed water evaporation capacities and details are as

below:

Supplier Designed Capacity (tph)

Product liquor Solids

(%)

Steam economy

ENMAS Andritz 170 65 6.05

PAS Engineering 65 50 6.00


DEMO



Prepared by 23

3.4.2 Chemical Recovery Boilers

TLPD has two (2) chemical recovery boilers, having a combined capacity of

firing 565 tpd black liquor per day supplied by ENMAS.

3.4.3 Recausticising Plant

Originally, the recausticising plant was supplied by Swetha Engineering, and

has recently been upgraded by GL&V. Capacity of the existing recausticising

plant is detailed below.

Supplier Designed AA production

Capacity (tpd)

gpl

Swetha/ GL&V 110 as Na2O 85

3.4.4 Lime Mud Reburning Kiln

The lime kiln was supplied by FLSmidth and was commissioned in 2009. The

capacity of the kiln is 140 tpd burnt lime.

3.5 Power House

The power plant has two pressure systems for steam and power generation

and the details of plant and machinery are given below:

Boiler house

Coal handling system

Ash handling system

DM plant

Turbo generator

Air compressors


DEMO



Prepared by 24

3.5.1 Boiler house

Description Unit Boiler #1 Boiler # 2 & # 3

Make IJT ENMAS

Type AFBC AFBC

No. of boilers No 1 2

Fuel Rice husk and coal

Rice husk and coal

Pressure kg/cm² (g) 62 105

Steam Temperature °C 460 515

Steam flow (MCR) tph 50 Each 130

Feed water temperature °C 130 178

Deaerator outlet temperature °C 130 135

Boiler #1 is operated, whenever required during the shut down of either boiler

#2 or #3.

3.5.2 Turbo generators (TG)

Description Unit TG #1 TG #2&#3

Type Extraction & condensing

Extraction & condensing

Capacity MW 9.4 Each 20

No. of TGs No 1 2

Operating pressure kg/cm² (g)

63 104

Operating temperature °C 455 505

Steam input tph 70 Each 130

Extraction pressure kg/cm² (g)

11 & 4.5 11 & 4.5

Cooling water temperature

-inlet °C 34 33

-Outlet °C 42 43

3.5.3 Cooling Tower

Description Units Values

For 9.4 MW TG set

Number of cells No. 4

Capacity m³/h 2000 (500 x 4)

Cold water temperature °C 32

Warm water temperature °C 40

Sump capacity m³/h 700

For 20 MW TG set

Number of cells No. 3

Capacity m³ 7200 (2400 x 3)

Cold water temperature °C 33

Warm water temperature °C 43


DEMO



Prepared by 25

3.6 Electrical

3.6.1 Power Sources

TLPD has its own captive generation from the following turbo generators.

TG #1 – 9.4 MW

TG #2 – 20 MW

TG #3 – 20 MW

TLPD receives supply from other sources and the details are given below.

PSPL/open access

The above sources are made parallel in synchronised to limit the system fault

current:

TG #1, TG #2 and TG #3 are synchronised with electricity grid

Power also supplied to TLPD’s other units at Sanghera through TLPD’s

independent feeder

The above arrangements are suitably made in the double busbar system

provided with tie feeders.

The total plant load demand is 45 MW and grid load is 19.95 MVA

The total power generation is approx. 40 MW.

The power drawn from grid varies from 0 to 5 MW.

The mill has installed a load management system (SCADA) to monitor and

control the power demand based on the power requirement.

3.6.2 Power Distribution

The mill wide distribution is at 11 kV and stepped down to 6.6 kV and

433 V by using distribution transformers of 2 MVA and 2.5 MVA at

various LT load centers. The HT motors of 6.6 kV are fed with 5 MVA

and 7.5 MVA of 11 kV/6.6 kV transformers.

LT panel components are of L&T, SIEMENS and other reputed makes.

LT motors of 415 V 3 phase 50 Hz of SIEMENS/CGL and other reputed

makes


DEMO



Prepared by 26

The 11 kV and 6.6 kV neutrals are resistance earthed. The fault level of

the new system is 40 kA 1 sec.

415 V 3 Ph, 50 Hz neutrals are solidly earthed. The fault level is 50 kVA

1 sec for LT distribution.

The power factor maintained by the mill distribution is 0.94-0.95 lag

using HT and LT capacitor at various load centres.

The drives of paper machines #1 & #2 are sectional drives.

PM #1 is driven with DC motors and DC drive panel.

PM #2 is driven with AC motor and AC drive panels.

3.7 Water Treatment Plant (WTP)

Fresh water from Uppli canal, which is 30 km away, is drawn through a

channel in to mill premises and stored in raw water storage reservoir. From

the raw water reservoir, water is pumped to overhead tank, from where it flows

by gravity to water storage tank in water treatment plant.

The raw water from raw water storage tank is pumped to three (3) streams,

each consisting of flash mixer flocculator and tube settler. Then the water from

the tube settler is stored in clarified water tank, and a portion is fed through

gravity sand filter. The clarified water from clarified water tank is pumped for

process utilisation. The filtered water from gravity sand filter is stored in filter

water tank and pumped to DM plant.

The mill draws 14,040 m³/day water from ground water and 25,000 m³/day

from Uppli canal

The existing overall water balance of the mill is as below.

Fresh water requirement for the present operations - 22,240 m3/day

internally recycled wastewater - 1,200 m³/day

Total water consumption for present operations - 23,440 m3/day

As per MDP Environment Clearance, the fresh water requirement is

27,000 m³/day. During installation of new facilities, the mill has adopted water

conservation measures to bring down the water consumption from 60 to 55

m³/t of paper.

Some of the water conservation measures taken during last two years are as

below:


DEMO



Prepared by 27

Metering of all the water streams supplying water to recovery plants

Recirculation of HP pump reject water to the HP pump suction tank in

recovery area.

S/R condensate water used for straw washing

Using PM # 2 back water in the following areas:

For wood log washing replacing fresh water

Replacing all hose pipe water

Floor cleaning

For PM #1 machine back water tank make up level

Using sulphuric acid plant (SAP) water in the following areas;

Caustic preparation for Straw Fibre Line (SFL) and Wood Fibre

Line (WFL)

In blow heat recovery system to generate the hot water for

bleaching and washing plant in WFL, by replacing fresh water.

The existing mill water and wastewater balance is enclosed as Annexure 1.

The mill has following facilities in the water intake and treatment plant

- Raw water reservoir 275 m x 110 m x 4 m

- Overhead tank

.- Three (3) stilling chambers cum 2 x 2 x 5.6 m

flash mixers, each of size

- Three (3) flocculators each Dia 8 m x 4.5 m height

- Three (3) buffer tanks each 4 x 8 x 4 m SWD

- Twenty four (24) tube settler unit each 4 x 4 x 4 m SWD

- Two (2) rapid gravity filters each 5 x 4.2 x 4.8 m

- One (1) alum saturator 8 x 4 x 3 m ht

- One (1) alum solution tank 2.4 m of dia x 2.5 m height

- One (1) alkali solution tank 2.5 m of dia x 2 m height

- One (1) poly electrolyte solution tank 1.8 m dia x 1.5 m height

- One (1) filtered water storage tank capacity 900 m³


DEMO



Prepared by 28

- One (1 clarified water storage 5400 m³

tank capacity

- One (1) sludge drying bed of size 8 x 8 x 1.5 m

- One (1) water storage tank, capacity 250 m³


The wastewater generation is around 21,440 m3/day.

The existing wastewater overall balance is as under.

Waste water generation from existing operations - 21,440 m³/day


Dust suppression operation - 100 m³/day

Treated wastewater for irrigation - 12,440 m³/day

Treated wastewater to discharge - 8,700 m³/day

The existing waste water plant can handle 28,000 m3/day of waste water. And

the general description of wastewater plant is as below.

The existing wastewater treatment plant flow diagram is enclosed as

Annexure 2.

Process Description

High COD wastewater stream:

The waste water generated from wheat straw washing has high COD.

This waste water enters the screen chamber and then to equalisation

tank. The waste water from equalisation tank is pumped to bioclarifier.

The clarifier overflow is taken to buffer tank for maintaining pH. The waste

water from buffer tank is pumped to anaerobic digester (UASB) for

generation of methane gas. The overflow of UASB reactor goes to pre

aeration tank and then flows to main aeration tank. The gas generated

from UASB reactor is stored in gas holder basin and supplied to power

boilers by using blowers.

Low COD wastewater stream:

Waste water generated from pulp mill, paper machines, power boilers and

recovery boilers has low COD and this is collected in a collection tank and

pumped to primary clarifier #1 and primary clarifier #2. After clarification,

the waste water is pumped to aeration tanks 1and2 for BOD, COD


DEMO



Prepared by 29

reduction. The aeration tanks are equipped with eleven (8+3) 50 HP

surface aerators, three (3) floating aerators each having a capacity of 30

HP. Additionally, oxygen is supplied to aeration tank #1 by air liquid

system to take care of any fluctuation in COD and to meet the standards.

The overflow of wastewater from aeration tank goes to secondary clarifier

for settling of biomass. The treated wastewater from the outlet of

secondary clarifier water is pumped for irrigation purpose.

Sludge handling system:

The underflow sludge from prim ary clar ifiers # 1 and # 2, bioclarifier and secondary clar ifier , is pumped to sludge thickener and then it is pum ped to twin wire belt press for dewatering. The dewatered sludge is loaded in t rucks and sold to board m anufacturers. The filt rate from sludge handling system joins back low COD wastewater st ream for t reatm ent .

The mill has the following facilities in wastewater treatment plant

High COD wastewater

Equalisation tank

Primary clarifier dia 12 m

Buffer tank

Anaerobic Digester (UASB)

Pre aeration tank

Gas holder basin

Low COD wastewater

Collection pit 6.5 x 6.5 x 2.5 m ED

Primary clarifier #1 (24.8 m dia) and primary clarifier #2 (31.92 m dia)

Aeration tank #1 (40 x 15.8 x 5 m SWD) and Aeration tank #2 ( 60 x

40 x 4.5 m SWD)

Air liquid system to dose pure oxygen in aeration tank #1

Secondary clarifier dia 42 m

Sludge Handling System

Sludge thickener (20 m x 3 m SWD)

Sludge tank

Twin wire belt press


DEMO



Prepared by 30

WASTEWATER CHARACTERISTICS (INFLUENT) OF LOW COD

AND HIGH COD STREAMS

Parameters Units High COD Low COD(Combi

ned)

Flow m³/day 9,000 27,420

COD mgl 3,500 1,100

BOD mgl 1,100 400

TREATED WASTEWATER (EFFLUENT) CHARACTERISTICS

Parameters Units CPCB/SPCB

Flow m³/day 27,420

COD mgl <350

BOD mgl <30

Total suspended solids mgl <100

AOX kg/t of product

< 1

3.9 Project Proposals

The proposals covered under the MEP are

Paper Machine

Increase the installed production capacity from 375 to 550 tpd

Increase the production capacity of PM #1 from 110 to 170 tpd

Increase the production capacity of PM #2 from 265 to 380 tpd

Pulp Mill

Increase in pulp production from 290 to 430

Straw Fibre Line (SFL) from 225 to 280 tpd

Wood Fibre Line (WFL) from 65 to 150 tpd

Augmentation of chlorine dioxide plant from 6 to 10 tpd.

Chemical recovery plant

Evaporators

The evaporator #1 is proposed to be augmented for a capacity of 50 tph water

evaporation with a product liquor solids of 65%


DEMO



Prepared by 31

Evaporator #2 is proposed to be augmented for 50 tph water evaporation

capacity.

Recovery Boilers

Recovery boiler #2 is to be augmented to 450 tpd capacity, an additional

capacity of 50 tpd dry solids, by augmenting the fans, motors etc. The ESP

also will be augmented for a particulate emission level of 50 ppm in flue gas.

A new recovery boiler of 300 tpd dry solids firing capacity will be installed to

care of the additional solids from pulp mill.

Recausticising Plant

The additional capacity, 30 tpd AA, will be met by revamping the plant. A

white liquor CD filter will be installed for 150 tpd capacity AA as Na2O. The

uniclarifiers and washers will be rearranged. Two stage recausticising will be

practised to reduce silica content in lime mud fed to lime kiln.

There are several advantages in installing the WLCD filter, as shown below:

Better quality of white liquor

Less carry over of alkali to lime mud washers

Better performance of lime mud filter because of low alkali content in

lime mud.

Lime Kiln

The lime mud filter will be fitted with all 6 discs and run on maximum capacity.

The lime kiln will be run on full capacity of 140 tpd burnt lime.

There are several advantages in operating lime kiln on a continuous basis:

Assured supply of good lime for causticising process

Better settling of lime mud in clarifiers and mud washers

Better performance of lime mud filter

Less inerts in lime compared to purchased lime of low purity


DEMO



Prepared by 32

Producer Gas Plant

A new coal based producer gas plant will be installed. Considering the high

cost of fuel oil, it is necessary to install a producer gas plant to replace 70% of

heat value required for lime kiln.

The producer gas is produced from new generation extended shaft gasifier.

These gasifiers are of modern design with respect to quality and consistency

of gas, smooth and troublefree operation without interruptions, high calorific

value, adaptability to lower grades of coal and DCS operation.

Captive Co generation plant (CCP)

Three (3) turbo generators with a total capacity of 41.5 MW with double

extraction cum condensing

Two (2) AFBC boilers each with capacity of 100 tph, 106 ata and 515 °C

Power plant auxiliaries like fuel handling, ash handling, DM plant,

cooling tower, condensate polishing unit, air compressor etc.

Wastewater Treatment Plant




One (1) sludge decanter

Additional infrastructure facilities like storage yards, roads, drains, green

cover etc.

3.10 Plant Capacities

The plant capacities are summarised in the following table

EXISTING & POST EXPANSION CAPACITIES



Paper Machines


tpd 375 550 175

Augmentation

Pulp Mill


BD tpd 225 280 55

Augmentation


BD tpd 65 150 85

Augmentation



DEMO



Prepared by 33





Recovery Plant










Power Plant


Turbo Generators




3.11 Salient Features of the Project

Atmospheric Fluidised Bed Combustion Boiler (AFBC) with high

efficiency and low unburnt carbon in ash.

Higher efficiency Turbo Generator to generate power consuming less

steam/kcal.

DM/RO and condensate polishing plant to maximise condensate recycle

and to minimise fresh water requirement.

ESP designed to maintain emission of solid particulate matter (PM) of

50 mg/Nm³ maximum.

The proposals considered for the project are described in the following

paragraphs.


DEMO



Prepared by 34

3.12 Project Description

3.12.1 Paper Machines

Paper Machine #1

The following proposals are considered for the rebuild of PM#1.

It is proposed to install a new head box suitable for proposed operating

speed of 600 mpm.

Recently, the mill has installed one (1) duo-flow box with ceramic

drainage elements to increase the drainage capacity of the fourdrinier

section

Rebuild the press section by strengthening the present press frames

and also new bi-nip press followed by 3rd press as mini shoe press in

place of existing 3rd press

The existing dryer section will be rebuilt with silent drive arrangement

suitable for the increased paper machine operating speed

Installation of new electrical drive system for dryer section of paper

machine suitable for a design speed of 600 mpm

Recently, the mill has modified existing semi open hood to closed hood

with new fans and modified hood and pocket ventilation system would

be suitable and adequate for the proposed higher operating speed of the

paper machine.

Augmentation of existing steam and condensate system

Paper Machine #2

PM #2 has adequate potential to enhance its capacity from the present level of

about 265 tpd to 380 tpd by increasing the maximum operating speed upto

900 mpm, and the following proposals are considered to increase the

operating speed of the paper machine.

Installation of shoe press in tri-nip press 3rd nip position to improve the

off press web dryness, consequent to the increase in maximum

operating speed of the paper machine

Replacement of approach flow system pumps to higher capacity pumps

Paper machine improvement programme, such as tail threading system

between press to dryer section and between dryer section to size press


DEMO



Prepared by 35

With the implementation of all the above measures, it is possible to increase

the operating speed of paper machine from the present level of 750 mpm

upto 900 mpm and to obtain high finished production capacity.

3.12.2 Pulp Plant

3.12.2.1 Wheat Straw Pulp Mill

The following modifications are proposed to enhance the capacity to 280 tpd.

One (1) more depither to be added

In wet washing, utilisation of excess machine back water by increasing

the purging of wet washing back water and installation of back water

clarification system.

One (1) continuous digester of 125 tpd capacity to be added

To increase the efficiency of ODL, one Post Oxygen Washing (POW)

press to be added

Bleaching, one D&D tower to be added to increase residential lime


The following modifications are proposed to enhance the capacity of hard

wood pulp mill to 150 tpd

Screens to be replaced by quality screens

Introduction of extended tube in ODL to improve the efficiency

Replacement of less efficient MC pumps, for better performance

Replacement of D1 tower by a new tower

Augmentation of auxiliaries

BSW 1 and 4 in washing and EOP washer in bleaching

3.12.2.3 Other Auxiliaries of Pulp Mill

Chlorine di-oxide plant is to be augmented to take care of the increased

demand for ClO2.




outputs.


DEMO



Prepared by 36


The additional water evaporation capacity required for the evaporation plant is

achieved by augmentation of existing evaporator by adding new evaporator

One (1) finisher effect (3 bodies)

Two (2) additional bodies at the back end

Surface condenser

Vacuum system

Similarly for evaporator #2 the following equipment are to be added:

One (1) finisher effect (1 body)

One (1) additional body as spare for third and fourth effect

Surface condenser

Vacuum system

3.12.3.2 Chemical Recovery Boiler

The existing chemical recovery boiler #2 will be augmented from 400 tpd to

450 tpd solids firing capacity

It is proposed to install a new chemical recovery boiler of 300 tpd solids firing

capacity.


The existing recausticiser plant will be suitably augmented to produce 140 tpd

as required in MEP.

3.12.3.4 Lime Kiln

The existing lime kiln of 140 tpd will be used for reburning of lime sludge and

additional lime requirement of 39 tpd will be procured from the market.

3.13 Captive Co-generation Plant

3.13.1 Boiler (AFBC)

The boiler is of top supported single-drum natural circulation, semi-outdoor

type, Atmospheric Fluid Bed Combustion (AFBC) designed for firing coal and

start up firing with HSD/LDO.


DEMO



Prepared by 37

The complete furnace section will be of fusion welded wall type arranged as a

gas and pressure tight envelope. The steam drum is conservatively designed

and the circulation system will be complete with the necessary number of

down comers, supply and riser piping. Drum internals are provided in the

steam drum to maintain the steam purity.

The superheaters will be located at furnace outlet. Inter-stage desuperheater

will be provided in between the two stages of superheaters to control the final

steam temperature from the unit. The boilers will be provided with bare tube

economiser fabricated from plain seamless tubes. The boilers will also be

provided with a tubular air heater as the last stage of heat recovery unit.

The fuel feeding system will consist of drag chain feeders with VFD and

mechanical spreader for distribution of coal. The above system is designed

for feeding overbed feeding system.

Bed material feeding system will consist of bed material bunker and rotary air

lock feeders.

The draught system of the boiler will have one (1) 100% MCR of ID & FD fans

and 2 x 100% PA fans.

The feed water system will consist of deaerator, HP heater and two (2) motor

driven feed pumps, LP & HP chemical dosing system together with complete

piping, valves and other fittings.

The process flow diagram of the new boiler is enclosed as Annexure 3.

3.13.2 Electrostatic Precipitator (ESP)

An electrostatic precipitator is used to remove the dust from gases emanating

from industrial processes. The dust particles suspended in the gases are

electrically charged and collected using electrostatic attraction. The

precipitator essentially consists of two sets of electrodes viz. collecting

electrodes and emitting (discharge) electrodes.

3.13.3 Turbo Generator

Turbine will be of impulse/reaction type with casing of welded construction.

The guide blade carriers are of cast construction. Blading system, attached to

rotor, will consist of a set of impulse blading and multiple stages of reaction

blading. The operating speed of the turbine is reduced at gear box before

alternator. The gearbox will be of single stage, double helical, parallel shaft

with flexible tooth gear coupling at input and output ends. The turbine shall be

provided with electronic governor to control the speed.


DEMO



Prepared by 38

Steam admission to the turbine will be accomplished by a set of control

valves. Turbine will have two (2) controlled extractions and one condensing

stage.

Turbine oil system will consist of oil tank, main oil pump and AC motor driven

auxiliary oil pumps, DC motor driven emergency oil pump, oil purifier, oil

coolers etc. The main oil pump will be driven by AC motor.

Condenser will be of two section single pass arrangement type.

Alternator rotor will be of salient pole design and the insulation of the winding

will be of class F category, with temperature rise limited to class B.

Temperature detectors will be provided for continuous monitoring of winding

temperature. The cooling method employed for alternator will be of closed air

circuit, water cooled design. Brushless excitation is considered.

3.13.4 Fuel Handling Plant

The coal handling system will be designed for 80 tph with single stream with

feed size of (-200) mm coal for providing less than 6 mm coal with minimum

fines.

The coal handling plant consists of belt conveyors, crusher, vibrating screen,

reversible shuttle conveyor and dust extraction system.

Flow diagram for Coal Handling System is enclosed as Annexure 4.

3.13.5 Ash Handling System

3.13.5.1 Bed Ash

The bed ash from the boiler will be discharged into a submerged scrapper

chain conveyor, for cooling the ash and then to discharge on to a system of

belt conveyors for feeding into the silo.

The process flow diagram for bed ash handling system is enclosed as

Annexure 5 .

3.13.5.2 Economiser/APH/ESP Ash

Below each hopper outlet at Economiser/Air Pre Heater and ESP, suitable MS

surge chutes with a manually operated isolation plate valve and an expansion

joint are provided. A level probe is provided in each surge chute for automatic

operation of the system.

An ash vessel will be installed below each surge hopper. Material will be

conveyed through conveying pipelines. Conveyed material will be discharged

into the fly ash silo with the help of terminal box provided on its top.


DEMO



Prepared by 39

The process flow diagram for fly ash handling system is enclosed as

Annexure 6.

3.13.5.3 ESP Ash

Below each ESP hopper outlet, suitable adapter / MS surge chute with

fluidising arrangement, one (1) manually operated isolation plate valve and

one (1) expansion joint are provided. A level probe is provided in each surge

chute for automatic operation of the system.

An ash vessel will be installed below ESP hopper. Material will be conveyed

through a common MS ERW heavy duty conveying pipeline. Conveyed

material will be discharged into the fly ash silo with the help of a terminal box

provided on its top.

One (1) chain wheel operated plate valve with rotary feeder will be provided

along with drum type ash conditioners and canvas type retractable chute

below the silo for dust free unloading of fly ash on the truck.

1 set of fluidising pads and two (2) roots blowers are also considered for the

fly ash silo. A level probe will be provided at the silo for high level sensing.

Both the silos will be provided with vent filters on top to prevent any dust fly

off.

One (1) RCC fly ash silo will be constructed for fly ash.

One (1) RCC bed ash silo will be constructed for bed ash.

Two (2) air compressors will be provided for ash conveying.

3.13.6 DM/RO Plant

DM/RO Plant has been designed based on raw water quality. The two streams

of the plant are designed for a flow rate of 60 m3/h net output of each stream,

to treat it further with mixed bed exchanger.

The raw water is dosed with sodium hypochlorite for the disinfection purpose

and removes COD /BOD if any, present in the water. The raw water will be

pumped to DM/RO plant with the help of 2 X 100% raw water pumps. The

DM/RO plant with two (2) streams is designed for indoor installation.


DEMO



Prepared by 40

The DM/RO plant will consist of the following equipment.

Multi grade filter No 2

ACF No 2

UF No 2

RO No 2

Strong acid cation exchanger No 2

Degasser No 1

Anion exchanger No 2

Mixed bed No 2

The operation of the entire water treatment is on manual except for the UF/RO

Plant, which will be fully automatic with PLC systems and, accordingly,

pneumatic actuated valves will be considered at appropriate points in the

UF/RO Plant.

The multi grade filter will have to be backwashed once in 24 hours. The

filtered water will be de-chlorinated by means of sodium sulphite dosing and

will then be passed through the cartridge filter. The plant is designed for

minimum 70%-75% recovery for the single stage treatment to achieve

required TDS.

The reject will be sent to the neutralisation pit.

3.13.7 Condensate Polishing Unit (CPU)

CPU consists of plate type heat exchanger with provision for pumping system

to store in DM water storage tank.

The condensate from process will be polished with CPU, after passing through

a plate type heat exchanger. DM water will be used as cooling medium for the

heat exchanger.

3.13.8 Cooling Tower

3.13.8.1 For Power Turbo Generators

Cooling tower will consist of three (3) cells, each of 3500 m³/hr capacity RCC

tower with induced draft (ID) fan. It caters to the requirements to cool both

main cooling water for condenser and cooling water for auxiliaries.

3.13.8.2 For Recovery Turbo Generator

Cooling tower consists of three (3) cells each, of 1500 m³/h capacity of RCC

construction with ID fan. It caters to the requirement to cool both main cooling

water for condenser and cooling water for auxiliaries.


DEMO



Prepared by 41

3.13.9 Compressed Air System

This system comprises two (2) centrifugal air compressors (1W + 1S) each of

5000 Nm³/hr capacity with air receiver and air drying unit.

3.14 Fire Fighting System

Extension of the existing plant hydrant network (with augmentation of pumps,

if required) for power plant area from terminal point (TP) will be done.

Further, it will consist of fire alarm systems for control room, MCC room and

cable alleys.

Portable extinguishers at strategic locations in the plant will be provided.

3.15 Electrical Power Distribution

The required Motor Control Centres (MCCs), motors and other electrical

equipment necessary for operating the MEP plant and machinery shall be

procured and installed.

3.16 Water treatment Plant (WTP)

The water consumption for MEP will be around 31,500 m3/day. It is expected

that recycled wastewater from internal process will be reused to the extent of

1,200 m3/day. Hence, the net fresh water requirement for post MEP will be

30,300 m3/day.

The total water requirement for post MEP operations will be as below;

Fresh water requirement for post MEP - 30,300 m3/day

operations

Internally recycled wastewater - 1,200 m³/day

Total water consumption for post MEP - 31,500 m3/day

operations


The waste water generated after MEP will be around 27,420 m³/day. Total

waste water discharge from WWTP will be 27,020 m³/day.

Post MEP wastewater generation will be as follows

Waste water generation for post MEP - 27,420 m³/day


DEMO



Prepared by 42


Treated effluent for irrigation - 18,220 m³/day

Dust suppression system - 100 m³/day

Treated effluent to discharge - 8,700 m³/day

The WWTP flow diagram with proposed new equipment is enclosed as

Annexure 7.

Additional equipment will be installed to handle the additional load. The

proposed equipment are as below.




One (1) sludge decanter

The post MEP water and wastewater balance diagram is enclosed as

Annexure 8.

3.18 Input Requirements

3.18.1 Raw Materials


average annual requirement of the raw materials is given below:

RAW MATERIALS REQUIREMENT

Input Units Existing (Pre-MEP)


Straw tpa 169,000 269,000 100,000

Wood tpa 10,000 227,000 127,000

3.18.2 Chemicals

The major process chemicals required to be used and procured for the

production is given in the following table


DEMO



Prepared by 43

CHEMICALS REQUIREMENT


Post MEP

Incremental

Caustic tpa 6,200 7,900 1,700

Hydrogen peroxide tpa 460 2,000 1,540

Chlorine dioxide tpa 2,070 2,900 830

Oxygen tpa 2,900 3,900 1,000

Sodium chlorate tpa 3,416 4785 1370

Methanol tpa 435 435

Sulfuric acid tpa 2100 5800 3700

Lime tpa 20,800 20,800

Lime stone tpa 34,600 40,900 6300

3.18.3 Fuels

Additional fuels requirement are as given below



Furnace oil Kla 9,100 4,600 - (4,500)

Coal for PG plant tpa -- 25,600 25,600

Husk/Biomass tpa 121,000 221,000 100,000


Coal (local) tpa 169,000 310,000 141,000

Pet coke tpa 29,000 52,000 23,000

The steam and power balance is given in the following table

STEAM AND POWER BALANCE

Summary Unit Pre-MEP Post-MEP

Incremental

Steam

Steam generation from recovery boilers tph 46 82 36

Steam generation from power boilers tph 228 420 192

Total steam generation tph 274 503 229

Total LP steam consumption including De-aerators steam

tph 90 142 52

Total MP steam consumption tph 79 181 103

Condensing steam tph 103 180 67

Total steam use Tph 272 503 231

Power

Power Requirement MW 45.3 81.4 36.1

Captive generation MW 44.9 81.0 36.1

Grid Power MW 0.4 0.4 0.0

The mass & energy balance is enclosed Annexure 9.


DEMO



Prepared by 44

3.18.4 Sourcing of input materials

Wheat straw - Purchased from farmers and transported by trucks & Tractors

Wood - 80% chips from Yamuna Nagar/ 20 % wood logs transported by truck

Chemicals - Local

Coal - Central Coal Limited, Madya Pradesh transported by train upto Barnala and by truck to mill Imported coal transported by ship and by trucks to mill

3.19 Resource Optimisation

The following recycling or resource optimisation are envisaged in project.

The following measures will be taken to reduce the water consumption

Improving general house keeping measure such as

Water leakage from valve

Automatic shut down of pumps when the section is out of production

Daily monitoring water consumption by installing flow meters on all major

consumption point.

Segregation of wastewater from various processes into clean

wastewater, (that can be reused directly) and contaminated water for

treatment

The following streams of water from the process will be reused after treatment,

if any, as may be required

Reuse of clarified water from paper machine in other sections such as

pulp dilution, showers, stock preparation area, etc.

Condensate from power boilers is reused.

Use of back water or recycled water for low pressure showers

Installation of vacuum flume tank to recycle vacuum pump sealing water

Use of treated wastewater for plantation, gardening, floor washing, dust

prevention, etc.


DEMO



Prepared by 45

The following energy optimisation measures will be employed;

While ordering plant and equipment, emphasis will be given for lower

energy consumption.

By improving general house keeping measures such as

Prevention of steam leakages by using good quality steam valves

Using high voltage electrical equipment to conserve energy

Using energy efficient fluorescent lighting

Using variable frequency drive for fluctuating load for energy conservation

Maintain higher power factor by installing suitable electrical equipment to optimise the power consumption.

Installing heat recovery systems to recover the heat from the process.

State of the art AFBC boiler of pressure 105 ata for power boiler to

reduce carbon content in the ash. Using high pressure steam increases

power generation per tonne of coal.

3.20 Water Availability with Source

The total water requirement for post MEP will be around 31,500 m³/day

including recycled water (internal recycled water – 1,200 m³/day) and the fresh

water requirement will be 30,300 m³/day.

The mill has permission for 25,000 m³/day water drawal from Uppli canal and

14040 m³/day from ground water. The water drawal permission letter is


As per MDP Environment Clearance, the fresh water requirement is

27,000 m³/day. During installation of new facilities, the mill has installed and

adopted various water conservation measures to bring down the water

consumption from 60 to 55 m³/t of paper.

3.21 Power Requirement and Source

The proposed project requires additionally about 12 MW of power for the

paper mill. In addition, other units of the group avail 26 MW at present and is

expected to go up to 50 MW as these units are also expanding their activities.

Hence, additional power demand will be 36 MW and the total power

requirement of all the group units will be around 81 MW. Hence, it is proposed

to add 41.5 MW captive power plant to meet the above requirement. Hence,

the power plant addition will be 41.5 MW (i.e.) the post MEP installed capacity

will be 90.9 MW.


DEMO



Prepared by 46

In addition, the mill has the facility to draw power from state grid about 19.95

MVA capacity for any exigencies.

3.22 Environmental Impact Assessment

Construction Phase

The construction activities of new installation will not necessitate any

displacement of people, as the construction will be carried out in the existing


Operational Phase

Air Environment

The major pollutants from the expansion are Particulate Matter (PM) and

sulphur dioxide (SO2) from the AFBC Boiler. A high efficiency ESP will be

installed to reduce the particulate matter and the stack will be designed

suitably to reduce the effect of SO2 and NOx emission and the resultant

concentration of PM, SO2 and NOx will be kept well within the standards

prescribed by CPCB / SPCB.

Wastewater Characteristics and Disposal

The present treated wastewater discharge from the WWTP is 21,140 m³/day.

Only 8,700 m³/day is discharged into drain and 12,440 m³/day treated water is

used for irrigation.

The post MEP treated wastewater discharge from WWTP will be

26,920 m³/day. Only 8,700 m³/day of treated waste water will be discharged

into drain and 18,220 m³/day of treated wastewater will be used for irrigation.

The characteristics of wastewater generated from various sections of the mill

are as given in the following table

WASTEWATER CHARACTERISTICS (INFLUENT)

Parameters Units High COD Low COD(Combi

ned)

Flow m³/day 9,000 27,420

COD mgl 3,500 1,100

BOD mgl 1,100 400

The wastewater will be treated to conform to the statutory standards of

SPCB/CPCB before discharging for irrigation, ash quenching and plantation


DEMO



Prepared by 47

TREATED WASTEWATER CHARACTERISTICS

Sl. No

Parameters Unit CPCB Permissible Limit

1 pH -- 7.5-8

2 Total Suspended Solids mg/l <100

3 Total Dissolved Solids mg/l <2100

4 BOD (3 Days at 270C) mg/l <30

5 COD mg/l <350

6 AOX kg/t of product

<1

Solid Waste Generation and Disposal

The expected solid wastes generation in the proposed MEP are non-

hazardous in nature. The solid waste generation will be ash from AFBC

boilers, lime sludge and straw dust. In addition to this, there will be fibre

sludge generation from the wastewater treatment plant. The details of solid

waste generation and quantities with disposal methods are given in the

following table

DETAILS OF SOLID WASTE GENERATION & DISPOSAL



Post MEP



method

1 Straw dry dust



2 Straw wet dust



3 Wood saw dust




25 32.4 6.9




0.8

1.1 0.3



6 Lime sludge

45 60 15

Sold to cement manufacturing units through Tanya Enterprises.

will be sold to cement manufacturing units

7 Fly ash

220


coals)

405



Noise environment

The noise level of the all the equipment will be kept within the CPCB /

SPCB standard in and around the work zone.


DEMO



Prepared by 48

Socio – Economics

The proposed land is located at existing mill premises. Hence, there will

not be any resettlement and rehabilitation. Thus, there will not be any

adverse socio economic implications.

The economic status of the area is likely to improve, as there will be

direct/indirect employment generation during construction and

operational phases.

Risk Assessment & DMP

No major hazards with potential for any emergency situation exist in the

process plants. On site and off site emergency measures shall mitigate the

effect on any risk.

3.23 Environmental Management plan

3.23.1 Air Pollution Management

Installation of Electro Static Precipitator (ESP) of 99.9% efficiency to limit

the particulate matter concentrations below 50 mg/Nm3

Provision of adequate height stacks for wider dispersion of gaseous

emissions

Dust extraction system will be provided at transfer points of conveyor

system

Conveyor belt will be closed to prevent dust generation

Provision of water sprinkling system at material handling and storage

yard


Asphalting of the roads within the plant area; and

Development of green cover around the plant to arrest the fugitive

emissions.


DEMO



Prepared by 49

3.23.2 Water Pollution Management

Recycling of purged water in cooling tower into ash handling and

disposal system

Utilisation of treated domestic wastewater for green cover development

Provision of separate storm water system to collect and store run-off

water during rainy season and utilisation of the same in the process to

reduce the fresh water requirement.


The expected solid wastes from straw dust 26 tpd will be fired in boiler

as fuel.

The expected solid wastes from wood dust 6.5 tpd will be fired in the

boilers as fuel.

The total ash expected post MEP (from AFBC Boilers) will be about

625 tpd. This will be disposed of to fly ash brick manufacturing units.

The expected WWTP waste sludge (fines and fibres) is about 32.4 tpd –

sale to board manufacturer. About 60 tpd lime sludge will be disposed

to cement plants through Tanya Enterprises. Used oil is the other

hazardous waste, which will be disposed to CPCB/SPCB authorised

agencies.

3.24 Green Cover

In addition to the existing mitigation measures on environment, it is envisaged

to provide an additional environmental cover from emissions, by expanding

the existing green cover.


DEMO



Prepared by 50

The plantation and green cover development in an industrial area not only

serve as foreground and background

landscape features resulting in

harmonising and amalgamating the

physical structures of pulp and paper

mill with surrounding environment but

also act as a pollutant sink. The

plantation also contributes towards

environmental improvement in the

following areas:

Act as a “pollution sink” and prevent

spreading of particulate and other

atmospheric pollutants to the nearby

areas;

Provide vegetative cover;

Increase the aesthetics of the

surroundings; and provide resting,

feeding and breeding site for fauna.

Extensive plantation has been

done under green cover

development for the existing plant.

Green cover has been developed

and well maintained along the

internal roads and mill area. The

mill has made elaborate

arrangement in developing green

cover inside the mill.








DEMO



Prepared by 51

3.25 Social infrastructure

Social infrastructure such as potable water, sanitation facilities, canteen,

security, first aid and fire fighting system are already available in the site.

Additional facilities such as sanitation and potable water shall be extended to

project site also.


DEMO



Prepared by 52

4 SITE ANALYSIS

4.1 Site locational aspects

The proposed land for the project is in the existing mill premises, so that the

topography will not change in the present land use. The proposed facilities

will be located in the vacant spaces in the mill and some of the roads and

drains will be rerouted. The surroundings of the project site are mostly

agricultural land. The nearest village, Dhaula, is about 5 km from the mill and

the nearest bus route, viz. the State Highway SH-13, will be reachable at 0.5

km and the railway network about 12 km. There is no stream crossing the

plant site. Uppli canal is about 30 km away from the plant. There are no

hospitals, schools, temples and community halls within one (1) km area. This

area is not falling into the forest land and there is no eco-sensitive zone.

4.2 Connectivity & Transportation

The plant is well developed with necessary infrastructure facilities such as

motorable road up to plant site, nearness to rail head, telephone and telefax

facilities.

Nearest town - Barnala - 10 km

National Highway - 7 km

Nearest railway station - Barnala - 12 km

Nearest airport - Chandigarh - 175 km

Construction of MEP and other facilities involves movement of materials of

great magnitude. The materials to be transported includes earthwork, concrete

and other materials. Transport of construction materials to the project site will

result in increased traffic in the area, which shall certainly put additional load

on the existing road infrastructure. Project needs heavy-duty equipment and

requires strengthening of the existing approach road to plant site to handle the

additional heavy traffic on the existing moderate road. While strengthening the

existing road, enough spaces on both sides of the road will be provided,

keeping in mind the low awareness levels of the local population regarding

heavy-duty vehicles.

Transportation for this project involves the following:

Raw materials and finished products to a maximum extent will be

transported through existing railway network


DEMO



Prepared by 53

Coal and HSD are envisaged to be supplied from the CCL coal fields

and terminals using high capacity trucks and tankers and imported coal

will be transported by ships and then by trucks/rail.

However, for the road traffic expected due to the plant construction and

operations, TLPD shall provide necessary resting facilities for the truck drivers.

Also, variety of business opportunities exists to the local population to start

services such as rest rooms, food, and automobile repairing.

4.3 Land Use, Land Form and Land Ownership

About 20 acres of land required for MEP has been identified within the

existing mill premises

The identified land form is for industrial use

The overall mill layout is enclosed as Annexure 11.

4.4 Project Location Aspects

TLPD is located at Dhaula village, Barnala taluk, Sangrur district in Punjab

state.

The site is located at the intersection of longitude 30o 17'' 57'N and latitude 75o

29” 32' E.

The site is about 175 km from Chandigarh the state capital and at about 7 km

from the National Highway.

4.5 Environmental Setting of the Site

The details of environmental setting around the proposed expansion site are

given in the following table

ENVIRONMENTAL SETTING OF THE SITE

S No Particulars Details

1. Latitude 30o 17''57’ N

2. Longitude 75o 29''32’ E

3. Elevation above MSL 224 M

4. Climatic conditions as per IMD Ludhiana

a] Annual Max. Temp :43.5oC

b] Annual Min. Temp : 7.8oC

c] Annual total rainfall : 686.3 mm

5. Present land use at the proposed site

Un cultivable land within the premises of existing plant

6. Nearest highway State Highway -13 - 600 m

7. Nearest railway station Barnala (12 .0 km)

8. Nearest airstrip Chandigarh (175.0 km)

9. Nearest village Dhaula (5 km)


DEMO



Prepared by 54

S NO Particulars Details

10. Nearest town Barnala(10.0 km)

11 Hills/valleys No hills and valley

12. Monuments Nil in 10 km radius

13. Archeologically important places Nil in 10 km radius.

14. National Parks Nil in 10 km radius

15. List of Industries There are no major industries in the study area.

16. Land required 20 acres - available with in the plant premises owned by TLPD.

17. Population to be displaced No displacement as the land belongs to TLPD and is within the plant premises.

18. Topography of the plant site The area forms a part of Indogangetic alluvial plain and is more or less flat

19. Nature of soil Sandy and sandy loam

Google View of Mill Location


DEMO



Prepared by 55

ROUTE MAP OF SITE

STUDY AREA MAP (10 KM RADIUS)

Trident Limited (AIL),


DEMO



Prepared by 56

The proposed project site is locate within the existing plant premises

New Recovery Boiler Wastewater Treatment Plant

Augmentation

New Boilers and Coal Yard New TGs & Cooling Tower

4.6 Existing Infrastructure

The existing infrastructure of proposed site is as below:

- Surface water From Uppli canal

- Ground water From 7 bore wells within existing mill premises

- Coal From CCL, Madhya Pradesh/imported

- Electricity Existing sub station/captive generation

All managerial and other infrastructure required for the implementation of

project are available. In addition, skilled labour is available in the existing

factory to oversee implementation and commissioning of the project.


DEMO



Prepared by 57

4.7 Soil Classification

The predominant soil classification of the proposed site is sandy and sandy

loam.

4.8 Climatic Data

The site specific climatic data are as below

Maximum Temperature 43.5 °C

Minimum Temperature 7.8 °C

Average annual rainfall 686.3 mm

Predominant Wind Direction SE at 0830 hrs and NW, W at 1730 hrs

Relative humidity range 26- 69%


DEMO



Prepared by 58

5 PLANNING BRIEF

5.1 Planning Concept

The project is conceptualised for expanding the exising facilities and involves

Augmentation of pulp mills, paper machines and chemical recovery plant

Expansion of captive power plant and augmentation of utilities and

auxiliaries

All the above facilities will be within the existing plant premises and will use

the existing infrastructure facilities.

5.2 Population Projection

The proposed MEP will be located within the existing mill premises and the

population is negligible around the mill. However, the population is likely to go

up in the region due to direct and indirect employment with their family

members.

5.3 Land Use Planning

The mill has total land of 405 acres, with vacant spaces and well covered with

greenery, and plantation is about 220 acres.

About 20 acres of land is required for the proposed project as per the broad

break-up given in the table below. The vacant spaces available in the mill

premises, have been identified and found to be suitable and adequate to

accommodate all the new facilities planned under the project.

LAND REQUIREMENT FOR MEP

Sl. No

Category Area (m²)

1 Plant buildings 12,900

2 Storage yards 40,000

3 Roads, drains 2,000

4 WWTP 2,000

5 Additional Green cover 20,000

Total 76,900

Acres 19

5.4 Assessment of Infrastructure Demand (Physical, Social)

Infrastructure/amenities/facilities required for the proposed expansion project

will be assessed based on the need based survey in the surrounding area.

The infrastructure development will be taken up under CSR activity.


DEMO



Prepared by 59

6 Proposed infrastructure

6.1 Industrial Area (Processing Area)

This being an expansion project; most of the infrastructure like water intake

system, power intake, roads, railway for raw material/product transportation is

already available. The same will be augmented according to requirement.

6.2 Residential Area (Non Processing Area)

Hostel and guest house are already available within the plant premises and

required additional residential accommodations including all infrastructures

such as roads, drains etc shall be constructed.

6.3 Drinking Water Management

Drinking water will be sourced from Uppli canal. Water treatment is installed

at factory to treat the intake water and distributed to various sections of the

plant and residential area.

6.4 Drains and Sewerage System

Drains and sewerage system will be designed according to needs of the plant

and residential area and shall be properly connected and linked to the existing

drains and sewerage lines.

6.5 Rain water Harvesting

The existing mill has a well developed rain water harvesting system to

enhance the ground water level. The run-off water from the roof of the new

structures and paved areas shall be collected through a storm water drainage

system and led to rain water harvesting structure.


DEMO



Prepared by 60

7 Rehabilitation and resettlement (R & R) plan

The land proposed for MEP is within the existing mill premises.

Hence the project will not involve any rehabilitation and resettlement.


DEMO



Prepared by 61

8 project schedule and cost estimates

8.1 Implementation Schedule

The MEP is proposed to be implemented in stages as per priority

requirement, in a sequence as below.

Paper machines will be augmented to increase the production using

purchased pulp, over and above the existing captive pulp production.

Augmentation of pulp mills and recovery plant to maximise the usage of

captive pulp and to reduce the imported pulp

Expansion of the captive power plant and augmentation of auxiliaries

The major activities are highlighted below and the completion time indicated

are from the “zero date” which is the date of Environment Clearance (EC)

- Start date “Zero Date”

- Ordering of long delivery plant and equipment 2nd quarter

- Commencement of civil construction 3rd quarter

- Commencement of start-up trial & commissioning 8th quarter

- Commencement of commercial production 10th quarter

- Total duration of the project implementation 27 months

8.2 Project Cost


break up is given in the following table

PROJECT COST

Sl. No Description Cost in Crores

1 Civil Works 33

2 Plant & Machinery Cost (including erection and engineering) 367


40

Total 440

8.3 Environmental Protection

Environmental protection will be monitored and implemented by a centralised

environmental management cell. The fiscal estimate has been arrived for the

proposed project as given below.


DEMO



Prepared by 62

About Rs. 81 crores is allocated towards pollution control equipment and

implementation of environmental pollution control measures.

The details of investment for procuring the equipment for effluent control and

monitoring of pollution are as below

Section Rs. Crore

Chemical recovery section 64

Power boilers - ESP and Stack 8

Environmental protection and monitoring 3

Additional green cover development 3

WWTP augmentation 3

Total 81

8.4 Economic Viability

The economic viability of proposed project is as below. (All figures incremental

of post MEP over pre-MEP)

Description Unit Value

Sales

Paper tpa 64,000

Steam to other units tpa 591,000

Power to other units mWh 189,000

Income Rs. Crore 460

Variable cost Rs. Crore 330

Contribution Rs. Crore 130

Additional fixed expenses

Additional salaries and wages Rs Crore 2

Repairs and maintenance Rs. Crore 6

PBDIT Rs. Crore 122

Investment Rs. Crore 440

Return on Investment (ROI) % 27.8

Payback Years 6

Expected IRR % 24.8


DEMO



Prepared by 63

9 Analysis of Proposals (final recommendations)

9.1 Improvement in the Physical Infrastructure

The mill has been expanding in stages from 137,000 tpa to 2,01,000 tpa. The

total industrial unit is well planned including residential area, infrastructure

facilities, roads and drains, drinking water and sewerage system, green cover,

etc.

The proposed project is for upgrading and augmenting the production

capacities and increasing captive power generation to meet the additional

demand to the paper mill and the other TRIDENT group units. The present

infrastructure already in place will meet the requirements of the project.

However, TRIDENT will take initiative to further strengthen/ improve the basic

community needs such as education, health care, infrastructure facilities such

as roads, street lighting, drinking water, etc.

9.2 Improvement in the Social infrastructure

It would be somewhat difficult to quantify all the benefits of a project of this

type and nature to the state and national economy, because there are too

many “spin off” of indirect benefits in addition to the direct benefits.

Some of the specific indirect benefits are presented below.

9.2.1 Employment Potential



project would generate additionally employment to about 500 persons in the

service organisations for material unloading and material feeding to the plant.

During construction phase of the project, this project will provide temporary

employment to many unskilled and semi skilled labour for erection and

movement of material. Approximately 500 people on an average peak day will

be employed for a period of about 10 to 12 months.

9.2.2 Contribution to State Exchequer

The project is likely to generate additional income to the state by way of sales

tax to the tune of Rs.5.5 crores and by way of excise duty to the tune of

Rs.45 crores.


DEMO



Prepared by 64

9.2.3 Non dependence on Grid Power

At present, TLPD drawsabout 5.0 MW (maximum) from the grid for the entire

group manufacturing activities. The paper mill as well as the other units are

expanding their activities and the power requirement during post MEP will be

31 MW for the paper unit and 50 MW for the other group factories. By

upgrading the captive cogeneration plant, the power generation will go up and

TRIDENT will be able to meet the entire demand of 81 MW for its group from

the captive power plant, thus help the state government by not drawing from

the grid.

9.2.4 Establishment of ancillary business

The implementation of the project will undoubtedly provide stimulation for

added growth to a number of other industries some of which are given below

Trucking industry which will load and haul wood, straw, coal, lime and

supplies to the mill and also mill outputs. The haulage requirement for the

project would be around 0.5 million tonnes per annum comprising both

inputs and outputs.

Establishment of ancillary industries such as burnt lime, core for paper

reels, core plugs, machining and welding units, etc.

Indigenous machinery suppliers / manufacturers.

Establishment of indirect industries and shops near the project site such as

small scale work shops, hardware shops, small scale restaurants, petty

civil and electrical contractors, grocery and provision shops, etc.

Construction industry during erection and construction period.

9.3 Corporate Social Responsibility initiatives at TLPD














DEMO



Prepared by 65











Stakeholders.





Female empowerment


Skill development


Medical facilities












age care.






DEMO



Prepared by 66

Environment friendly product developments - Paper from agri-residue

and ECF Technology


industrial plants



machines










pesticide




parts of the state as well as from outside undergo special courses and

are provided with suitable employment. There has been initiation of skill





Donation to educational institutions in Barnala such as Boys ITI and

Girls ITI to enable them to provide good infrastructure and facilities to

the students in this area.


Management







DEMO



Prepared by 67


of female employees, providing them with avenues of growth, working

on Environmental & Behavioural


hygiene, welfare, education, facilitating basic amenities at work place

and above all, rewarding & recognising the best of talent amongst

female members.





Conducting recruitment of candidates through Takshashila Walk-Ins.

The young members (fresher) are hired based on aptitude tests and

given skill enhancement trainings to develop into skilled professionals at

all levels and cadres.

Through its CSR initiatives, various benefits have accrued STLPP. A detailed

account of the success achieved in all CSR activities is as follows:

1. Asmita

The initiative has helped in increasing the employability for female

workforce in area which has been reflected in the increased numbers of

female employees over the years. Also, the number of female members

opting to use the residential facility provided by the organisation has

increased. Satisfaction survey is being conducted on yearly basis to

assess the engagement level and address the areas of concern.

2. Takshashila

The success of 12 batches which have passed out of Takshashila over

the years and their performance in the work area.

3. Takshashila Walk-In

A number of members enrolling for the recruitments and the

performance of the trainees who develop into skilled operators has been

commendable/not worthy.

4. Green Technology

Monitoring of the trend of parameters having impact on environment –

COD/BOD, effluent parameters.


DEMO



Prepared by 68

5. Health Camps

Increased awareness amongst the members and impact on deployment

6. Improvement in the education facility and employability

Improvement in the education facility and employability of the children

where initiative has been taken to support education of members

In order to take Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) to the next level, TLPD

is constantly striving towards identifying the deepest pain areas which require

immediate attention from a corporate standpoint. TLPD understands that its

actions have a great impact on the Community and so, it is committed towards

this responsibility.

CSR Activity 2011-12


1 Skill School SHVTI - Skill development and employment of surrounding

villages. On-the-job training, stipend and part time job opportunities during

schooling. Employment after the course. Currently running trades are -

SMO (Sewing Machine Operators), Electricians, Computer Operators.

Skill School IL&FS

2 Skill development and employment of surrounding villages and States. On

the job training, part time job opportunities during schooling.

reimbursement of fees after employment. Currently running trades are -

SMO, GC(Garment Checker).

3 Conducted half day workshop (5 hours) at Sacred Heart School for staff

members on 5S and Kaizen at School

Lecture on “Green Manufacturing “in National Level Conference at SLIET

An alliance between TLPD Budni and ITI Nasrullaganj has been established.

18 students of electrical stream are undergoing an internship for a period of 6

months post successful completion of which of the students will be absorbed

by the group.

Employee Welfare

The organisation pays special attention to ensure the families of the





DEMO



Prepared by 69


together.

A Ladies Club has been formed which is chaired by the First Lady Mrs. Seema

Dinesh Mittal. The club meets on the second Saturday of every month.

Woman Empowerment




members only.

Rural Development






Others

1. Installed a water cooler in ITI Barnala boy’s & girl’s hostels


Barnala for job at TLPD Yarn SNG. They are working satisfactorily in the

packing section


employment at TLPD

Green in TLPD

1. Start working on paper less office

2. Reduce specific water, power & steam consumption by 2% on YOY basis


9.4 Corporate Social Responsibility

Due to increased activity in the area, TLPD will be spending more on CSR

activities in this region, the benefiting local people.

In view of the foregoing, it is anticipated that the potential contribution from this

project to the State of Punjab and National economy would be significant.


DEMO

1 introduction please register pdf splitter and merger

Documents